Husserl On. Interpreting Husserl (D. Carr - Kluwer 1987)
Husserl On. Interpreting Husserl (D. Carr - Kluwer 1987)
Husserl On. Interpreting Husserl (D. Carr - Kluwer 1987)
IW
DAVID CARR
INTERPRETING HUSSERL
Critical and Comparative Studies
it
MARTiNUS NiJHOFF
81 IS H I: R'
PHAENOMENOLOGICA
COLLECTION FONDEE PAR H
.
INTERPRETING HUSSERL
Critical and Comparative Studies
HUSSERL
106
DAVID CARR
The University of Ottawa
DAVID CARR
INTERPRETING HUSSERL
Comite de redaction de la collection: President: S Usseling (Leuven) Membres: L Landgrebe (Koln), W. Marx (Freiburg i Br.) J N. Mohanty (Philadelphia) P. Ricoeur (Paris) E. Stroker (Koln) J. Taminiaux (Louvain-La Neuve), Secretaire: J Taminiaux
. . .
Contents
Preface
Distributors
VII
for the UK and Ireland: Kluwer Academic Publishers MTP Press Limited,
,
Husserl
1
.
23
25
45
71
Distribution Center,
3
4
HusserPs Crisis and the Problem of History ... History, Phenomenology and Reflection
97 \
115
Data
II.
6
.i
'
Intentionality: Husserl and the Analytic Approach The Problem of The Non-Empirical Ego: Husserl
and Kant
117
137
1940.
f '
Interpreting Husserl
7
.
(Phaenomenologica ; 106) Includes bibliographies and index 1. Husserl Edmund, 1859-1938. I. Title
,
II. Series.
8
'
B3279.H94C29
1987
193
87
5641
r
-
9
r
ISBN 90-247-3505-X
J
The Future Perfect: Temporality and Priority in Husserl, Heidegger and Dilthey
Conceptual Relativists
197
213.
227 s
Copyright
Interpreters
Dordrecht.
the publishers,
All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written
,
,
247
249
permission of
,
13. 'Personalities of a Higher Order' 14. Cogitamus Ergo Sumus: The Intentionality of the
First-Person Plural
267
281
Acknowledgments
Index
299
301
T. ri
Preface
Edmund Husserl's importance for the philosophy of our century is immense, but his influence has followed a curious path. Rather than continuous it has been recurrent, ambulatory and somehow irrepressible: no sooner does it wane in one locality than it springs up in another. After playing a major role in Germany during his lifetime, Husserl had been filed away in the history-books of that
country when he was discovered by the French during and after World War II. And just as the phenomenological phase of French philosophy was ending in the 1960's, Husserl became important in North America. There his work was first taken seriously by a sizable minority of dissenters from the Anglo-American establishment, the tradition of conceptual and linguistic analysis. More recently, some philosophers within that tradition have drawn on certain of Husserl's central concepts (intentionality, the noema)
LESLIE CARR
ing as a problem in recent German and French thought. One way or another, it is clear that Husserl has long since ceased to be merely the founding father of phenomenology, or the forerunner of this or that philosopher, or the precursor of certain
VIII
IX
trends. He has joined the ranks of those great thinkers whose thought seems inexhaustible in its richness, to whose works we are repeatedly returning, and whose ideas we are continually trying to understand and appropriate.
connection with a particular topic: certain analytic philosophers on intentionality, Dilthey and Heidegger on temporality, Kant on the transcendental ego, J.N. Findlay on realism, idealism and the epoche, hermeneutical philosophers on self-evidence, etc. To the
The essays in this volume, previously published in different places, have been brought together in the hope that in collected form they may contribute to that work of appropriation They were written between 1972 and 1986 and thus represent various stages in the
.
originally written in German and appear here for the first time in
English. The third section is entitled 'Husserl and Beyond'. In these
project of 'interpreting HusserP in which I am still engaged. I have not attempted to eliminate any inconsistencies which may have resulted from changes in my interpretations or criticisms over the years. Only minor and superficial revisions have been made. Certain themes and concerns persist: the problem of conceptual relativism the relation of phenomenology to history the concepts of intentionality and of the lifeworld While the essays might have been arranged according to such themes or in chronological order, a third principle of arrangement in the end seems most
,
,
.
essays Husserl serves as a point of departure for the development of ideas he might or might not have found congenial. They were written as preparatory studies for a book on the philosophy of history in which the concepts of temporality and of the social
appropriate.
been trying to think through and beyond him. The same is true of these essays, and it is for this reason that I have chosen to
include them here.
here primarily with problems internal to the philosopher's work The emergence of history as an important concept in HusserPs late writings, and the problems it poses for his phenomenology, are
.
The Crisis of European Sciences1 and which led to a book on the topic. Two of the papers in this section deal with the same themes one in connection primarily with the Crisis the other dealing
, ,
chiefly with Experience and Judgment A third is related to them, and deals with the problem of intersubjectivity in the Cartesian Meditations. HusserPs phenomenology seemed to me to be threatened from within by a form of conceptual relativism in these late works but it subsequently occured to me that the roots of this threat could be traced to earlier works as well. 'Phenomenology
.
and Relativism' tries to show this and since it deals with the early Husserl I have placed it first in this group. The chronology of HusserPs work then leads me to follow it with the essay on the
,
of the
Part Two
and
sfisflan.v.
' ( *'ir'v:&
NOTES
1.
1970).
Phenomenology and the Problem of History (Evanston: Northwestern University Press 1974).
,
SO's Maurice Merleau-Ponty wrote an essay called 'Le philosophe et son ombre'.1 It was devoted to Husserl, and the title was well chosen for paying homage to a philosopher who so often spoke of the Abschattungen (shadings, profiles) through which perceived things present themselves to us. Shadows, of course, have a long and noble metaphorical history in philosophy; one might be put in mind of Plato's shadows which, unreal though they are, resemble and can lead us to the real entities which cast them. Merleau-Ponty had something else in mind, however: he linked the shadows cast by objects to the spaces between objects and both in turn to what Heidegger called das Ungedachte in a thinker's work. Shadows, spaces, reflections, like the silences and pauses in and around segments of discourse, are not themselves objects or sentences. But they are openings and occasions for perceptions and thoughts which would not have been possible
,
In the
without them.
Everyone knows, of course, that Husserl is a giant of our century who indeed casts a long shadow. Shadows also change their length and direction as the day wears on. Merleau-Ponty, in
this and other writings of the same period, was contributing to the second great wave of Husserlian influence in 20th century European philosophy the one which began after World War II and was so greatly facilitated by the Husserliana editions. ('Le philosophe et son ombre' was primarily a meditation on Ideen
,
vol. II,
which had been published in 1952). In the first phase, Husserl had inspired various schools of close disciples in Germany, but the greatest fruits of his thought were the original
is a Husserlian or even a phenomenologist in Husserl's sense yet neither can be imagined or properly understood without
,
Husserl.
disclaimers; his conception of phenomenology as a method of arriving at the truth, another vestige of the influence of Descartes. Nothing is more broadly characteristic of 20th century philosophy
ranging from the important mediating work of great teachers and interpreters (Spiegelberg Landgrebe, Gurwitsch and others) to the most dreary and pedestrian academic exercises But
,
,
.
(including in this case Anglo-American philosophy) than its rejection of idealism and Cartesianism. Nor would anyone argue
that Husserl's influence is chiefly negative because of these traits
again Husserl's spirit was better served by those less concerned with the letter: Sartre Merleau-Ponty himself, and Paul Ricoeur
,
of his thought, as if he embodied them so purely that he served primarily as whipping-boy for his successors. No, most would
agree that Husserl s contribution was positive and that it is
'
(though the last also has an honored place among the great
teachers and interpreters) Another wave of influence at this time,
.
alike in not being wedded to texts and orthodoxy was that felt in the social sciences (especially sociology, thanks to Schutz) and literary theory and criticism It was at this point too (and I am thinking now of the 1960*5) that phenomenology, both inside and outside academic philosophical circles crossed the Atlantic and
,
.
with its later variant, lifeworld, both closely tied to the notion of intentionality and together linked to a certain philosophical attitude, that of the epoche. Such a thesis may seem uncontroversial if one considers solely the influence of Husserl on the early
established itself in North America no longer as a 'school' or even a 4movement' as Spiegelberg called it but now more soberly and sedately as a 'tradition' As such it challenged the Anglo-American mainstream sometimes appearing so broad as to include
,
almost everything but Analytic Philosophy sometimes identified more with (early) Heidegger sometimes more with Merleau-Ponty
,
,
Heidegger and on French existentialism and phenomenology, even on sociology. But I want to make a stronger historical claim. I believe that Husserl's position on the world marks a significant turning-point in the history of the appearance-reality distinction, he and that this position has been widely accepted even outside t
sphere of Husserl s successors. It is a position of ontological neutrality beyond realism and idealism. It is partly expressed in
'
of a mythical divinity founded it and gave it its name Only recently has the term 'phenomenological' given way to the more neutral term 'continental' since many feel that in the last fifteen
,
.
than with Husserl Nevertheless, Husserl somehow presided over this tradition at the very least as the figure who in the manner
.
'
world
'
'
is also taken for granted, I shall argue, even among professedly post- or non-phenomenological philosophers of our time. In some
cases it is not a question of Husserl s direct or even indirect influence, to be sure; and he may not be the only philosopher to
'
has its sources outside phenomenology and is in many cases directed against it How can we properly characterize Husserl's influence on subsequent 20th century thought first on the continent and then in North America? Is there a basic concept or cluster of concepts which has been decisive for Husserl's successors? Certainl
,
have facilitated this conceptual shift. But he certainly gave it its most explicit formulation and thematization.
been decisive: his neo Cartesianism for example conceived as a quest for certainty founded on an 'absolute' subject; his apriorism and intuitionism; his idealism, often hard to distinguish from a metaphysical subjectivism k la Berkeley or Leibniz in spite of his
,
,
y we can
in
at it is and as what it is, independently of us and of how we think of and perceive it Of this we are all firmly convinced at some very deep level. The world does of course,
,
can sift and compare the ideas themselves, arriving at predictive judgments about them which can be confirmed if they occur as
include us but in our absence it would apart from the detail of our absence from it remain as it is. But it does sometimes appear to be other than it is Distinguishing the merely apparent from the
,
predicted. But then this does not confirm our belief that they hat represent or resemble or are caused by the world, or indeed t there is anything at all to which they correspond or from which they derive. Thus the way of ideas raises more problems than it
solves: while it finds a home for appearances it cuts us off from
ds
feeling the need to provide a theoretical account in general terms Many have held that 'the appearances' are
.
Few were
on
it seems since it is their difference from the real world which gives them whatever status they have. It was suggested (first in the
,
directly deal in our experience and practice. They are not simply nothing. But that raises the question of where these appearances belong in the order of things They cannot be part of the world,
.
less, hovering between us and our surroundings and even between being and non-being This is the problem for which the modern period as is well
.
somehow home-
it. But he
reasons that the mind must do more than merely receive the ideas
known
of the perceiving and knowing subject. It may even be said that the modern concept of mind was fashioned just in order to accomodate these previously errant and homeless entities. The way of ideas' is inaugurated: the mind contains and deals directly with ideas now conceived as occurant impressions (as on wax or paper), pictures, images representations. Indeed this is all the mind deals with in a direct way and this has two important consequences: one is that the appearances are not necessarily all false: even our veridical grasp of the world is mediated by the
4
, ,
pearances do have being and while their place is not where it seems (in the world) they do have a place after all: in the mind
them. It refers them to objects, which it distinguishes from and its representations, by means of a priori concepts of those objects and of relations among them. That is, it does not arrive
with this notion of an objective world in general, together with
lf itse
at the notion of such external objects and relations, for if it started without such a notion it could never arrive there. Rather, it begins
the objects to each other. We all share these rules, and this perm
us to fill in our general idea of an objective world
its
with a science
which tells us in detail what objects there are and what actual relations (laws) obtain among them.
Two well-known facts about the Kantian compromise set the stage for what follows. One is that the objective world (nature)
get us beyond them. The second is that the whole appearancereality distinction is now doubled: the a priori concepts which take
'
'
.
3
'
what appears in that realm and to apply them to what does not so appear (the world as it is in itself) is according to Kant,
, ,
suggests that there is something radically wrong with these formulations. They portray a consciousness engaged in an experiential struggle with appearances, but related only by aspiration to a
world indefinitely, perhaps even infinitely distant from it. In relation to that goal, every reality achieved in the course of
' '
and tentative;
all possible experience In his Phenomenology he returns us to the origin of the whole distinction: 'natural consciousness' our
,
however hard-won and stable it may be by contrast to the appearances it supercedes, it maintains nevertheless the status of mere
concrete,
despair'
ent and distinguishing it from what is in truth Further, he conceives of this grappling much more broadly than Kant: it is not only in our dealings with nature, with a view to science but also in dealing with each other and even in knowing ourselves that
.
appearance. In the end this view repeats the classical split between relaity on one side and appearance on the other, the latter finding its home in the mind. Or, alternatively, we could say that the mind
conception
But for all his concreteness, how does Hegel actually conceive of our relation to the world? In his dynamic and even heroic
,
ment, in which the reality so painfully attained at one become the appearance to be transcended at another
goal to be attained
.
it
with appearances Without it the struggle would make no sense; its attainment (which we will necessarily recognize as such if and when it happens) will put an end to the struggle But at no stage short of that are we actually with the world itself
.
.
is in direct and intimate contact with the real. The things we see and touch, the space in which we move and the persons with whom
we interact are not shadowy (mere) appearances but the real itself. ith the They may not be all of it, but through them our contact w world is direct and immediate. The world is not the end-point or
II
goal of our activities but the starting-point and scene of them, the pre-given background of our strivings, the underpinning whose reality and stability we take for granted in whatever we do. This
tacit 'thesis' of the natural standpoint, which Husserl is at pains
f Ideas /, is itself to express in some of the most famous passages o
Husserl sometimes speaks of the world in a very similar way At the beginning of Ideas I he defines the world as the 'sum-total of objects of possible experience and experiential cognition of ob.
it is there and Husserl attempts to articulate it in detail It involves more than the idea that 'what is is', i.e., it is more than just our Urglaube in the reality of the real It is further specified if only vaguely, in terms of spae and time the distinction between persons
.
and things, between consciousness and world and indeed between appearance and reality What is more, and perhaps most important, natural consciousness is at bottom convinced that its relation to the world while indeed partial, is nevertheless direct: the world
,
.
gives a certain privilege to theoretical lian they stand alongside others, and he does not make the Hege
mistake of subsuming them all to the quest for a theoretical
is given.
knowledge of the whole. Thus he keeps a sense of the distinct d All such spheres, spheres of operation in which we are engage
.
Husserl believes that the philosopher's or scientist's commitment to a reality in itself corresponding to a perfected theory, has led to a misunderstanding of natural consciousness or experience. It is for this reason that he proposes bracketing that commitment
ordinary life
to particular mental acts and the objects to which they are neces ld to be an object or sarily directed, he does not consider the wor
-
arrived at in science or ideally achieved at some future time, but to let ordinary experience speak for itself. As he says, in a passage
either already
'
has to be brought to pure expression of its own sense'.4 This is not to say that Husserl identifies himself with the natural
attitude. In fact
.
out. The concepts of object and world are object except as part of the world, no world except as background
jects.
for objects, collections of objects, domains and spheres of obHow then does the world stand in relation to intentionality?
ble
Consequently
attitude which has prevented traditional philosophy from appreciating their nature or even their existence Only the attempt to extricate ourselves from them can bring them into our view
.
.
attitude itself Husserl speaks of the sciences of the natural standpoint and even includes (pre-phenomenological) philosophy among them It is sharing in the deep commitments of the natural
.
ither, not interior to it, no not collapsible into that experience e more reell enthalten in consciousness, to use Husserl s term, than
whose solidity and reality we take for granted and which functions
our activirt#*c kw *i
phenomenological standpoint the attitude of the epoche From that standpoint a conception of the world of natural consciousness emerges whose outlines we have already begun to
,
.
volves putting oneself philosophically in a position to hear and understand what it says. That position is what Husserl calls the
with a world
could be considered apart from its The doctrine of intentionality a world in the ways just described. must in this sense be reformulated: it is not just that consciousness is consciousness of something but also that, in being conscious of ious of the world. And here it something, it is always also consc is understood that the world is not just another something of which it is conscious. For being conscious of the world is different
worldliness
'
or relatedness to
'
VfL
10
11
no matter
world as pre-given horizon fort the mind's sense-giving opercontributed to the Husserl-reviations, and when Merleau-Ponty s he was in part reacting against the excesses of val of the 1950
'
as anonymous,
self-understandings, and it is one we can never fully escape or is there any reason to think that overhaul by and for ourselves; nor we should. The same is true of the inter subjective character of this
in devaluing it as inauthentic.
revolt against these conceptions, begun but not, as we have seen, successfully completed by Kant and Hegel is achieved by Husserl. But is this not after all, just a renewed version of idealism?
,
,
The
important new
Certainly it involves the philosophical abstention from ontological committment to a reality independent of and indifferent to mind On the other hand it is not a denial of such reality or the claim that the only reality is in the mind or a construct of mind Husserl's official position as dictated by the epochs is neutrality on the 'metaphysicar issue of external reality and he often describes this as 'transcendental' idealism which presumably can be combined k la Kant, with an empirical realism It would be bettter to say simply that Husserl correcly describes natural consciousness as being committed to 'external' (i e non-mental)
.
version of phenomenology. If our experience is always already world we share with others. The enmeshed in a world, it is a lly their public character; our objectivity of its objects is rea
interaction with others and our sense that we all experience and
tures and basic categories, its are part of the same world. Its struc taken for granted not just by possibilities and impossibilities, are
'
do and think, individually and me but by all of us in what we is aspect of Husserl s later together. Needless to say, it was th d by the phenomenological socioworld-concept that was develope logists and ethnomethodologists.
3t
to remake myself in this way is to remake my world as well. This view was never in keeping with Husserl's notion of the
if.
which most of us live, it is a state of inauthenticity or bad faith from which we can (or should) rescue ourselves by re constituting it in toto in an act of resolutenss To be authentic is to take charge of my own existence, recapture it from the anonymous das Man and remake it ex nihilo or from my own existential resources; and
-
It is true that Husserl speaks of consciousness as 'constituting' its objects in the sense that it bestows meaning (though of course not existence) on them At the hands of the existentialists (such as the early Heidegger and Sartre) this became the view that the individual constitutes (or perhaps could or should constitute) his or her world While a pre-constitued world is in fact the state in
.
.
of the concept of world, as we no small matter. A crucial feature have described it so far, is its subject-relatedness. That is, as we
stands in necessary correlation to saw, it is nothing by itself but that it is just as wrong to think a subject. Now Husserl is saying it is to conceive of a world by of the world of a single subject as han an object or itself. The world is indeed a horizon, rather t idual, ill has this status for each indiv collection of objects; and it st functions thus for a But the very sense of this status is that it
multiplicity of subjects in commo
n
.
hich troubles HusBut this raises an important question, one w which is decisive for everything serl himself in his last years and this 'multiplicity of subjects that follows: what is the nature of which the individual stands to which the world is correlated and to
'
ft
12
13
related by sharing the world? Husserl's rationalist tendencies initially lead him to conceive of it simply as the universality of all AiXms kailx y vi aaiiLy ui an c.kj o a- j . . subjects an open-ended totality with shared world structures. But he was able to see that such a notion did not square with his
v* * 4-r"**i-jr*j
lon8 after its specifically 'phenomenological phase has passed. t-day reciate this ambiguity in its presen But before we can app
'
-
form we must consider which Husserlian conceptions survive and 101111 wc u,u:>l
-
belong.
indeed assume that the structures of their world are universally valid, in fact their shared and communal character is a function of the particular cultural and historical communities to which they
. *
hermeneutics
can be seen in part as rejections of the sort of subjectivism an individualism associated with the existentialists and, through
What is attacked is them, with the phenomenology of l existing subject can be the primarily the view that the individua
l Husser
,
.
This poses a dilemma for Husserl's later work because it challenges his rationalism and universalism It seems to raise from within his own thought the spectre of conceptual relativism wumn ms own thou
.
(in Sartre's expression) of meaning and 5 If Merleau-Ponty (as we have noted) and later Ricoeur value. value- 11 Jvieneau romy - , 1 they have
'
permanent source
'
.,
...
3-lClK.C ctllU
men
CllCWta
beenthe very concept of the subject was launched, urging the regarded by many astoo on
the
' -A
historical specificity of thought was supposed to be traced back to the universal structures of the lifeworld from which it springs
Z,
.
. TZt
.
the reductionism associated autonomy are very different from a commitment t0 a with scientific realism which beginS with * commitment to 3 scientific realism which begins with
puysiCiU l tauty wuamis x*
wmcn u oeiongs and becomes seuimeiucu a the ???&tj wnvt wcuuics sedimented as t"
markedly from that of another. Not only thou too, not only the objecti ght but experience ve world of science but the lifeworld itself, must be considered variable as a function of traditi Every expression of on and history. conceptual thought including science and philosophy and indeed even the very phenomenological philoso,
pre-conceptual lifeworld of those who follow The lifeworld of one generation one historical period one culture may thus differ
,
Physical reahty existing in itself.isFor the forces and structures to ic supposedly subjected are themQimnnsedlv subjected are themF J
Cc u/hi Vi individual consciousness IS suppohcuiy uujtv inHiviHnal nonsciOUSneSS which
.
_?
human structures, complexes of selves, in a larger sense, still their interaction with human meaning, unthinkable apart from lse these post-phebeings as 'meaning-bearing' entities. However e differ from each other, they all nomenological theories may reality which is closer to that of a operate with a concept of dent reality-in-itself. While it world' than that of a mind-indepen
' * '
pimusopi
itself has largely vanished, along with logical terminology, the fact many other elements of phenomeno remains that the reality of even the most anti-subjectivist post
'
'
in
ing except by reference to thing which has no status or stand e legacy of the human experience. It seems clear that this is on ioningly retained. Husserlian approach which has been unquest The relation of such But there is a great deal more than this. the individual conceived meMinrstru aur to the individual is conceived in terms that can meaning-structures to
'
" '
**> "e traced back to Husserl.nQnarencvtheythe consciously thmkBecause of begin by qu omng . . lf trfl
the autonomy "*the self-transparenCy
14
15
ing and acting subject these theorists stress what is tacitly taken
,
action
unexpressed commitment to the whole of reality. Without this whole any individual act, expression, object or product would not
be what it is, would, in fact, be nothing at all.
and speech possible without being noticed This stress on the hidden and taken-for-granted background of explicit conscious thought is as we have seen, an important aspect of HusserFs
,
What all this suggests, then, is that something like the phenomenological epoche has entrenched itself in European philosophy
since Husserl introduced it. The term is not used, but what it
expresses, an attitude of ontological abstention, is certainly present. Philosophers avoid commitment on their own part to a reality in itself, as distinct from mere appearances. In fact, no one is interested in the *really reaP any longer. Rather, like Husserl, they
are interested in the world (or worlds) o/particular human groups, and in the manner in which experience, thought or discourse
itment to such a world. It expresses and embodies its own comm
absolute.
The ultimate human experience of course to which the hermeneutic the Marxist, or the structuralist 'worlds' are related is
,
,
forms associated with societies, historical periods or even whole epochs. This is indeed another attack on the primacy of individual subjectivity: the latter is found to depend on pre-existing social and linguistic structures and through them on the society to which it belongs But this too is a train of thought already found in the late Husserl: the idea that the world is a shared world which refers itself to the community or group that shares it In spite of this particularism or pluralism of worlds universalism still has an important role to play The world is still regarded in holistic terms as befits a nexus of meanings or meaning-structures. A cultural or linguistic form or 'episteme', a historical
,
posNstmcTuralisX t ZZn
social rather than individual experience. In spite of the universalist tendencies of structural linguistics and anthropology, it is well known that at the hands of philosophers, in the transition to "
t ouL cture
of
is as if the struggle of appearance and reality, so important to non in which the philosopher in or pre-philosophical life, is a struggle his or her official capacity is no longer engaged. And if the human d is more collective than experience to which the world is referre iX idui this is something whose importance even Husserl saw
-
'
"
This is not to deny that HusserFs central focus, even in this latest work, remains individual subjectivity and conscious inhas not survived the tentionality. There is no doubt that this focus
attacks it has received from several different directions. There is much else that has not survived, as we already pointed out: various his theory of essences, his aspects of HusserFs Cartesianism,
under
a self-enclosed
parts
ments,
thing particular
-
ics of presence. It must be attack as the last gasp of the metaphys ects of his thought that said, of course, that it is just these asp Husserl himself seemed increasingly to question as he grew older, ich would later beginning himself some of the very criticisms wh life-world itself be sharpened against him. The emergence of the l indirectis essentially a self-critical development, in which Husser ies and inconsisly attacks his own ahistoricism and the inadequac
conceptual dependence remains As for Husserl so for his successors, any individual act or expression reposes upon an underlying
.
y contained in the whole While the perceptual metaphor of foreground and background is out of fashion the idea of a similar
.
tencies of his earlier concept of world. But Husserl never went so far as to free his concept of world completely from its relation to
intentionality.
h Husserl has been There is another respect, of course, in whic linguistic turn which continenleft far behind. The wide-spread
'
'
..
16
17
from Gadamer
Ricoeur's 'model of the text' to the pantextuality of the post-structuralists and most recently to Habermas' theory of communication, is and remains foreign to Husserl In spite of Merleau-Ponty's and even Derrida's attempts to find a turn to language in HusserFs late manuscripts (especially the fragment on the 'Origin of Geometry'6) Husserl never really wavered from the view of the Logical Investigations: Language gets its meaning from acts
,
.
ments were supposed to surmont the particular and become universal: mathematics, science and ultimately philosophy itself. Husserl s studies in the history of science and philosophy since Galileo
'
led him to consider the origin of the whole project in Greece and
of meaning-bestowal; the ultimate and really the only bearer of meaning is the individual conscious act He never really consider.
is a
,
Why, after all, did the scientific-philosophical idea of the modern West not arise spontaneously and independently in different places and times, perhaps to converge later? Such questions by no means imply, but they do allow and even suggest, that the whole
western project of science and philosophy, all that we term rationality in the broadest sense, is merely the spinning out of certain
There is a peculiar historical irony to be met with here, for the Anglo-American analytic tradition which made its own linguistic turn much earlier (and from somewhat different sources and motivations) now seems to be turning back to the pre-linguistic.
,
aspects of the social-cultural-conceptual lifeworld' of ancient Greece. Put in this way, Husserl's notion of the lifeworld might he Nietzschean, lateseem compatible with and even reinforce t
'
'
Heidegger ean notion of rationality which has found its adherents in French post-structuralism. This is the idea that rationality is
essentially a social phenomenon expressing the will to power, that in the modern west it has found its natural outcome in technology
and the instruments of social and political
l, contro
representation
mental capacities
of beliefs to which the individual is tacitly committed and that this network in turn reposes on a 'background* of know-how or
,
.
John Searle now sees the necessity of turning from speech acts to the mental states behind them whose essential feature is their intentionality. Searle develops this concept in a way that owes much (more than Searle admits or perhaps realizes) to Husserl. What is more, he asserts that each intentional state is part of a holistic .network*
,
And though he is no friend of cognitive science one of the major practitioners of linguistic analysis,
.
seen,
intentional states they are 'pre-intentional' i.e., they are linked to the intentional as preconditions.7 Thus in Searle the focus on the concept of a prelinguistic intentionality has brought with it something very closely resembling the notion of the tacit natural standpoint as an underlying committment to the lifeworld If this can be regarded as one sort of vindication for Husserl another sort is beginning to emerge on the continent. As we have
,
,
.
inating the rest of the capacity for conceptually and politically dom lternative to simply reworld. To many philosophers the only a domination is to attack peating and perpetuating this form of f discourse which rationality itself from within, through forms o seek to undermine it as radically as possible, or to point wistfully but inarticulately beyond it to the emergeance one day of an alternative form or forms of life.
'
'
ments, but there can be no doubt that his thought contributed to them. He had, of course, himself criticized the Technisierung of science which identified mathematically conceived physical reality ion which, in his view, led with all of reality. It was this identificat
and
lopdeve
tial directions in his last years these developments left their author with a sense of unease. The theory of the lifeworld seemed to lead inexorably to a version of cultural and historical relativism. This
,
rises in the lifeworld science springs. The discovery that science a tion, relativize the objecwas supposed to overcome that identifica tive world vis-i-vis the lifeworld and then subjectivity, and finally ive sources of science. A reveal genuine rationality in the subject
18
19
objective world through science turned back and recovered its own forgotten origins But the notion of the lifeworld as we have seen, got in the way Once the idea was developed of the lifeworld
,
.
directed at society itself. We know only too well that reason can be used in this way, to predict and control not physical but human nature. But this merely raises again the more fundamental
consciousness and ultimately rationality itself to a hopeless parochialism and fragmentation So many lifeworlds so many rationalities, which are just so many ways of structuring reality and exercising power Yet in 1945 Merleau-Ponty had already seen another possibility in Husserl's thought 'Probably the chief gain from phenomenology', he wrote 'is in its notion of the world or of rationality... To say that there exists rationality is to say that perspectives blend,
.
...
background is also the scene of our communication with others. Husserl approaches this insight in the Crisis when discussing
Einstein's use of the Michelson-Morley experiments. Of course
perceptions confirm each other a meaning emerges'.8 Expressed in the idiom of perceptual metaphors congenial to both MerleauPonty and Husserl this might seem to return us to the idea of the
,
d, says
world as the receding end-point of an ascending series of approximations. But it can also be read in another way, stressing the
*
Husserl, but in his work Einstein, like everyone else, inhabited the everyday world. Here he could make no use whatever of a
attempt among subjects to exchange their ideas with a view to reaching agreement Understood in this way Merleau-Ponty's expression forshadows the recent work of a philosopher of our own time Jurgen Habermas.9 Though Habermas' primary sources are in the Frankfurt School, Weber Marx and Hegel, and
.
theoretical psychological-psychophysical construction of the objective being of Mr. Michelson; rather, he made use of the human
Husserl reverts to the language of objects of experience, even when dealing with persons. What he should
have seen is that Michelson was for Einstein above all a partner in a scientific communication - made possible, it is true, by the shared world of laboratories, technical apparatus, scientific pain shared goals and pers, etc... but presupposing as well certa procedures of discussion and demonstration.
cally) with Husserl one thing is striking about his work: the central place it accords the concept of the lifeworld One way of looking at Habermas' recent work is to say that he faces squarely the challenge to rationality posed in Husserl's late work by the
,
.
the mathematizing grasp of the laws of physical reality. This is purposive or instrumental rationality oriented ultimately toward prediction and control While the resulting technology vastly increases our capacity to act on the world the real questions of rationality concern how this capacity is to be used In other words, the question is that of a rational social ordering of the technical and productive forces Like his predecessors in the Frankfurt
,
.
ibutions to the disprovide the standards against which contr cussion are measured, whether they are scientific theories, proposals for public policy or claims about art. But the process of
discussion may require that these standards themselves be challenged. Habermas believes that, just as communication requires
School
blic discussion, so any submitting private or personal views to pu tter how widely sharparticular and parochial convictions, no ma ed, must in principle be further justified in an ever-widening circle
this time
20
NOTES
'
21
is thus encompassing and general mas proposes as an alternative to a fragmented and pluralized rationality. And such a conception of reason is possible only as communicative reason. That is rather than groping through appearances to a postulated real world beyond we are portrayed as inhabiting the real from the start Our rationality takes us neither beyond it nor back to ourselves but rather turns us toward each other in the process of communication
,
appeared in
McCleary (Evanston:
to a PhenomenologicalPhilosophy. First Book. Trans. F. Kersten. (The Hague: M Nijhoff, 1983) p. 6. Edmund Husserl, Cartesian Meditations, trans. Dorian Carnis (The Hague:
M
.
and the
4
.
concerns it addresses suggests that at least in one sense Habermas is the true heir of Husserl in late 20th century philosophy Like
.
Ibid.y p. 38-39 (I have slightly altered the translat J.P. Sartre, Being and Nothingness, trans. H. Barnes (New York: Philosophical Library, 1956) p. 31.
ion).
Husserl he seeks to maintain the universality of reason against a conception of the world which as lifeworld, is always particular and limited, no matter how broadly conceived But in order to do it he believes he must part company with Husserl and much of the tradition in a decisive respect: the paradigm of consciousness, based on the subject-object relation must be cast off and replaced
,
.
See the introduction to Edmund Husserl, L Origine de la geometrie, traduit et introduit par Jacques Derrida (Paris: Presses universitaires de France,
'
1962).
Press,
9
.
T. McCar-
n Sciences and Transcendental 10. Edmund Husserl, The Crisis of Europea Northwestern University Press, Phenomenology, trans. D. Carr (Evanston:
I
.
<
Husserl
a;
Husserl first made his name by denouncing psychologism in logic In his influential Prolegomena to Pure Logic (1900) the theories
.
of Mill, Wundt, Sigwart and others are attacked as versions of skeptical relativism* which in various ways make truth dependent on the psychological make-up of human beings as a species ( anthropologism').1 Later, in Philosophy as Rigorous Science* (1910) the attack is extended to historical or cultural relativism
'
'
'
('historicism') as well, where his major target seems to be Dilthey. Husserl's refutation seemed to clear the way for a philosophy which could rest assured of attaining objective non-relative truths, and this assurance is evident not only in Husserl's early work but also in that of this early followers (e.g. Geiger, Pfander, Scheler). In view of the importance of this antirelativism to the begin,
nings of phenomenology, it may seem surprising that later heirs to the phenomenological tradition move steadily toward more or less explicit versions of relativism, especially of the historical or
cultural sort. As in other versions of relativism, truth becomes
relative to something like a 'conceptual framework The early Heidegger's theory of truth is arguably historicist, and this theory is further developed in the hermeneutical theory of H.G. Gadamer. Merleau-Ponty's perspectivism seems clearly relativistic. The later Heidegger and Jacques Derrida seem to view the whole western metaphysical tradition as a conceptual framework on a
.
'
'
'
grand scale.
It might be argued (and this is the standard view) that this opposition between the early Husserl and later heirs to the tradition is not really remarkable: precisely to the extent that later
26
27
phenomenologists have moved away from HusserPs antirelativism, they have also moved away from his conception of phenomenological method Indeed, Gadamer Merleau-Ponty, the later Heidegger and Derrida are all so far removed from Husserl that
.
a word about HusserPs antirelativist arguments in the Prolegomena. Generally, they take the form of accusing the relativist of
contradicting himself. He (the relativist) puts forward theories and claims of supposedly objectively binding truth which are designed to show that no such theories and claims are possible. He tacitly
assumes the nonrelative validity of his own concepts and scheme
such scheme is 'relative'. of concepts in order to show how any Husserl also argues that the relativist cannot make sense of the notion of an alternative conceptual scheme without attributing to such a scheme certain fundamental concepts which are also fundamental to our conceptual scheme.3 HusserPs antirelativist
'
matter of relativism
Locke to Hume and a similar development occured from German Idealism to the historical relativism of the later 19th century. In our own century the Anglo American tradition in philosophy has seen the development from logical positivism to the relativism of Wittgenstein's 'forms of life theory to Quine's 'Ontological Relativity' and to the relativistic views of scientific theory made
,
-
of objectively binding truth to some form of skeptical relativism seems common to the development of many philosophical traditions. Something like this happened to British Empiricism from
'
resemble certain arguments arguments are a priori ones that the notion of alternative concepcurrently being put forth against
tual frameworks, for example, by Davidson: either such a framele into our own language and thus work, or language, is translatab
shares at least its rudimentary concepts, or else we have no means
'
life.
two ways of explaining the relativism of recent continental philosophy: either it is the result of a general law applying to philosophical traditions as such or it is merely another manifestation of a widespread phenomenon of mid-twentieth century intellectual
,
idea of a that there could be others, and conceptual framework suggests this latter notion is incoherent, the idea of a conceptual scheme
are inconclusive.5 Admittedly we could never verify the existence heme without at the same time of an alternative conceptual sc
h arguments suc
ble of a more detailled and reasoned account I would like to argue that there are certain themes and concepts that are fundamental even to Husserl's earliest conception of phenomenology and which lead in a relativistic direction even though Husserl himself
.
somewhat 'historicist' explanations it seems to me that the trend toward relativism among those influenced by Husserl is suscepti-
showing that it was not truly ments that differ in some of or can imagine conceptual arrange an we not extrapolate 6 to significant respects from our own, c in all respects? While we could a conceptual scheme that differs language as such even if we never recognize such a scheme or
.
alternative
'
ine what it would be like, we can stumbled over it, or even imag
these are themes and concepts which have remained central to the
Furthermore,
ibility. With his notion of extranevertheless conceive of its poss conceiving of the possibility polation Rorty applies a notion of
'
'
'
of something
'
concepts
above as heirs to the phenomenological tradition in spite of all their differences from Husserl; so that one can speak of a continuity to the phenomenological tradition precisely in reference to these
,
.
lingers at the
briefly
how they have been carried forward as part ofplications, and First, show the tradition
.
like those presented by Husserl conclusion of a priori arguments out our conception of alternative and Davidson: in order to flesh d to say or do anything whatever, conceptual frameworks, or indee in such a way that we assume their we have to appeal to concepts this make it so? While a priori universal validity. But does hus not succeed in ruling out the arguments like HusserPs may t
28
29
relativism of alternative conceptual frameworks' they do seem to rule out the possibility that anything could ever count as
,
turns them into perceptual objects' through a similar animating intention.8 Thus, sensations would be signs for external objects
which we can either understand or not, like the written or heard
such an idea ever gain currency? It could of course, be seen as a rather overhasty inference from the new information about different languages cultures and forms of life that bombarded
,
,
Europeans in the 18th and 19th centuries Rorty, however, believes that the roots of relativsm lie deeper If Hegel gave
. .
the
signs of language. But Husserl rejects this view, as he does later in the Ideas,9 Sensations, he says in the Logical Investigations, plainly only become presented in psychological reflection: in naive, intuitive presentations they may be components in our presentative experience, parts of its descriptive content, but are
'
way was prepared for him by Kant 'himself the least historicist of philosophers For Kant perfected and codified the two dis-
not at all its objects 10 This is, of course, what he says about hyle
'
.
even
though its author Kant, was not himself a relativist. Now I would like to say something similar about Husserl: at the very time that he was attacking relativism with the sort of arguments mentioned above
,
as an experienced complex of sensations gets informed by a certain act-character, one of conceiving or meaning 12 However, it must be noted that in this passage Husserl says that the complex of sensations is erlebt not erfahren: it is lived through, not intended as an object, just as the act of intending itself is lived through or performed but not itself intended and can become an object only
'
.
however
recognize that even in this limited form, the notion of sensat is a hybrid left over from precisely the quasi-physiological and in causal conception of experience he wants to overcome. But these early works he has already seen the essential point which has
been the source of so much confusion: in order to be viewed as
ion
I.
of marks on a page on the one hand and the 'animating intention' through which we grasp their sense on the other One is tempted, he says to see an analogous process going on in sense perception
,
.
One aspect of the Kantian framework which Husserl seems clearly to reject is the idea of a neutral sense-given which is interpreted by a conceptual grasp In the first Logical Investigation where he deals with the experience of using and understanding language he makes the distinction between the hearing of sounds or the seeing
.
data' that are interpreted by an animating intention, sensations would have to be objects of conscious intentions, as are the signs he of language, and this they certainly are not. To suppose t
'
14
In spite of this rejection of the notion of sense data, Husserl is very much involved in a project which has traditionally been
associated with that notion, namely what is usually called the
search for the given. One recalls the famous slogan, zu den Sachen
selbstl But because of the way Husserl construes the notion of the
30
31
given, this results differ markedly from those of others who have been engaged in the same quest and at the time open the door to some relativistic interpretations Traditionally, of course, the
,
.
given was supposed to provide the guarantee against any sort of skepticism relativistic or otherwise. The simple natures of the rationalists or the sense data of the empiricists were supposed
,
,
imagine it, thereby illustrating our intention to ourselves; or we can see a picture of it, so that it is again illustrated, but this time by means of perceiving an object (the picture) other than the one
we intend; or we can infer its existence whether by interpreting some conventional sign or drawing a causal inference, where again our inference is based on some object other than the one we
limit
one's claims to what is directly given or to what can be cautiously inferred from it was to be assured of genuine knowledge of the
,
agreement among all rational creatures following the same procedure, and the avoidance of baseless speculation and the
,
world
intend; or finally, we can just see it, or touch, hear, smell or taste
it, in which case our relation to the object is not mediated by some other thing.17 Here we see how Husserl s approach is descriptive
'
prejudices of a parochial 'point of view' Even in the hands of Kant, where the given (sensation) has to be supplemented by an interpretation supplied by the mind if cognition is to be possible,
.
data to a second level reflective analysis of perceptual experience it might be thought that he would take the phenomenalisms route of trying to reconstruct the objective world by this procedure But is clear that for Husserl reflection on the sense-aspects (or any other aspects) of experiences yields evidence for nothing but claims about those experiences themselves. In fact it is essential to his notion of the intentionality of experience that we can draw no conclusions from the existence or nature of an ex the existence or nature of its object 16 N perience about evertheless Husserl seems to be saying that in sense perception the external object is given. What does he mean? It is clear Husserl has seized on only one as
,
.
sensation still constitutes a link to reality in itself. But Husserl develops his notion of the given from a rather different slant and, in doing so deprives the given of the function it is traditionally designed to serve As far as our awareness of the external world is concerned we have just seen that Husserl regards perceptual objects in space as the most primitive objects of which we are directly aware denying the existence of a consciously given layer of sense data below it Since he does admit the availability of sense
,
.
data or images. We could only conjecture or postulate the existence of such an unconscious process on the basic of premises which are even more conjectural. And so, such theories are far as empirical objects and rejected. The descriptive fact is that as states of affairs are concerned, perception plays the role of supply-
excellence beyond which we cannot and need not go. The fact that l calls inadequate' and perceptual evidence is always what Husser its function of supplying open to further question does not remove
arantee
ll
be forthcoming. In this sense it remains a pretension or 'presumption 18 that has to be made good by further experience. The d as the correlate of objective world in the strict sense, understoo
at one of the topics Husserl deals with in the Sixth Logical Investigation will show what this means When we intend or refer to some empirical object or state of affairs, there are several
.
lly referred for their verifiour perceptual judgments are natura cation. To be sure, its presumption is to place us in contact with the real world that exists independently of us, but Husserl does t on the correctness of not make a metaphysical pronouncemen
32
33
perceptual world is the 'taken for granted' as he later calls it, on which our knowledge of the world is based Of course, perceptual
,
.
level abstractions from a more basic level which is actually our direct and inmediated encounter with the world. This is the level of Zuhandenheit at which we encounter not things' but 'equip'
ment
when we withdraw, for certain practical purposes, from engagements in this world of equipment, take a distance from it, as it were, that the world of Vorhandenheit comes into view, available
Merleau-Ponty himself accepts many of the features of Heidegger s description of this unmediated encounter, even while he retains the term perception.
'
In this sense perception becomes the core of what Husserl later calls the 'natural attitude' the underlying general belief in the world whose objects are given in experience. Husserl's natural
He adds, of course, his own notion of the lived body as the natural subject of perception such that perceived things, and even space
'
'
focusing upon certain aspects of the world, reasoning on the basis of what is immediately given to the greater world beyond, etc. But the perceived world is not itself something picked out not an isolated aspect of reality not itself something inferred: it is to
,
he pursues his particular practical or scientific interests, picking out spheres of objects for observation or explanation,
,
world
the traditional man in the street under the sway of the natural attitude is committed first of all to the space-time world
, ,
subject
and time, have the status of functional values for a mobile and practical life rather than the status of objects for detached observation. While the description of the given thus changes consider-
ably under the hands of these later phenomenologists, and while l it should be their views involve an implicit criticism of Husser clear that these descriptions are arrived at by pursuing the notion s sense: namely, as that which is of the given in precisely Husserl
,
'
'
repeat
leaves the door open to a relativistic interpretation. be seen how this is so. The concept of the unmediated
This particular version of the search for the given as the unmediated in the purely descriptive sense, has been a constant theme m phenomenology. Merleau-Ponty describing what he takes to be Husserl's task as well as his own says: 'To return to the things themselves is to return to that world which precedes
, , ,
results
which every scientific schematization is an abstract and derivative sign language as is geography in relation to the countryside in which we have learnt beforehand what a forest a prairie, or a river is . But even before Merleau-Ponty the search for the given or me return to the things themselves had already been undertaken in precisely this sense by Heidegger, and with rather striking
,
ld, or wor
That is idiosyncratic private spectacle that is given in this sense. s terms, that the perceiving subject takes to say, at least in Husserl himself to be in direct contact with a world that is available to others as well. But what is lacking is a transcendental argument to the effect that the world as perceived is not only factually ted as such by any possible accepted by others but must be accep others. While Husserl may have conceived of it in this way, he 22 All we have is a sort of provides us with no such argument.
34
35
layered description of mental life involving the distinction between what is given and what is secondarily derived from the given In Heidegger and Merleau-Ponty while this same stratification is retained, any pretense toward showing the universality of the
.
referentially opaque
'
'
'
Husserl s own
'
nology which leaves his theory open to relativistic interpretations and even positively suggests them In the previous discussion we
.
pointing out that the same object can be intended in ways. He extends the distinction between object-which and objectas to perceptual objects as well as the references of linguistic expressions and begins to introduce his famous analysis of Abschattungen or profiles: the object is always perceived from some angle or another, and we must distinguish the object as seen from the object with all its possible determinations and perspectives.25
different
have seen that Husserl's notion of the given was that of the
What this meant was that our access to the object is not mediated by some other object. But there is another sense
.
unmediated
Here Husserl might be suspected of reverting to the Kantian distinction between the appearance and the thing-in-itself. This is,
of course, not the case. The object-which or object in-itself, in the distinction, is for Husserl not some unknowable whatnot and ience, but is simply certainly not a remote cause of our sense exper
-
the object is not to be confused with or collapsed into the act in which it is intended Nevertheless he points out we must distinguish between the object which is intended and the objects as it is intended When I refer, for example to the Emperor of
*
gation, where he is broaching the thorny problem of the intentional object Husserl insists, as he does throughout his career that
,
,
.
of mediation that is often involved in these discussions what is called mediation by concepts. Something like this is involved in Husserl's theory of intentionality In the Fifth Logical Investi,
.
the object which robust common sense takes to be there indepen dently of our different approaches to it, an object which we
-
to us and not represented in absentia by some messenger or stand-in called an appearance. Besides, it is obvious that we have
Germany
in this particular reference to it But it is incorrect to speak of these descriptions as applying to the object as it is in this case intended. This distinction is of course, absolutely essential to Husserrs notion of a conscious intention which though it in one sense requires an object is not dependent on the state of the world in order to be what it is It not only means that the intended object need not exist as in the case of illusion or fantasy; it also means that even where one supposes the object to exist just as I take it
.
descriptions (e g., the son of the Emperor Frederick the Third, the
.
sense suppoition of point was precisely to suspend the common trate on the for-me an object existing in itself in order to concen
36
37
What emerges from all this is a picture of experience or cognition as a series of prises on a reality which while it never eludes our grasp is never fully within in either Even the given in sense perception is interpreted or intended-as. To be sure Husserl is
, ,
.
distinction internal to experience and thus turns u brackets of the epoche p within the The distinction has its place for example, m the doctrine of the noema in Ideas where it is said that the object as I intend it always points beyond itself by tacit reference to other
.
unearthing its hidden presuppositions, and thus he found as Hegel had before him that the distinction between the in-itself and the for-me is itself a distinction for-me That is, it is a
,
,
.
attitude had to be suspended. However Husserl's purpose was to analyze and understand the natural attitude itself precisely by
,
or the object as it is intended The notion of the independently existing object belongs to the 'natural attitude' which brings with
.
time asking, in effect: whose objects, ld? This is simply to say that, from the whose facts, whose wor
the natural
f view, object, fact, and world as inphenomenological point o tended are referred back to some particular act or acts of intending
'
hey are always such determine' our references to them; that is, t s in the sense of other intendas to allow other possible reference
ings-as.
26
Merlean-Ponty. In their case, too, central by Heidegeer and itive level of experience, that taking-as is a feature of the most prim called the given. In Heidegger, we which corresponds to what we
as-structure of understanding find in the notion of the
'
'
.
27 Un
lement of human derstanding, which for Heidegger is a basic e than conceptual thought, means existence, and which goes deeper
to become genetic and dynamic in character once he developed the implications of the distinction between the object which is intend.
reality which is not limited to any one point of view or description. He makes a great deal of the role of intersubjectivity - the intersection and agreement of simultaneous but different intendings of the same object of affairs - in the ty. In view of this pursuit of such objectiviit can be seen that Husserl's theory of consciousness had to become teleological his theory of Evidenz had
, ,
interested in the manner in which particularly in our scientific endeavors we aim at objectivit y i.e., at a complete grasp of
, , ,
from the point of view of taking something as something. And ke philosophical his existential analysis of Dasein we cannot ma understood in this sense by Dasein. sense of the world except as tive in perception In Merleau-Monty it is the concept of perspec ificance. Perception is the basic or which acquires central sign in whose structure all other primary mode of consciousness, of perspective or point of view modes share, and thus the concept hical understandbecomes the central metaphor for any philosop ld as perceived from ing of object or world.28 World is always wor
'
'
tive, point of view. a particular, even if intersubjec Ponty, it is important to In the case of Heidegger and Merleau-
of
We shall return later to the teleological and dynamic character of consciousness in Husserl's theory but first let us pause to
,
tentional object What Husserl has obviously discovered in his own way is the equivalent of the now-familiar notions of taking-as and seeing-as And we can see that these notions are made
. .
is only perhaps in the is from the start a shared sense, and it authentic
'
'
SSf r
ZZ
the
38
39
be
which is both more primitive and more rich than the pared-down and
somewhat beyond what he presents in the lectures. But I think that the above account graps the essence of Husserl s temporal con'
it is finally
integrated, into his theory, especially in the Cartesian Meditations. When he speaks there of the ego as a substrate of habitualities',33 he is referring to the manner in which ongoing
The Husserlian conceptions we have been examining so far have all derived from the Logical Investigations of 1900-01. The one
we turn to next is almost as early, dating from the lectures on the Phenomenology of Internal Time Consciousness of 1905. Here Husserl begins to consider the dynamic character of consciousnes,
-
topic. For if we assume, as we must, that each individual has a different experiential past, and that membership in a community
s themes of concern different from those will make one individual of an individual in another community, we can say that he
'
which later plays a role in his genetic and developmental theory of Evidenz The temporal dimension is added to the conception of consciousness and intentionality developed in the Logical In.
vestigations
for consciousness itself as Husserl describes it in his lectures That is, consciousness is correctly conceived as consistin less distinct phases or indi g of more or vidual experiences (Erlebnisse) but each of these like each note in a melody derives its significance from its place in a temporal configuration that includes past and future phases. This is so for the experiencer since passing experiences are not annihilated for him, but are 'helds in his b grasp' by a kind of
.
Husserl, like others before him takes as his example the hearing of a melody But a melody might well serve as an image
, ,
.
discussed earlier: (l)If the 'given' is seen as that which is for granted' about the world by particular individuals or groups,
taken
will vary depending experience, in such a way that such context is intended as such and on who is involved. (2) That an object the neglect of other such, viewed or intepreted in a certain way to
dividual
the
experiences are anticipated in so-called protention.32 The past need not be explicity called to mind as in 'recollection' nor the future expressly anticipated in order to play a role in our experience of the present Rather, they determine its sense as the past and future notes of a melody determine the sense of the note
,
,
and future
he relativistic Husserl himself began to draw out some of t t work, implications of his theory of consciousness in his lates where he made much of the historicity' of experience with is
' '
'
sedimented' background.34 But it was Heidegger and his pupil Gadamer who made the most of this notion. Heidegger s temporal imensions of interpretation of Dasein with its mutually implying d
12
40
41
Vorstruktur of understanding with its key concept of interpretation, he supplies the basic materials for Gadamer s hermeneutic theory. A combination of logical and perceptual metaphors are
,
'
'
early antirelativism and might even have been acceptable to him. It would not necessarily imply a full-fledged philosophical relativism of the sort Husserl branded as a form of self-refuting skepticism. After all, Husserl s purpose in phenomenology was not to
'
experience is seen as something like a set of ungrounded presuppowhence the famous hermeneutical
make straightforward claims about reality or to certify the veracity of our experience or our scientific theories. He did not wish to overcome skepticism in this sense, and in this he differs from Descartes. His purpose, rather, is to make transcendental or
reflective claims of precisely the sort we have been describing about the nature of our experience and about the world as it
relation
intentionalist approach from the earliest of this phenomenological investigations precludes the realistic positing of a world in itself to which consciousness stands in a real or even cognitive
,
,
.
of world and reality that permits of a relativistic interpretation, the same would not necessarily apply to what he says the basic structures of experience, e.g., the stratification mentioned above
in which perception appears at the lowest level. The same could it be said for Heidegger: while the public world of Zuhandenhe
ich 'public' is involved, may differ considerably depending on wh
as it effectively claims the allegiance of consciousness and functions in the fulfillment of intentions and the verification of claims about reality It is in this sense that he takes the perceptual as the given and while perception 'pretends' as he says, or
.
the fact that Dasein's everyday world has the character of Zuhandenheit is not itself subject to the charge of relativism, but is id claim, i.e., true of every presumably meant as a universally val
possible Dasein,
its past experience Particular intentional grasps on reality are not isolated
.
nature of intentionality to an interpretation or intending-as which leaves aspects of it beyond our grasp Finally, even on Husserl's earnest vi w ~; earliest view consciousness does not approach reality emptyhanded as it were but in each case brings with it the baggage of
,
.
intersubjective agreement Further, while in perception it is also suojeci by the very - k~*<-vHi.jwii, u is aiso subject oy me vay i:*-. *
, ,
a den or world-as-it-presscription of the world, if only as phenomeno ent s-itself-to-us. This is so precisely because of the thesis of
It is not so easy, however, to avoid by this means a re lve interpretation. Husserl's phenomenology does invo
lativistic
we
bjects and its world. time deaUng with what it is of, i.e., with its objects and its world. dealing o that he Another way of describing what Husserl is doing is to say
seeks to describe the nature of our most fundamental beliefs about
co\t th<*t hp
we have tried to show the manner in which each of these points accommodates itself to a relativistic interpretation and has in fact received such an interpretation as it is carried on in the phenome.
ls with the world in the world. To be sure, phenomenology dea structural, not in factual, terms. But it is still open to the charge is describing or only that it is only our world whose structure it our most fundamental beliefs about the world - however broadly and not necessarily any possible world or we construe the 'our beliefs about the world. The very fact that Heidegger and Mer'
-
.
-
L-
42
43
inherited set of objectivist prejudices But if this can be said of Husserl's descriptions why cannot something like it also be said
.
leau-Ponty could so revise Husserl's conception of the world of the natural attitude seems to brand Husserl's description as that of a limited 'point of view' perhaps engendered in his case by an
,
NOTES
of Heidegger's and Merleau Ponty's as well perhaps involving in their case other sorts of prejudices? It is hard to see how any
-
Thilosophy as Rigorous Science', trans. Quentin Lauer in Edmund Husserl, Phenomenology and the Crisis of Philosophy (New York: Harper and Row, 1965). See especially pp. 122 ff. It should be pointed out that Husserl s use
'
'
of the term, e.g., that of Popper in The Poverty of Historicism (New York:
Harper and Row, 1964).
3
.
In this sense we can see that the same considerations which allowed for a relativistic interpretation of the consciousness of the
describing consciousness While its concern is not straightforwardly with the world but rather with consciousness the struc.
5-20
Richard Rorty, 'The World Well Lost' in Journal of Philosophy LXIX, no.
19 (1972), pp. 649-665.
Rorty, p. 659. Rorty, p. 649.
tures of consciousness and the structures of the world as experienced, the phenomenologically describing consciousness is still, after all consciousness. As such does it not confront some,
Finally
it not itself always a case of inyending-as? Husserl admits as much when he says that transcendental experience may be inadequate?9
,
thing analogous to a perceptual given in its own domain? Husserl himself suggests that it does.38 In its approach to that domain is
W R. Boyce
.
that in this way the very aspects of Husserl's theory of consciousness that allow a relativistic interpretation with respect to the worlds also reflect back upon and allow for the same interpretation of phenomenology itself
.
13. Cf. Logical Investigations, Vol. II, p. 540. 14. Cf. Logical Investigations, Vol. II, p. 567.
15. In an excellent study, J.N. Mohanty has pointed to the various and distinct
in Phenomenology and Ontology (The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff,
13 f.
notions (simplicity, immediacy, passivity, indubitability) that have been confusedly combined in traditional concepts of the given. See The Given
'
1970), p.
16. Cf. Logical Investigations, Vol. II, p. 537. 17. Logical Investigations, Vol. II, p. 710 ff. 18. 'Pretension' is used in Logical Investigations, (Vol. II, p. 712),
sumption' is a later (and better) term.
19. Cf. Ideas sections 27-32.
,
'
pre-
and the discussion that 24. See R.M. Chisholm, 'Sentences Anout Believing
lity, Mind and Language, has grown out of Chrisholm's paper, in Intentiona
44
26. Cf. Ideas section 131. 27. Being and Time section 32.
,
,
.
cevic (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1975) 25. Cf. Logical Investigations, Vol. II, p. 712 f
.
ed. Ausonia Marras (Urbana: University of Illinois Press 1972); also the articles by myself ( ntentionality ) and J.L. Mackie (Troblems of Intentionality') in Phenomenology and Philosophical Understanding ed. Edo Piv,
' ,
.
12
.
28. Phenomenology of Perception p. 395. 29. Trans James S. Churchill. (Bloomington: Indiana University Press 30. Cf. Logical Investigations, Vol. II, pp. 694 ff
,
.
1964).
sections 8-13.
34. See The Crisis of European Sciences trans. D. Carr (Evanston: Northwes,
sciousness
implications of the notion of Consciousness as temporal Gestalt* as it is elaborated in Husserl's 'middle period' (Cartesian Meditations) and combined there with this theory of intersubjectivit historicity in the Crisis y to lead to the conception of The present eassay goes further in tracing Husserl s implicit relativism to the earliest writings not only the lectures on time-con.
1970). In a study concentrating on Husserl's late work Phenomenology and the Problem of Histor University Press y Evanston: Northwestern 1974), I have dealt in more detail with the relativistic
,
,
t the Addressing his audience in the Amphitheatre Descartes a Sorbonne in 1929, Husserl said that one might almost call tran
'
to name the book that grew out of the Paris lectures the Cartesian Meditations. To be sure, like most of Husserl s many homages to
'
'
1 and he went on
'
Descartes, this one is qualified:even though inal content is obliged... to reject nearly all the well-known doctr
'
.
nology] [phenome
35. Being and Time, section 68 36. Being and Times, section 32
.
.
But this qualification is further of the Cartesian philosophy counterqualification that is also expanded upon by a sort of henomenology is so typical of Husserl's remarks on Descartes: p
'
.
37. H , Truth and Method (New York: Seabury Press, 1975), PP235 ff 38. Cartesian Meditations p. 27; henomenological e the meditating philosopher) an infinite realm ofbeing of being ofa new kind, pochs laysoj n (to me, open w nu, oj uemg as the <inh*r< of ~f . . as the sphere a new kind 7
G Gadamer
.
experience' ideas
,
p. ii2: *our
..
region'
goa
Husserl's way of doing philosophy, are impressed and inspired by but who regard a rejection of Cartesianism as a point of honor ted
Husserl not only does not scendental Phenomenology (1936), found in both the Meditations and the employ the Cartesian way cxupiuy me ancMau woj 2 o~*o have nninted OUt that ome Hovp pointed out that Ideas, but even sharply criticizes it.2 S h begins gradually even the undermining of the Cartesian approac
'
*
-
in mid-twentieth century Crisis of European Sciences and no philosophy. It has been widely Tran that in his last work, The
-
appear as a last before the Paris lectures,3 so that the Meditations clastances, to restate the attempt, prompted by external circums
'
igorous and succinct form. sical' approach of the Ideas in r hat the Cartesian MediIn the following I shall try to show t h Meditation in its relation tations themselves - specifically the Fift significant departure from to the other four - make manifest a
Cartesianism in two important points
i
r.
46
47
is usually seen as attempting a Cartesian solution to it or perhaps a Leibnizian variant thereof I shall try to show that Husserl is not
,
.
~*
problem peculiar to the Fifth Meditation that of the alter ego. As it is usually interpreted the Fifth Meditation seems if anything to support a Cartesian reading of phenomenology, primarily because it addresses itself to the problem of soUpsism. Because the
, ,
out to demonstrate or prove, deductively or inductively, the independent existence' of other 7V.
'
X** -
i - J i
is at
which gives e
v tt
14 4111 AXLAkJL7V/Xi AO
scend t 1) *d concise definitio solipsism 'consists i oncise definition n holding that the individu al /... with its subjective modifications, is all of reality and that other Fs of which one has a represent dent existence tha ation have no more indepenn persons in dreams; - or [it consists] at least in admitting that it i s impossible to demonstrate the contrary B
:
phenomenology as described in the preceding four meditations, could be branded as transcendental solipsism'.4 B ing the problem in thi y introducs way Husserl has placed a great obstacle m the way of his readers' understanding of what he is about. Now the objection of solipsism is often raised against idealisms, and Husserl has just characterized his pncnomenoiogy as (tranphenomenology as u<w* j vi
,
. ..
-
the title to 'uncover the sphere of transcendental being as monadological intersubjectivity'. But in the first that this task must b paragraph it appears e undertaken because of the objection that
,
of Husserl's understanding of the problem, removes his whole theory from the context set by Descartes. Husserl was quite clear on this first point I think, and merely misled his readers by using the term 'solipsism' in a peculiar way. My second point may not have been clear to Husserl but is implied in what he said After 'solving' the problem of the alter ego in the Fifth Meditation Husserl begins a project of putting his solution to work in what he calls 'intersubjective phenomenology' I shall argue that this project roughly sketched though it is reflects back on phenomenology as a whole calling into question one of its most explicity Cartesian elements its dependence on the apodicticity of the ego cogito What does Husserl seek in the Fifth Meditation? According to
,
,
.
ical reduction as a variant of the Cartesian systematic doubt, as tes he had already done in the Ideas', and he has credited Descar
lldVl CillVC*V*jr V*V AAW *** 7
basis to stand on' [einen ersten apodiktischen Seinsboden un dieFusse bekommen]\ But, once established upon this Seinsbod'
ter
en, what do we do? Descartes idea of proceeding from this point is, of course, to be able to assert the existence of God and the rest
rather than immediately, as that certainty, even if by inference And it is precisely against attaching to the assertion ego sum. Descartes' and others' failure to do this that objection of solipsism iates himself, is ordinarily raised. Now Husserl explicity dissoc Descartes' attempt to prove the early in the Meditations, from
existence of the rest of the world [die tibrige Welt] by 8 ego sum as an axiom But by raising the objection of
' '
'
using the
'
solipsism
in the Fifth Meditation, and presenting his theory as an answer he Cartesian approach, to it, Husserl seems to be returning to t
her egos, if not to hoping to ascribe independent existence to ot the rest of the external world, with a degree of certainty comparable to that of the ego sum.
rejecting Descartes procedure. It is impossible to move by the rest of the world because the ego ence from one s own ego to
' '
n, solipsism
,
Jl
JZ
'
i.e., it is not part of the world is not a 'tag end of the world lize, though there are different at all. As Descartes failed to rea at an. rvs a- ovcmf h" h has apodictic d relation to the world and the things
'
'
,
in it is intentional and not that of a part to a causally interrelated inferences according to the principle of whole. Consequently, Descartes, are ruled out.9 Thus we causality', of the sort used by
to such an objectio
ectivity as an answer
her egos considered as part of the cannot prove the existence of ot about other egos considered as world's causal nexus. But what Husserl announces it in the transcendental? The problem, as
48
49
Second Meditation
Meditation the problem of solipsism is stated in this way: But what about other egos, who surely are not a mere intending and
'
phenomenolo JLSr /. o ,AndT! the hfOiZtl ofT Flfth aUgology' d at beglnning the lS MftHfrftri n a!
erincation in me i ,
*J .
precisely others!'11 Thus other egos seem to ucmanu a treatment v , lu demand a ireaimcm
-
1 T T " possible acts ' - by any actual one. if the " implied in any oCu.l one. Until the bei"8 Um.1 ' TJ LT Point of other pooiMc acts implied in point of other
*
hTranscendence is conceived as the irreducibility of what is meant to the particular act or acts in which it is meant. But the meant x
. r* .
T theTnafysisi ,on,Hv,Hthis the irreducibility of is cleared up. ro eeds, M apparent paradox what is meant L
"
*
"
'
liiw
cvnuij uii-'
I a x
vv-mw,
- f- i
Fifth Meditation, all such acts, actual and possible, are conce
. . x , . aU ui rtf Ki tivitv
1
*
*
ived
-oran
as mme' By introducing the problem of objectivity, Husserl is mine. introducm8 problei" of obJef v'ty' """f* "
Humeri is
i
+u
something intended the question of whether other egos have onl 'd y the same status. His
attitude which is stronger than the sense previously developed. f mine; The objective is not only irreducible to any particular acts o
more,
claim of transcendental phenomenology to be itself transcendental philosophy and therefore its claim that in the form of a constitutional problematic and theory movin t g within the limits of the
,
more, fnr Z the.Probl ems to involve much for the objection is described as calling into question 'the
er
u
transcendentalTcWt
'
transcendental egos in fact exist outside me' or the like.12 This could explain the fact that Husserl says he is addressing cZlT v T* himself to the problem of t t
,
because it is identically the and possible stream of consciousness, same for others and their acts as well. Now if 'the claim of transcendental phenomenology to be itself
the objection ot wuptranscendental philosophy is threatened by the objection of soliptranscendental philosophy' is threatened by
'
. dealing with the stronger sense of the transcendence of the world. sense of the transcendence of the wor
ld.
t of the concep
stream
Husserl has indeed already insisted on the transcendence of the world by saying that Neither the world nor any worldly Object is a piece of my Ego, to be found in m '
.
way: 'I experience the world... not as (so the speak) my private synthetic formation but as other than mine alone [mirfremde] as an intersubjective world everyone, accessible in r actually there for 14 espect of its Objects to everyone
,
to be at issue How is this so? Husserl explains the objectivity of then, seems the world in this
,
problems pertaining to the objective world' ** Not just a particular type of entit from other entities y which has a status different but the objective world as a whole
.
ranscendentally
reduced ego
sciousness. But up to now it has no concept of the alter ego to whose acts the stronger sense of transcendence refers. thus takes on a different sense: not The 'objection of solipsism is needed in order the existence but very concept of the alter ego to answer it. But the character of the concept required must be
'
for example
-
-4.- 4-U~
T->t
'
of acts' A Accounting
comZZ
- -
ranscend
fT T " * 'T S f
k;MA
is not concerned with showing of a multiplicity of egos: Husserl ivable. In a sense the that different egos are possible or conce lready been taken into account possibility of different egos has a By taking the by the very eidetic approach of phenomenology. l reflection as merely exemplaparticular objects of transcendenta he structure of any consciousness ry, Husserl seeks to describe t
* all. That not all possibilities can be construed as possibilities of is -led out by possibilities of consciousness the concept of the monad as all
a system of compossibilities. Not and certain conceivable possibilare compossible with all others,
At*
A
a
.
ill - Jt
50
51
They would have to be other than they are a different stream of consciousness
.
a system of compossibilities makes no sense except by reference to other possible systems and this is why Husserl speaks in the
if he, Husserl, were simply asserting that everything else is just that. But this is a very naive statement of the results of the first four meditations; and Husserl seems aware of this in his use of the words Vorstellung and Vorgestelltes. One could object to Cairns' translation of this passage on the ground that Husserl is
suggesting that the problem of solipsism arises only if such a naive view is taken: to say that everything is something intended
' '
Cartesian Meditations not only of the eidos of consciousness, the instances of which could potentially all belong to one stream of experience but of the eidos ego whose instances are different and 17 incompatible streams of experience True, Husserl says that the eidetic approach presupposes neither the actuality nor the possibility of other egos'.18 But it is necessary to distinguish between different egos and other egos m the sense of the alter ego referred to in the fifth meditation. The eidetic approach conceives of different egos without conceiving of
,
.
'
merely my represen-
'
tation' {Vorstellung). Thus transcendental idealism is transformed into subjective idealism. But Husserl does not answer his imaginandental ry opponent by reiterating the distinction between transce
and subjective idealism, so one suspects that the latter s case does not rest merely on this confusion. A more accurate statement of
'
any relation among them other than their essence and their differ-
the phenomenological procedure is that it considers everything meant purely as it is meant (cogitatum qua cogitatum) and withholds any other attitude toward it.19 It thus arrives at a full
account of its being-for-me or its sense. But even on this view it ible of this kind could be argued that the alter ego is not suscept
of treatment: he cannot even be considered purely as meant; or,
attitude; it is the ego of the natural attitude that refers the objects of his experience to others The task which arises is to explain how the other exists for him not whether the other exists as such.
.
refers his world or the things in it to others. The ego in the fullest sense, i.e the monad, may differ from my own But the problem now is to make sense of the alter ego for that ego whoever he may be. The concept of objectivity, afer all is part of the natural
.
of the ego in general is incompatible with the phenomenological concept of something given, at least if the alter ego is to be
considered transcendental and not merely worldly. To the extent
cogitatio or cogitatum
,
by the words ego cogito-cogitatum-qua-cogitatum. And when Husserl places the objection of 'solipsism' into the mouth of his imaginary critic it is the possibility of just such a concept that is being questioned in principle. The critic doubts not Husserl's ability to prove that others exist which is not in question, but his ability to make 'phenomenological sense' of other egos. There is simply no place in the phenomenological scheme he argues, for the alter ego In that scheme everything must be either ego,
-
What is sought then, is a specifically phenomenological concept of the alter ego that is, one that will fit into the overall scheme of phenomenological investigation, the scheme indicated
,
,
The difficulty is explained best in a manuscript bearing the title h Das Ich undsein Gegenuber\ Here Husserl refers to that whic
t,
ly
f egos... [But] the ego is an ego or an open multiplicity o constituted in itself. Any ego gegenuberfor itself it is for itself, several other egos, [i.e.] can also be gegenuber for another or
experienced by them,
Husserl has his opponent say that other egos 'are not a mere
' ,
etc. But it is also precisely constituted for itself and has its constituted surrounding world consisting of non-egos, mere
objects'...
20
as
52
53
alter ego
for-himself
his
being-in-himself is simply not at issue What is at issue is how he is given But it is easy to see how this formulation is trans-
how can the other person be considered purely as being-for-me, in accord with the phenomenological reduction, when he is essentially for himself - not merely an object but a self-constituting
Gegen-Subjekt, i.e., 'not as mere worldly phenomenon, but as other transcendental ego 23 With the statement of the problem the first step of the phenomenological reduction has already been performed - the object has been transformed into the object-asmeant, the how of its givenness' has been brought into view. But Husserl must account for this givenness of the other subject in the usual way: he must correlate it with the activity of the conscious
'
.
'
point in Ideen II,21 how can something that is not a Gegenstand be given at all in the phenomenological sense? Perhaps the an sich can be considere purely as fur mich, but how can
stream of experience with 'his own' world? Other persons are not Gegenstdnde but Gegen Subjekte as Husserl says at one
-
the/wr sich be so considered? Up to now the universal characteristic of any concrete object has been its position within the horizons of the world An object is spatiotemporally situated in relation to my own body and a spatial horizon and ultimately causally related to its surroundings. But if the other ego is to
.
and considering it purely as meant, one is already made aware of Husserl's the intentional act of meaning it. Thus the direction of
be transcendental his relation to his surroundings is not of this sort His relation to the rest of the world is not that of a part to a whole or that of a thing to its surroundings.
,
.
ely mer
Rather
related to that world, and this in two ways: first he is given to me somehow through his body, which is part of the world as a d the rest of my world must perceived object; second, this object an
account of objectivity
,
ly - as other subject, how can the intersubjective sense of the objective world be given a phenomenological account? The only
,
is given as an individual experience through which another subject ich the world becomes the when his body is given and through wh
f my a form o
eir givenness to each other. But this of course is to give up the phenomenological attitude altogether What Husserl has done by raising the issue of sohpsism is to articulate the problem he faces and even to give a preview of the
,
,
.
V
is 'transcen-
an account of
forms of by pointing to certain features it shares with other tions and elsewhere. The experience already treated in the Medita logous to perception and experience of others is in some ways ana how it is in some ways analogous to recollection. By showing he hopes to have provided analogous and then how it is different,
54
55
an account that can be understood in the context of the phenomenological theory as a whole
,
.
As for the other's body it can be construed as 'transcendent* in the weak sense i.e., purely in relation to my own actual and
,
possible acts of consciousness. Everything that can be so considered belongs to what Husserl calls the sphere of ownness (Eigen-
in which
the body is grasped as body (Leib) and not just as a physical object (Korper), it is subjected to what Husserl calls an 'analogizing'
ways in which this relation of the copresent to the present is a special one, not comparable to such a relation in the perceived object. The present (the body) is organ or expression of consciousness, thus bearing a relation to the copresent that is comparable to nothing else. Thus the analogy to perception is only partial, but it is helpful in avoiding certain misunderstandings arising from the
by analogy to my own body in relation to my own The consciousness of which it is the manifestation
26
distinguishability and the supposed discontinuity between 'mind and body'. Just as Husserl attacks the sign-theory of thing-perception, where the sense-datum is a mental sign or indicator of the thing that lies behind it,29 so he opposes the view that the body is the 'sign' of a separate mind, something that announces or gives
'
'
points out, is what occurs in ordinary external perception where 27 the intention includes the other side of object as 'copresent
'
.
itself, even though only a side is strictly speaking presented to me. Likewise, in the experience of someone else, 'what I actually see
'
some way toward clearing up the apparent paradox of the object which is a subject, it does not itself take account of what is
analogizing apprehension : another ultimately given through the
'
'
remember the other sides of a perceived object, or one can imagine what they are like perhaps constructing a determined image on the basis of certain evidence; but one need not do this, whereas the appresentative consciousness, whether more or less determinate,
Husserl introduces a comparison to a different phenomenological dimension, that of recollection.31 Recollection, of course, is a special sort of Vergegenwartigung, an act which 'renders present
something that is not present ; it is distinguished from an act of phantasy, for example, by locating its object in the past, and, what
'
of what is presented; it is intended in a horizon-consciousness, not an independent act Now the other consciousness he wishes to say, is given in a similar act as copresent with the body as its 'other
.
side'
Again, the presented (in this case the body as Leib not as mere Korper) is what it is only together with the appresented. Husserl is quick to point out the primary difference between appresentation in perception and in Fremderfahrung: the copresent side of the perceived object can be simultaneously present to
,
f!
:
been perceived or otherwise consciously experienced by me. Thus with a greater or lesser degree of explicitness, recollection
renders present not only the object of the experience (e.g., a ience itself. In this sense musical performance) but also the exper
'
h which it the present ego carries out an accomplishment throug constitutes a variational mode of itself (in the mode past) as 33 What is constituted, an experience, is a stream of existing
'
.
>1
v;
56
57
an object for him and that our surroundings are given to him as they are to me - or rather, as they would be given to me if I were
a different spatial location as Husserl points out in a manuscript ('then I was in Paris, now I am in Freiburg') 34 In any case, one original' living present renders another as past, to itself, which
,
.
'
To be sure, this
ation; but at least it makes somewhat less paradoxical or selfcontradictory the idea of a stream of consciousness as object In order to make this comparison fruitful it is necessary again, to be clear on the ways in which the two forms of experience are not
.
alike. While recollection is an act in which one stream of consciousness is given to another clearly both streams are actually segments of one and the same stream and past acts are constituted
, ,
alter ego, given to me by analogy in Fremderfahrung, the other is a stream of experience extending more or less determinately (in the case of a stranger almost totally indeterminately) into the past, together with all its objects. In short, the other is given as a complete monad in his own right. Now the fact about the experience of another that makes comprehensible the full-fledged notion of objectivity is that, as
monad, he is thus constituted as having his own' world just as I do. But these two 'own' worlds are construed in intersubjective
'
experience as appearances or modes of givenness of one and the same world which is intended by both of us and indeed by all, and
by analogy to the transcendent in the weaker or 'solipsistic' sense: just as the latter is given as one by relation to a multiplicity of my acts, actual and potential, so the intersubjective object has the
same status in relation to a multiplicity of acts by different subjects. My act and that of the other are so fused that they stand
'
Furthermore
certain procedures of verification (Bewdhrung) which differ from those connected to the experience of another: in the one case
'
within the functional community of one perception, which simultaneously presents and appresents, and yet furnishes for the total
'
,
'
39
through the mediation of the other's body But there is another important sense in which the comparison holds, and which leads from the theory of Fremderfahrung to the theory of objectivity in the strong or intersubjective sense. In
an
Such is Husserl's phenomenological account of the alter ego which in turn makes possible his phenomenological account of the objective world. 'I experience the world... not as (so to speak) my
private synthetic formation because I experience it as given to
'
is to recall hearing it and to recall hearing it is to recall the performance itself, even if the correlate is remembered in each
,
possible consciousness, having the full sense it does only because it is referred in part to the consciousness of another. Thus the
other consciousness is
ego
'
'
'
non-
it is by being given to him that anything else is iousobjective for me. But this is possible only because the consc ness of another, as an alien locus of givenness, itself has sense for
)' 40 because
me, i.e., it can be given to me in its own peculiar way. Husserl has done, using the comparisons we have mentioned, is
(
:
What
k i,
.
if
58
59
'
the narrower sense). While the other does not strictly belong to
analogizing apprehension' involved in Fremderfahrung confronted with an object which is a subject a cogitatum cogi,
'
I am
d mona
tans.
while the alter ego makes it possible that the 'rest5 of the world
exceeds my actual possible consciousness the alter ego does not
himself exceed my actual and possible consciousness That is, he is described in the fith meditation in the same way thay everything else was described before the problem of 'solipsism was raised, namely as transcendent only in the weaker sense: not reducible to
.
'
identify a nature constituted in me with a Nature constituted by someone else (or, stated with the necessary precision how I can identify a Nature constituted in me with one constituted in me as 41 a Nature constituted by someone else). Thus while everything in this framework is understood by reference to my actual and possible experience, the Fifth Meditation introduces into this framework an important distinction that was not articulated in the first four: the distinction between
of experience that is not my own. But this can make sense only because that stream of experience, not my own can in turn be experienced by me - though 'experienced' must now be understood in a broad enough sense to include the appresentative or
'
my actual and possible experience in the strict or narrow sense (what Husserl calls the 'sphere of ownness ) those which give an object directly; and those of my experiences in which what is given is another stream of experience and through which an object is reduction to the sphere of owngiven indirectly. The so-called ness is not another phenomenological reduction at all, but simply a focus on the first or narrow sense of givenness so that the role
'
'
'
emerge.42
analogizing' apprehension
,
ipse is now understood at a higher level. This is necessary because the cogitatum in the broadest sense - the world - has been provided with an added dimension The 'objective world' has been explained by reference to other subjects who are not in it but are transcendental in relation to it. In this narrow sense the other ego
.
In other words Husserl's account up to this point is a strictly egological account one contained wholly within the schema egocogitatio-cogitatum It can even be called 'solipsistic' if the solus
,
.
was the transcendental attitude, the attitude of the transcendental What has been provided is a theory' of epoche, abandoned experiencing someone else, [a] theory' of experiencing others,
'
'
'
[which] did not aim at being and was not at liberty to be anything
but an explication of the sense,
'
others
'
between what is directly given to me and what is directly given only to him; but it is within my own experience that I do this Now 'my
.
total 'contribution' to the make-up of the world - which comprise a full-fledged monad in its own right - do belong wihin the range of my actual and possible experience That is, I distinguished
.
another, though privileged, cogitatum, and even though he is not of the world in the strict sense his givenness is dependent on that ied to the perceptual givenness of perception. Fremderfahrung is t of the other s body, and the alter ego is thus given, 'not originaliter dictic evidence, but only in an and in unqualifiedly [schlichter] apo
*
'
evidence belonging to
'
external
'
'
it
'
.
60
61
proof at all. In this sense the alter ego is treated as any other object
is treated in Husserl's philosophy i.e., purely as 'phenomenon'.
,
The being of the other subject is at issue only in the sense that the
being of anything at all is at issue in phenomenology up to this point, namely in the sense of his being-for-me Husserl's theory seeks to show the experiential conditions under which the other exists for me as transcendental other. In Husserl's 'solution to the problem of solipsism', then, the alter ego is not posited outside my own experience; rather, he is
.
whole [temporal] object e.g., an enduring tone or even a melody. 49 to this whole object, The perception as such, which is 'relative whatever it may be, cannot be reduced to any of the particular acts of presentation that make it up, not even the one that is presently
'
,
'
'
50
'
Returning to the 'one perception of which Husserl spoke in reference to the intersubjective object, it can be seen as likewise
and, to the extent that it is for me, it can be considered my act. The unified act is constituted by the other as well, with the difference that the content of presented and appresented are reversed. But from the point of view of either presentation - mine
or the other
' '
Meditations.
take the concept of sameness seriously here, the perception 'as such which corresponds to 'the whole intersubjective object
,
city
the strong or 'objective' sense, can be understood by analogy to the transcendent object in the weaker or 'solipsistic' sense; just as the latter is given as a unity in relation to a multiplicity of my acts, so the intersubjective object is given as a unity in relation to a multiplicity comprising my act and that of another This multipli.
ogy'.45 Let us consider the transition from one to the other We noted that the intersubjective object the transcendent object in
.
of his solution to add a completely new dimension ot his phenomenology. The phenomenology of the other ego's givenness provides the basis for what Husserl calls 'intersubjective phenomenol,
can only be considered our perception. The perception is a constituted act that cannot be ascribed totally to either of us, but only to both of us, to the we. The establishment of the we in common
perception is the simplest form of what Husserl calls the Vergemeinschaftung der Monaden:51 when two subjects confront one
another and stand in relation to the same objects they form, to that extent, a rudimentary community that can itself be considered
h 'its' diverse (and in this as performing an act (cogitamus) throug
case simultaneous) presentations. i For Husserl this leads to a whole theory of experience, const
'
52
perception'Now
consciousness
one might ask whose perception is this? A perception of my own as Husserl had seen in the lectures on time
,
,
,
individual consciousness but such a community at whatever zero memit may be found. The community now becomes the his ber'53 about which the objective world is oriented. From t community of monads, which point of view the community is a
'
level
temporal phases
the presented and the nonpresented are not simultaneous - the nonpresented is not appresented but retained as just past 48 But they form a 'functional unity' because their status in consciousness is the function of a 'meaning intention' which aims at 'the
.
Here
intersubjectivity'.54 It is transcenwe designate as transcendental dental because it makes 'transcendentally possible the being of a
ed at the end of the Cartesian Meditations, beginning with paras theory follows the general lines of the theory graph 56, Husserl of constitution at the solipsistic level i.e., basing its divisions on
'
7,
js i
1
.
-i
L : ..I
62
63
the ontological distinctions among the formal and material regions, on the difference in analysis between the static and the genetic, etc. Parallel to the solipsistic level it is necessary to
,
'Solipsistically
first of the philosophical disciplines... Then... would come intersubjective phenomenology, which is founded on that discipline... But priority in the order of inquiry does not imply priority in the order of being. Husserl even goes so far as to say that while solipsistic phenomenology is the intrinsically first (die
'
.
erste Sein], the being that precedes and bears every worldly Objectivity, is transcendental intersubjectivity: the universe of
monads, which effects its communion in various forms - [das in
individual level it cannot be a mere repetition of every detail with merely a 'change of sign' or of attitude While it is possible to talk
,
.
verschiedenen Formen sich vergemeinschaftende All der Monaden] Announcing puts it this way:
9
.
posed of individuals while the individual is not We have seen that the 'presentations' united in a communalization (Vergemeinschaf.
Perhaps the reduction to the transcendental ego only seems to entail a permanently solipsistic science; whereas the consequen
tial elaboration of this science, in accordance with its own sense,
Finally communities dissolve and reconstitute themselves in a way not ascribable to the individual. In general Husserl's intersubjec,
of Fremderfahrung can be seen to arise between communities where it clearly must be solved in a way very different from, or at least more complex than the theory of 'appresentation'.56
,
,
tung) can be simultaneous which is not the case in an individual. Communities not only contain individuals but also encompass smaller communities and are parts of larger ones. Furthermore, the community itself can be conceived as a monad and the problem
,
leads over to a phenomenology of transcendental intersubjectivity and, by means of this, to a universal transcendental philosophy. As a matter of fact we shall see that, in a certain manner, hilosoa transcendental solipsism is only a subordinate stage p phically; though, as such, it must first be delineated for purposes of method, in order that the problems of transcendental intersubjectivity, as problems belonging to a higher level, may
58
members
tive phenomenology does not follow the Hegelian path of considering the community as a kind of macroperson57 and endowing it with a life of its own of which the individual is only an abstract moment. Any community can be treated as a concrete 'subject' m a phenomenological analysis but as our previous exposition makes clear it must be seen in its specificity as constituted by its
,
It is clear from these passages that what is referred to as the phenomenology of transcendental intersubjectivity' is not the
investigation which makes up the largest part of the Fifth Mediation - the theory of how (through what forms of individual
- but rather the experience) the alter ego is given to the ego
"
This might lead us to think that the intersubjective level and the phenomenological analysis that goes with it is of merely secondary importance for Husserl On the contrary - and this is of great significance for the problem posed by this paper - he sees it as complementing the 'solipsistic' dimension of phenomenology and as being required, as the original 'objection of solipsism
, ,
.
intersubjective phenomenology' that takes transcendental intersubjectivity, instead of individual subjectivity, as the point of departure for a constitutive theory in relation to the world.
'
solipsistic
'
'
logy is accorded a stage of inquiry, intersubjective phenomeno status of at least equal dignity with it. This is remarkable because
>
64
65
jective phenomenology, has taught us about the nature of our experience of others Based as it is on the perceptual experience of the other's body the certainty of the other's givenness can be
.
no greater than the certainty of that perception itself. If the existence of the body is given only with the nonapodicticity characteristic of perception the existence of the other person seems to be equally nonapodictic In fact it seems even farther removed from certainty since a claim is made over and above that of the body And the analogical apprehension that lends content to the other person's consciousness, the givenness of his ex,
.
had provided a proof of the existence of the alter ego, if the other he were found to be given with a certainty equivalent to that of t ide cogito, the situation would be different. But it did not prov such a proof, as we have seen, and indeed was not at liberty to
'
'
provide it.
'
etc., adds
a further element of fallibility to the experience of another. To be sure there is, as Husserl says, a peculiar type of confirmation
nities and indeed of all communities. Phenomenology, afer all, is meant to be an eidetic and not a factual science, and the same should hold true at the intersubjective level. Such factual commu-
that belongs to the essence of Fremderfahrung 59 it is no more a mere presumption than perception itself. But this does not remove
,
its ultimate fallibility which is why Husserl remarks that the other's consciousness is given 'not originaliter and in schlichter apodiktischer Evidenz but only in an evidence belonging to
,
,
'
external' experience'
60
.
of it,61 there is no need to be disturbed if the consciousness of the examples themselves is not apodictic.
ness
'
But this is precisely the type of evidence on which intersubjective phenomenology must be based, at least in part After all, the
.
Yet exactly the same point can be made about phenomenology at the solipsistic level. Here, too, phenomenology is not about the
individual facts encountered in transcendental reflection, but takes these facts as examples for the purpose of arriving at an
eidos. But here, as is well known, Husserl not only insists on the
'
up and of their particular contributions to its nature And this is the part whose evidence for me, is that of Fremderfahrung as
.
ent in the idea of science itself. Only if my experiencing of my transcendental self is apodictic can it serve as ground and basis
And
inter subjective phenomenology For here we are interested no longer in the others for-me or the community-for me my ex-
de up of apodictic pect of a philosophy, a systematic structure ma cognitions, starting with the intrinsically first field of experience 62 The role of the ego sum in phenomenology is and judgment indicated by Husserl when he describes apodicticity as the absol'
.
'
ds of all 'principles ute indubitability that the scientist deman Here we have one of the most explicitly Cartesian strains in
'
.
seen,
Husserl's phenomenology, the idea that the scientific rigor investigation is ultimately secured because they stand on the
f his o
'
firm
It
67
66
ground of the ego cogito. Now we have seen that if the existence
'
NOTES
of the ego is a 'principle', it is not a premise from which to infer the existence of anything else, not even, as we have seen, that of the alter ego. Rather, it functions as the basis of apodictic claims about the essence of the ego, and it is these claims that form the actual content of phenomenology. But does the apodicticity of these eidetic claims really require the apodicticity of the existential claim ego sum! If our picture of intersubjective phenomenology has been correct, Husserl conceives of such a phenomenology as having the same dignity and thus presumably the same scientific status, as individual phenomenology And it is based on the
,
.
Phenomenol-
irns, The Hague, Martinus Nijhoff, 1960, p. 1 ogy, trans,, Dorion Ca ) See also the reconstruction of the original (hereafter referred to as M Strasser, Den Haag, Martinus Nijhoff, 1963, p. 3.
'
community is given to the ego in his Vergemeinschaftung with others. But precisely what this grounding shows is that the cogitamus is not given in an apodictic way
.
The difficulty raised by the introduction of intersubjective phenomenology, then, can be put this way: if the rigor of phenom-
enological analysis requires the apodictic givenness of the subjective to the phenomenologist then only egological or solipsistic phenomenology can be rigorous. If, on the other hand, intersub,
s project in this way usually judge that he has 12. Those who interpret Husserl tation seems to lie behind Quentin Lauer s not succeeded. This interpre
' '
validity of subjective constitution' and failed. See his Phenomenology: Its Genesis and Prospect, New York, Harper and Row, 1965, p. 150,
ing unambiguously upon the equal dignity even the primacy of intersubjective phenomenology and its correlate transcendental mtersubjectivity He does not seem to be exphcity aware of the
,
,
.
19.
distinction in the Logical The cogitatum qua cogitatum goes back to a Humanities Press, 1970, vol. II, Investigations (tr. J.N. Findlay, New York,
p
.
hich
is intended'.
of this; for this would help explain the fact that in the Crisis he makes an attempt to begin phenomenology without insisting on the apodicticity of the ego cogito
.
p.
hwestern University Press, 1967, Embree and E.G. Ballard, Evanston, Nort
i.f
If
.
&
69
68
117) says that 'the conflict between the requirement of reduction and the requirement of description becomes an open conflict in the case of the other ego, and that the conflict is never resolved (p. 130). The alter ego is somehow more other' than any other object. But any transcendent object is given as other' and the requirement of reduction is simply to describe it as it is given. Thus it is difficult to see why the alter ego is a special case.
p.
' '
'
25. CM, p. 111. A great deal of discussion has been occasioned by the way in
47. Zur Phdnomenologie des inneren Zeitbewusstseins, p. 38 protention as that which is just about to 48. And, one might add, is given in
' '
r&recissement de son champ de vision CM, p. 148. CM, p. 149. CM, p. 155. CM, p. 122.
come.
particular object as another person. His account has been attacked by A. Schutz in 'Das Problem der transzendentalen Intersubjektivitat bei Husserl' (PhiL Rundschau V (1957) pp. 81-107) and defended by M. Theunissen in
DerAndere. Studien zurSozialontologieder Gegenwart Berlin, de Gruyter, 1965, pp. 64 ff. We leave this whole discussion aside concentrating on the analysis of such apprehension itself whatever its preconditions may be. 26. CM, p. 109.
,
52.
Zveites Buck, p. 191: Wir sind in Beziehung auf eine geme wird sind in einem personalen Verband: das gehort zusamsame Umwelt
'
,
-
i!
'
.
20'
in-
men
29. Cf. Ideen zu einer reinen Phdnomenologie etc., Erstes Buch, ed. Walter
,
'
Biemel, Den Haag Martinus Nijhoff, 1950, p. 99. 30. CM, p. 124. See also p 121.
,
.
I els' Zlation,
.
'
,
suggest, lh
ted
31. CM, pp. 115 f. and 126 ff. A clearer exposition of this point is found in
The Crisis..., p. 185
.
32. This is a paraphrase of a passage in an appendix to Erste Philosophie. Erster Teil, ed. R. Boehm Den Haag, Martinus Nijhoff 1956, p. 264. See also
,
Zur Phdnomenologie des inneren Zeitbewusstseins ed. R. Boehm, Den Haag, Martinus Nijhoff 1966, p. 40 f.
,
34. Cited in Ren6 Toulemont L *Essence de la sociM selon Husserl, Paris, Presses Universitaires de France 1962, p. 57.
,
pp. 55 ff.) mentions HusserPs use of 'comparisons' with perception and recollection, but confuses the issue by calling these modes of experience the 'indispensible foundation for the higher associations', (p. 56) i.e., those of Fremderfahrung But Husserl is quite clear on the fact that
.
Fremderfahrung is not based on recollection; the latter simply offers an instructive comparison' (CM p. 115). 36. Cf. paragraph 25 'The Double Intentionality of Recollection' in Zur Phdn'
39. CM p. 122.
,
p. 107. 41. CM p. 126. 42. Cf. Toulemont op. ciL, p. 40: 'La nature des deux reductions est difterente:
,
40. CM
"7
13
.
It has long been claimed that The Crisis of European Sciences, HusserPs last work, represents a significant new development in his thought. I believe this is true, but I think this claim has
consistently been made for the wrong reasons. Not the concept of the life-world which is usually taken 4s the new departure, but the emergence of the problem of history, is what is radically new
,
in the Crisis To be sure, the two notions are closely related. But J
.
entirely consistent with its program. It is otherwise with the problem of history, as I shall try to show. For what this problem
introduces into phenomenology is neither a new theme for investigation nor even, as in the case of the life-world, a new conception of the whole domain of investigation. Rather, it calls forth a new
conception of the procedure of investigation itself, a new conception of phenomenological method. Of course there are also those who have argued that there is
really nothing new in the Crisis. After all, the work bears the
subtitle 'Introduction to Phenomenological Transcendental Philosophy5
,
that had been introduced in the Ideas and the Cartesian Meditations. The manner of introduction is new, to be sure, dispensing
with and even criticizing the Cartesian approach of the two earlier works. But Husserl had experimented with other methods of J introduction before notably the logical method of Formal and Transcendental Logic and the psychological one of the Encyclop,
72
73
fatally, affected by the ideas explored in his last work that his remarks about the end of the dream of philosophy as rigorous science should be taken as his own opinion Those who regard the Crisis as a kind of deathbed conversion to existentialism and a
,
.
crisis of science, Husserl says: What is clearly necessary (what else k in a thorough could be of help here?) is that we reflect bac
'
,
renunciation of his earlier efforts have simply not read the text. As for the historical considerations it might be said this is easily
, ,
}
the 'task which is truly our own as philosophers, he says later, only through a critical understanding of the total unity of history 3 The critical-historical reflections in which Husserl our history s genuine selfis engaged are described as 'the philosopher reflection on what he is truly seeking [auf das, worauf er eigentlich
'
'
'
'
'
hinauswilf\\4 Such remarks suggest much more than a mere resume and critique of past attempts to solve philosophical prob-
lems before proceeding to their true solution. Such a resume might f be helpful, but would not be a material part of philosophy itsel
i
i
i
i
here we find Husserl and could just as well be dispensed with. But ing philosophy; from do
insisting on the necessity of historical reflections in order to he discern the very business of philosophy itself. Being clear on t
task of philosophy cannot be dissociated
it is the establishment or foundation of philosophy, its ture beginning, that is Husserl's prime interest.
a critical
'
,
serl first calls for them because his brief exposition of the contrast
turbulent events of the Nazi years, Husserl's feeling that he had been deserted by his most brilliant students and the reading public
-
all suggested the need for a new and more impressive mode of
.
between the present crisis and the optimism of the Rena has, as he says, 'reminded us that as philosophers we are heirs to d 'philosophy' the past in respect to the goals which the wor ater,
issance
If this were truly the character of the historical framework of the Crisis and these Husserl's motives for adopting it one might remark its novelty but not be inclined to ascribe to it any
,
in a historical-spiriual
sort under discussion
'
lusively
kind
reading would also be guilty of ignoring the text for Husserl's historical investigations exhibit features which distinguish it sharply from anything he has done before. These features make it impossible to dismiss them as embellishments chosen for exter,
of self-reflection aimed at a self-understanding in terms of what ings [historisches Wesen] we are truly seeking as the historical be
'
nal effect or timely relevance, and they prove as we shall see, to be of decisive significance for phenomenology itself In the first place Husserl justifies his historical reflections in
,
.
we are'.7 These remarks suggest that being historical is somedo philosophy, and thing like an essential trait of those who because of this they must begin philosophy in a historical way. An indication of the importance he attached to his historical s recurring preoccupations with the method, reflections is Husserl
'
a4?+-
: : y
v; :
-
74
75
The idea that the way to philosophical truth passes through the
he returns to the problem in a text designed as a preface to Part III but not included in the published text 9 Other unpublished manuscripts of the period exhibit the same preoccupation. The common point of departure in these methodological conside-
'
Zu
rations is a negative one: what we are engaged in, although certainly historical in character is not history in the usual sense. This shows us an important difference between the Cr/s/s and the
,
impulse of research must proceed not from philosophies but blemen]'.11 To the issues and problems [von den Sachen und Pro hen deal with the history of philosophy is to deal not with the Sac
from
In the 1923 lectures which are in many details similar to the exposition of the Crisis, Husserl
.
but only with what others have said about the Sachen.
Husserl
lf, either but only to the tendency to confuse if with philosophy itse
it is a 'history of ideas' But most important of all the distinction between the 'historical introduction' and the 'systematic part', found in the Erste
,
s own by ingeniously mixing and to conjure a doctrine of one he Ideas, to ward off from the stirring the doctrines of others. In t laid down what he called the start any such temptation, Husserl : 'Expressly formulated [it] consists in this, philosophical epoche ting the doctrinal that we completely abstain from judgment respec
'
*
ttempt a
of Part III on the life-world and psychology respectively are largely nonhistorical in character. But even they are couched in historical references and the historical and nonhistorical are
,
,
and conduct all our expocontent of all pre-existing philosophy, sitions within the framework of this abstention'.12 Husserl does
not, of course, rule out references to philosophy as 'historical fact
'
In any case, if historical reflection really belongs essentially and not just accidentally to the establishment of
.
constantly mixed
nonhistorical
Erste Philosophie
hing like the elaborate throughout his writings. But we find not historical reflections of the Crisis and nothing like the insistence haracter of such reflections. on the necessity and problematic c
'
chosen
language indicates something much stronger than this The historical route is not a merely possible but a necessary one and the idea seems to be that whichever of several parallel alternatives is
.
interpretation is not tenable Husserl is still explicity conscious of the notion of alternative ways in the Crisis and the two sections of Part III are presented as two parallel ones: the way from the pre-given life-world and the way from psychology. But history is
.
historical character of If is the 'thoroughly and exclusively sary, says Husserl, those who do philosophy which makes it neces f philosophy in order that they reflect critically on the history o
-
to Mo' it properly. What does this mean historical beings - and why should it potential philosophers ll, philosophers could be, in result in this requirement? After a
'
'
is Husserl's concept of the engage in historical reflections. What is concept lies the historicity of the potential philosopher? In th
s new approach, the key to its correct only explanation for Husserl
'
'
76
77
earlier philosophy
of inquiry pursued independently throughout Husserl's career finally intersect in the Crisis, and their intersection explains Husserl s novel approach These lines of inquiry are pursued under the headings of genetic phenomenology and the theory of inter,
,
seemingly untranscendental procedure. But if the answer is to be found in Husserl's earlier writings it is there only in concealment for otherwise the necessity of historical reflections would have emerged much sooner Or, to put it more precisely certain lines
,
,
.
in the Ideas must be made concrete by taking into account the dynamic or temporal dimension. With this, the character of transcendental grounding changes
back by
successive retentional modifications it approaches what Husserl calls, in Formal and Transcendental Logic, an Essentially necessa-
'
ry limit. That is to say: with this intentional modification there goes hand in hand a gradual diminuation of prominence: and ly prominent precisely this has its limit, at which the former
subsides into the universal substratum - the socalled 'unconscious'
examine
tory.
1 (Geltu as "* - * ** ground it elft t 81 InvestiS onsr the givenness of the objective isTouih, sense-bestowi-g. iS tl ? Inconceived 35 this n0tion is the Ideas> broadened through ZT 0f attitUde " -eminently the natural attitud wh h "* expresses attitude 1,Lfltl? it! f in 11' Both of these conceptS act and
0
direct* from the demands of 8etS its name Husserl says, frZrSf iS e itsof tran ndence The transcendence of the obj
tr
l T? T
'
which, far from being a phenomenological nothing, is itself a limit mode of consciousness 14 In passing beyond the limit of con scious retention, Husserl says, the past cogitatio becomes sedimented as an acquisition or possession (Erwerb or Habe) which
*
-
ct
can be awakened in recollection. But even if is not actually reawakened, it remains a part of what the calls 'the substratum
accompanies
15
.
Thus, while, from the transcendental point of view, every object is given as what it is in virtue of the character of the act in which it is given, this act in turn is what it is partly by virtue of the temporal background or horizon against which it stands out. Every evidence', as Husserl says in the Cartesian Meditations,
'
9
'
for me an abiding possession 16 and it is sets up' or 'institutes with an ever growing stock of such abiding possessions that consciousness enters each new living present. Each act not only
'
'
intends its object but unifies itself with its past and intends
future until cancelled or modified by present evidence.
,
its
idences, although no object in light of that past. Its sedimented ev function as presuppositions and norms for the longer actual
Thus,
a unity throuTl t for the ob is as of itS Ranees. Thus the concept r 31 recollection and such, first developed in l Tthe 0<luestlon of our experience of time, t0 must h?
*
en
'
must be regarded
by memory, or tied to an unchanging ego, is a cumulative proces Again, it must be of reciprocal interrelations and influences.
iven
analys
or constituted, it is necessary to make reference to the self-constitution of consciousness. The givenness of the world requires the
78
79
CO"saousness' and this unity is not simply a brute fact but th 1 10t a process of self-unification which is the very form
f conscious life
>
-
but for others as well. Only if there are others for me can there
evervT PartlCular history rinds s Place within the temporal unitv f which has its own COnscious me as a whoIe histo ry -m'"T1 unity such a
,
.
he says in Formal and Transcendental Logic 'has its own 'history'' that 1S'118 temporal genesis ." Ana ""iy,iy "iai is, its genesis9 11 And
,
,
""
OUr t0piC iS the fact that Husse , uses the terms t<I
c -
'
of
1a <w t0!? hlmSelf for himself in' so to speak, the unity mstory
u
1 scendencounter a world whichmyisactualmy private property by this 'ownness sphere' of not and possible exper and
encountering an experience which is not my own.
i -x u;
,
iences
jectivity.' J
individual but to that of groups or societies, the link between the two concepts must be found in Husserl's philosophy of intersubContrary to the usual interpretation
10
.
like 'so to speak' What does it have to do with history in the usual sense? Since the term is usually applied not to the life of the
importance of ,he probtan of IM oi mc piuuiwn v,* -T raMrtim\aTZ sort f not merely the givenness o dental point of view:
the world's transcendence as a whole.
Thus, the
the alter ego, is at issue, but, through him, tne sens of entity
l
'
m
Meditation
s description of t We need not recount in detail Husser is given. Certainly it contains - -experience m wmcn tne anci experience in which the alter ego & Axt rr fiaiired in the
he
standard or traditional sense at all His question is not whether other minds in fact, exist or whether we as philosophers can prove, inductively or deductively that they do. Rather Husserl poses the same question here that he does with respect to any other object of our awareness, the question: how is it given? For Husserl
,
,
very way the problem is set up. J" '"'ehension 29 I encounter J J? fi encounter is another anotner suoject. tmi mis ui cmc. another subject. But this means Elects. What ith all its objects. What flow of experience, actual and possible, w is now confronted with his world'. But could be called y world ld. for there is only one wor this is only an abstract description, A*.o Hv# nn the world, a
_ '
'appresentation' and
'
analogiz g
'
comes evinced [sich bekundet] and verified in the realm of our transcendental ego; we must discover in what intentionalities,
the explicit and implicit intentionality wherein the alter ego be-
t I experience is always more than aUen perspective, the world tha f it or ever could directly experience what I directly experience o
-
x-
himself to overcome.
The special difficulty here is presented by the fact that the objects is in this case a subject a cogitatum cogitans. This is what Husserl calls the paradox of solipsism which he challenges
,
ing such givenness can we account for the givenness of the objective world in the sense of the world which exists not just for me,
A
the wordless confrontation of two even the simplest case of another is an act of communication and persons, the experience of community - Husserl calls it the formation of a rudimentary 1 Just as the object may be conceived as one Vergemeinschaftung.2 arances to me (through by reference to the multiplicity of its appe t is one by reference to the time), so the intersubjective objec tn me and to others.
>Mn/ c
(simultaneous)
1
Vi
80
81
appropriation of the experiences of others through his communicative encounters with them.
to me directly; it has the sense it does for me which far outruns what is directly given because I live in a community of other subjects whose experiences complement but can never be my own. It is compounded of direct and indirect or quasi evidences. I bus again stressing the transcendental point of view: the sense of the world for the individual subject is at least partially traceable to the community in which he lives or, more precisely, to his
, ,
,
combining my own experiences with those not my own borrowing as it were only by Dorrowmg what others communicate to me in my my encounters with tU** 'ri, 1 j . encounters with them The world I live in is only partially given
,
j0 f0r the P menological irSZ L1" hence the objective world? O the intersubjective object and !8! H0W d0 1 -e
co
enHn
x av/w
i cumsumte me
nly by
we are thoroughly and exclusively in aunderstan hJtoricaUpiritual man24 We are now in a position to
ner'. ner .
Ve... not only have a spiritual heritage, but have become what
-
means
? c,m
d what Husserl wc aic iiuw m a p oitivi* w v*** - f all because we are by this. We are historical beings first o
n<>c- our conscious life consist mir rnnsrimis life consist beings;
-
conscious
,c Ka.
in constituting itself
to say that we are in history, that we arrive on the scene and f us disappear at certain points in objective historical time. Each o
what Husserl means by the historicity of consciousness.
But how does this notion of historicity apply to the philosopher he past, in particular? As conscious beings we are heirs to t
'
lt we combine the intersubjective and genetic analyses, what emerges is the full fledged notion of the historicity of subjectivity transcendental I from the transcenH.nt.i point of view object. as given is . . . . The
i
.
whatever our hQnQ{s> mitudcs, and goals; and if we are philosophers, we are, as Husserl says, heirs to the past in respect to the
....
f concepts in terms o
as a
I process is an expression not only of its own jI past of the community in which it functions abut also of the past past which it appropriates throu
,
Ut thlS substratum may in turn be socially mediated. HnJ i says that 'Wor*/ t:A . nusseri savs that . Husserl every evidence sets up in me an abiding possession* 23 but we could also sa y that not every abiding possession may be traceable to direct evidence It may derive from the quasi-evidence of a communicative encounter Every subjective
....
accompanies every living present'22 as we saw forms a background of presuppositions which determine the character of that n d
deavor that exists and has certain notion or definition of an en he works of those who are existed in society, but also studying t
, Ai_ u
-
ting a accep
accepting incipient philosopher is generally not a matter of simply For most. rpark
i
taking up pmiosopny aucs not mean simply taking up philosophy does uui mvii u o+tituri
that others have written. This may be the att
u
question the very procedure followed in order to reach them Husserl justifies his historical reflections there
is not itself a historical reflection What happens in the O/s/5 is that the results of this investigation reflect back upon and call into
.
gh its communal life with others As I have constantly stressed, the concept of history is developed according to the procedures of transcendental phenomenology and in answer to the demands of that ver
.
arked by layman, but the potential philosopher is more often m is the task of his very dissatisfaction with traditional doctrines. It d and the assumption of this philosophy that Husserl has in min ction of the entire task may even involve the conscious, total reje h a philosopher, Husserl is philosophical tradition. But even suc heir of the past' in taking up the problems which saying, is an
,
'
ess of his indebtedness to the past rarely penetrates to this level; his rejection, or his acknowledged relation to the past consists in
of what he finds there. It is even his eventual critical acceptance, clearly the notion of unacknowledged heritage which interests liar historicity Husserl at this point and which constitutes the pecu
iousness.
83
82
Once Husserl begins to take seriously the idea of the unacknowledged heritage of the philosopher, his relation to the past becomes
ition: what is relived is relived reflectively will not be a mere repet of something taken for granted in order to be raised from the level
f!
a much more complex affair than it was originally thought to be. When he enunciated the principle of philosophical epoche in the Ideas, Husserl clearly had in mind one's conscious, explicit, acceptance of this or that philosophical doctrine. This was to be put aside, bracketed. And this presents no special problem, because what is explicity acknowledged can just as easily be set aside. The phenomenological epoche by contrast, was a real
,
ly recognized. Just as the phenometo that of something explicit habitually practiced in the form of a method al nological epoche is
r
>
s
.
effort, because the natural attitude, which it bracketed, has the character of an unacknowledged prejudice a Selbstverstdndlich,
the philosophic called the phenomenological reduction, so become a philoized and universalized to epoche mnst be systemat or what might better be called a historical sophical reduction, reduction. . . this term in the Crisis, this is, Although Husserl nowhere uses is what he has in mind in that work andtywe maintain, precisely nner of clari the initial key to his historical procedure. This ma
.
keit. In order to be bracketed it must be dredged up and recognized as a thesis to which we subscribe. In fact the process of bracketing
is identical with coming to awareness of this underlying presupposition which otherwise remains hidden and the whole effort of
,
edure:
l establishment of the goals, by inquiring back into the prima ical meaning, the is to make vital again, in its concealed historken for grantee, sedimented conceptual system which, as ta s] private and non-msserves as the ground for [the philosopher to be one who thinks for himselt torical work... If he is philosopher with the will to m [Selbstdenker], an autonomous dices, he must have the msig liberate himself from all preju for granted are prejudices, that an that all the things he takes edimentation or obscurities arising out of a s prejudices are
'
suffice that we be warned against them? But - and here is the rub what do we mean by theml In the case of the natural attitude,
as we have seen, overthrow must at the same time be discovery
of the ego between the natural self and his phenomenological jfi .
mx, i/viwv,wj
.
elsewhere] that There is no doubt [he writes ical considerations 11 d what ourselves in histor understan sufficient understand ourselves as philosopher me through us. i up against philosophy is to beco to grasp... at certain working PT0bleS our working t ot in a naive development, to trea living trad. ne who, in the same cau partners, with those blems me pro ition, have run up against the sa
...
tilt
lldLUiai
SCli
CtllU
HIS
UlIClU-rmwnv/iv&~-
twn
observer 26 and
two. In the case of historical prejudices something similar seems indicated. Like natural prejudices these are distinguished by being taken for grantfed selbstverstdndlich. What suggests itself here, by analogy to the phenomenological epochs is a reliving of our philosophical prejudices a repetition of the philosophical
,
anf Kicf ofol ;., involving a zigzag between the pattern inquiry : o o a.tU. o, cirv lar CPPTTIS In tVi*> race*
?
,
1 UlS 13
,theory of knowledge
. ,
rr\f*
51 <*
of
'
j ,
jsely what we
'
Selbstverstdndlichkeiten under which we turn to philosophy in the first place. Like the phenomenological epochs such a repetition
,
\1
84
' '
85
the tradition
philosopher, as an essential part of his method, a serious and systematic consideration of his particular time and place a consi,
tradition of which we are a part in order to bring to recognition the prejudices that are part of that tradition.
i
deration previously declared irrelevant to phenomenology but the eidetic reduction. Under that reduction facts and particular
events, even and indeed especially those revealed in transcendental
reflection
,
Not surprisingly, Husserl traces the origin of modern philosophical problems to the rise of modern science, whose decisive
feature is its mathematical character. It is primarily to Galileo that we owe the transformation of the study of nature into a mathematical science, and as soon as this science begins to move toward successful realization, the idea of philosophy in general... is transformed'.34 In order to understand the origin of the modern
'
ultimately sought Now facts and events become important in their own right. To be sure it may be essentially true that con,
and thus philosophical consciousness is historical, that is, that it is laden with prejudices derived from its social-historical milieu. But this means precisely that the character of such prejudices will vary depending on the milieu This is why, when
,
sciousness
'
.
clarity on the task of philosophy Husserl says that we can obtain such clarity 'not through the critique of some present or handed
,
down system of some scientific or prescentitic * Weltanschauung' (which might as well be Chinese in the end)' - that is, not through
,
haracterizations
the study of just any history - 'but only through a critical understanding of the total unity of history our history' 31 It is no longer the case that any example will serve as well as any other, as in the
-
nological reduction
reduction
.
socalled secondary qualities which do not lend themselves to exact measurement. Changes in these qualities can, however, be corre-
And this is exactly what Husserl proceeds to do in the Cr/5/5. After his brief introduction he embarks upon what the calls the Clarification of the Modern Opposition Between Physicalistic
'
l such secondary qualities of all, Galileo proposes to treat al ble correlates with the idea exclusively in terms of their measura
His discussion
'
of modern philosophy constitutes a 'historical reduction because it is above all as he says, an inquiry back [Ruckfrage] into the
that all will thereby be accounted for. Now Husserl is not as interested in the Galilean proposal itself
In the hands of philosoas he is in its philosophical interpretation. to an ontological claim: phers, Galileo's proposal is transformed in to be is to be measurable in ideal terms as a geometrical configuthat we take for true ration. Thus it happens, as Husserl says,
'
not
simply a rehearsal of the 'doctrinal content* of certain theories. It tries to show in detail how we are eirs of the past in respect
86
87
\
3
method which considers the world as if it were exclusively a manifold of measurable shapes; the ontological interpretation /ii simply states that it is such a manifold. Now the scientific problem is different from the philosophical problem: the first seeks inter-
science is a
W W XWW AU
x-7
iwc**
iiXL
LaLi\
objective world which is ld, although no longer naively grounding? *xv 'wv givuiicmig,* The fact is that this wor co nceived in exactly taken for granted as self-grounding, is su the same terms as it was by the rationalists and empiricists. That
f that world; but what is the nature o ible of and requires such a suscept
place in it and, above all his knowledge of it - henceforth operate with this conception of reality as a presupposition. Rationalism
,
connected with the world its scope its beginning and end
-
to determine the true nature of reality. But here the solution to the first problem is taken as the solution to the second and a hidden shift of meaning has occurred. All subsequent problems
,
is, it is the mathematized world of the natural scientists that s problem. For him, this is the world. But we constitutes Kant have seen, through our reflections on Galileo, that the scientific
'
man's
makes the point - correct given the rationalist assumptions - that all we ever see are the causal effects of reality upon our minds and then asks the legitimate question of whether what we see accurately informs us of what is. The development ends in Hume's skepticism which is only possible because the rationalist conception of reality is taken for granted But the real opposition in modern philosophy for Husserl, is not between rationalism and empiricism but between objectivism which includes both of these - and transcendentalism Hume Hume uulil Ul tnese
,
treats the scientific method as a kind of instrument like the microscope through which we come to see reality; empiricism
,
,
hich such interpretation tation, the prescientific lifeworld in w ification of begins and to which it must return for the direct ver
is is an interpreth
world whose objects are not ideal all its hypotheses. This is a
! considered the causal effect of the objective world upon the mind,
the prescientific features of the
as
'
ledge is know
the role of the lifeworld must be of transcendental grounding, constructions of the scientist taken into account. The theoretical
by returning to that radical reflection which Descartes had considered merely provisional and establishing it as the true method of rigorous philosophy The objectivity of knowledge is given not an
.
1 a! failureOUr philo ni0f of know,edge> but it was Kant who He did this turned this apparent
c>-> it
.
take the lifeworld for granted as built upon it. We cannot ing
tructions without understand adequately understand those cons
the intermediate and founding role of the lifeworld. l. Thus, while he Yet this is what Kant failed to do, says Husser
' '
J*
A *<A
i
r
sophy
The idea of such a subjective or transcendental Kant's contribution to th grounding was e history of modern thought But Kant's philosophy too must be interrogated in terms of its underlying problems and motives and it is here that the true significance of Husserl's historical reduction be Husserl had always been gins to merge. critical of many aspects of Kant's philo.
The Haq
the forms
i_.
idden presupposition his predecessors, his philosophy contains a h blem of the world, inherited from them. The transcendental pro he world borrowed for Kant, is predetermined by a concept of t
Z*T
llUtll
lliuiiwiu
awiwAw*"*
Kant
ception of the transcendental turn, the world enigma in the deepest and most says Husserl, of for he questioned the naive obviousness of the ultimate sense what is more, the certainty of the certainty of the world... and, of the sophisticated theoretical everyday world as well as that day world'.38 But Kant failed constructions built upon this every his transcendental critique in to see any enigma here, and began
'
'
.i
f*u+
cZZh1 although
7 _
'
88
89
1
We can see that Husserl's discussion of Galileo in which the life-world emerges takes on its ultimate significance not in his critique of objectivism but in his critique of the transcendental turn in which objectivism is overthrown But whose transcenden,
tal philosophy is actually being criticized? The strange fact about the Kant-critique in the Crisis is that while Husserl takes Kant to task for not recognizing the significance of the liveworld this is the first time in Husserl's own writings that the lifeworld is
,
, ,
the lifeworld calls forth its own theory of ogy constitution, a theory of prescientific world-life whose intentionality is not that of subsuming its objects under theories of any kind, whose interest is not determined by the demands of logical consistency or completeness of theoretical scope. Husserl has
'
.
41 Cor relatively,
come to the realization that consciousness is not theoretical all or even most of the time, that there was consciousness before there
was science, and, above all, that there was a world before science
came
accorded this significance It is hard to avoid the conclusion that Husserl's Kant-critique is really a Husserl critique in disguise, that the inadequate concept of transcendental philosophy that is critic.
-
i
\
ized here is not Kant's but that of the earlier Husserl. It is true that Husserl had not made the mistake of identifying the world with the entities of natural science alone He had always criticized Kant for doing this insisting that other forms of objectivity, those treated in the humanistic social, psychological, and even life
.
Now there can be no doubt that the concept of the life-wor represents a significant new development in Husserl's phenomeless than a new approach nological theory. It is, after all, nothing
ld
to the problem of the world, not merely the opening of a new lines. domain within already established phenomenological guide int Those who seek to minimize the novelty of the Crisis often po
s descriptions of the life-world coincide out that many of Husserl with those developed much earlier under the rubric of the phenomcalled, that of a transcenenology of perception or, as it was later dental aesthetic,42 and that even the term lifeworld* seems to have
'
'
sciences
been used as early as earlier investigations are carried to the point of requiring such a
,
purpose of contrasting natural science to other sciences but rather in order to contrast the scientific endeavor - any scientific endeavor - with a prescientific consciousness and its world. What is
to enlarge on the Kantian conception he still sees toward a theory of judgment and ultimately theoretical judgment.
on the basis of actual experience are knowable in correct theoretical thinking' 39 This conception was then pursued in the second volume of the Ideas where the theory of constitution takes its clue
>
.
le, and The investigations of Erfahrung und Urteil, for examp those of Formal and Transcendental Logic, exhibit this orienl explicitly says tation in their very titles. But in the Crisis, Husser ated from its that the problem of the lifeworld must be separ
from the various material regions, which correspond to the main divisions of science: the natural the psychic and the spiritual or Geistige. The implication is that these ontologies taken together, constitute an ontology of the world. But in the Crisis Husserl
,
,
,
connection with the theory of science and seen as a philosophical problem in its own right.44 He conceives of the possibility of an
least not
'
incipient
40
s words, experience is a much broader h is science. field with many possible orientations, only one of whic The world, correlatively, is characterized as having many dimensions, and it is not just this or that science which abstracts
established scientifically
:
...
'before
heoretical
consciousness generally.
r
.
.
90
91
that, in itself
gram as a whole. Here I must side with those I was just attacking who minimize the novelty of the theory of the lifeworld Both consciousness and the world are conceived more broadly but the
,
intersubjective phenomenology. His aim had always been to describe the world just as it presents itself to us, and to describe the
forms of consciousness in which this presentation is actualized. But in the Crisis a discovery is made which changes radically the character of phenomenological investigation. This discovery has
phenomenological analysis of their relation is the same. This is clearly what Husserl has in mind From the new ontology of the
.
phenomenology can be integrated into this new theory of consciousness and the world while maintaining the pattern of analy*
SIS.
The really serious questions for phenomenology are raised not by the theory of the lifeworld itself but rather by Husserl's way
of arriving at it namely, not through the phenomenological
,
'
46 The impli-
if it is historically naive, will result in the description of a historical-cultural phenomenon which nevertheless takes itself to be a
universal characterization. My view is that Husserl is implicitly h a mistake. The historiaccusing himself of having made just suc cal-cultural world is another of the discoveries of the Crisis, by have argued the way, to which Husserl also, rather confusingly as I
elsewhere,47
himself for taking over the Sachen und Probleme of philosophy from his predecessors This helps explain Husserl's strange remark that it is not just any history but the totality of our history that must be subjected to interrogation as well as the fact that the history he actually examines contains only the philosophers he himself has studied intensively Far from being a philosophy of
, ,
.
whereas
history, in the sense of a description of the sense emerging from the vast panorama of Western thought - hardly a world about Hegel, none at all about Nietzsche or Marx, no mention of
itutional analysis if the subjected to phenomenological-const phenomenology of science or culture or anything else is to be
icated
itself. It is
Edmund Husserl and the philosophical milieu from which phenomenology emerged The Crisis is essentially the construction of a history which reflects the philosopher's own philosophical prejudices for purposes of overcoming those very prejudices. Husserl
.
rather a constant struggle against historical prejudices which takes the form of careful attention to and analysis of those very preju-
dices. In this sense the constant danger is that of falling back into
the attitude of historical naivete, which parallels Husserl's earlier l attitude, of reasumming warnings against falling into the natura
even speaks of his historical reflections as the 'construction of the novel of history for purposes of self-reflection [Selbstbesinnung]'.45
:
.
der
'
:
-I:
Vj
92
93
Insofar as Husserl insists on such analysis as an essential part of the phenomenological enterprise his last work does lend support to several post-Husserlian developments Merleau-Ponty's
,
.
precisely because it frees us from cultural naivete seems to me to be compatible with Husserl's new conception. The idea of philosophy as Ideologiekritik, or as a hermeneutic of the tradition becomes not only possible but necessary for phenomenology. At
, ,
'
the limit even Heidegger's attempt to think the unthought in the whole Western tradition is a legitimate task. But does it follow, once the possibility and necessity of such investigations is recogn,
ized, that this is all philosophy can be? This seems to be suggested
d of a sort of cultural posed by our critique. Husserl is often accuse chauvinism because he seems to speak of the task of philosophy as if it were a purely European affair. Yet if we look closely at
describle the universal lifeworld is not itself merely the articulation of the presuppositions of a historico-cultural milieu? By admitting
I
Husserl's characterization of the origin of that task in Greece, we see that it begins with the very recognition of the difference
bviously Husserl o
very historicism he attacked in 1910? It seems to me that there is no guarantee that Husserl's description has attained the universality he hoped for; but the only way to decide the matter is to criticize his view just as he criticized the modern scientific world view in the Crisis: namely by rooting out its hidden prejudices showing its limitations, its one-sided, ,
sence of the European spirit, for Husserl lies in its very attempt
ical esparadox
] Europe in the empirical historical sense. What was born with the
Chinese truth, nor any other. which is neither European truth, Neither Husserl nor any other philosopher, to my mind, can demonstrate that he has fulfilled this ideal and attained such a
truth. What Husserl does through his critique of relativism is to
/
50
ness,
impossible the relativist thesis, for prejudice is recognized only by contrast to the unprejudiced, limitation only by an insight that goes beyond the limits one-sidedness by our awareness of the
,
unavoidable, since to deny it is show that the ideal is in a sense to subscribe to it secretly. This much was accomplished in the ience', and tranProlegomena and 'Philosophy as a Rigorous Sc
ideal. But the Crisis, I have tried to show, adds a new izes that to phenomenology. For here Husserl recogn
dimension
it is not
conception or not Insofar as such criticism is used to support the relativist thesis as Husserl showed in the Prolegomena to Pure
.
history - our history - in order enough simply to turn our backs on to move toward a non-relative truth. We must work our way through it in order to escape it.
it sets out to deny But the self-contradictory character of relativism does not justify claiming absolute validity for any particular
a truth to be
known and that we cannot assert the imposibility of knowing it. Much of the pathos of Husserl s last work comes down to just this
v
.
&4
95 94
NOTES
E. Husserl, The Crisis of European Sciences and Transcendental Phenomenology, trans, by David Carr (Evanston: Northwestern University Frees.
1970), p. 17 (hereafter abbreviated as 'O.'). Cn, p. 71.
Ibid.
4 5
Cr., p. 17.
43. E. Husserl, Ideen zu einer reinen IV of Husserliana, Jhy M. Biemel (The ea. oy Philosophie, ZweitesBuch, Vo
l
.
75.
E. Husserl, DieKrisis der europaischen Wissenschaften und die transzendentale Phdnomenologie, Vol. VI of Husserliana, ed. by W. Biemel (The Hague: M. Nijhoff, 1954) p. 435 ff. (This section was not included in its entirety in the English translation, but cf. Cr., p. 102 for an except).
,
,
Phenomenology and Social d Life-Woria, in 46. A. Gurwitsch, Problems of the The Hague: M. Nijhoff, 1970), p.
,
11. E. Husserl, Philosophie alsstrenge Wissenschaft (Frankfurt: Vittorio Klostermann, 1965), p. 71.
12. E. Husserl
World' in of the Life-Woria , in 47. <Husserl's Problematic Concept phical Quarterly, October, 1970.
American Philoso
sophie, 1952), p. 40 f.
Ideen zu einer Phdnomenologie und phdnomenologische PhiloVol. Ill of Husserliana ed. by W. Biemel (The Hague: M. Nijhoff.
, , ,
19. Ibid., p. 90. 20. Ibid., pp. 109 111. 21. Cf ibid. p. 120.
,
23. Cf Cartesian Meditations p. 60. 24. Cr. p. 71. 25. Ibid, p. 17.
,
,
'
I
i
phenomenological explication does nothing but explicate the sense this world has for us all prior to any philosophizing, and obviously gets solely from our experience - a sense which
...
Husserl summarizes in remarkably succinct form his phenomenological program Let us examine briefly what Husserl is saying in this passage Three important elements can be disengaged from
. .
it.
First
ogy had not come along to do its work. The first point is that phenomenology is descriptive.
Second
,
strictly speaking, but rather the sense the world has for us, a sense which it has through our experience of it. This indicates phenomenology's reflective character, a character that makes phenomenology into a genuine transcendental philosophy by virtue of the phenomenological reduction. Phenomenology restituents
,
This change in attitude or perspective which transforms the world into the worldfor us, the world as experienced, is the phenomenological reduction. It can also be called the
our experience of it
.
98
99
considered not as an entity or occurrence within the world but as the Uimit of the world' and the locus or source of its sense: transcendental subjectivity Third, phenomenology seeks to explicate the sense the world
.
have but are forever overlooking, and to guard it against our natural tendency to theorize around and about it. By bracketing all our theoretical prejudices and ultimately by setting aside the natural attitude itself, we are able to restore and maintain this
has for us all This 'air indicates the universality of phenomenology's claims a universality which is to be achieved by means of the so-called eidetic reduction The sense of the world 'for us all' means the sense of the world for anyone at all, worldhood as such for subjectivity as such rather than the sense the world has for me personally for us Europeans, etc. - that is for any particular individual or group under particular geographical, sociological, historical circumstances 'Subjectivity as such* does not mean Bewusstsein uberhaupt in the sense of an actually existing superor transindividual subject Subjectivity is not 'transcendental' in
.
In Husserl's last work, this concept of the sense the world has
'
for us all' receives a new name derived from a new emphasis Husserl's line of inquiry: the lifeworld. If Husserl s efforts in his
'
in
\
,
fic theory, he now world as envisaged in the unity of scienti recognizes that scientific theory is but one form of consciousness,
this sense; it is always individual, unless it is expressly called intersubjectivity But intersubjectivity always presupposes indiv.
one that has come on the scene relatively late in human ior and more fundamand that it presupposes and builds upon a pr
istory, h
is not yet given in terms ental conscious stance in which the world
sense, from it
Meditations f ">u*"u
fw v
,
w xa viu.ttii.
of scientific objectivity. It is this world which is truly the world of conscious life as such, the natflicher Weltbegriff, and it must
own conscious life on which I reflect in order to do phenomenology, according to Husserl; but I vary the results in such a way that
ientific
what I say will apply to any possible conscious subject, and will
not be limited to facts about myself. The point is to move from statements of fact to statements of essence. What is essential to
Husserl proposes, in the activity that is built upon it. Thus when Crisis, a 'science of the lifeworld 2 his proposal is in keeping with hat phenomenolthe idea expressed in the Cartesian Meditations t ld has for us all, prior ogy's task is to explicate the sense the wor
to all philosophizing.
about
fundamental sense and this means that for the most part we overlook the fact that we do this and are not explicity aware of the manner in which we do it The point of the reduction is to bring
,
.
to us, the world as it is always taken for granted in our active concern with things We take the world for granted in the most
.
animates Husserl's philosophical career from beginning to end. His aim was always to describe the world just as it presents itself
what is essential worldhood as such is what characterizes the world in relation to any possible experience. This is what Husserl means by the 'sense the world has for us all' The search for this universal sense of the world in its essential correlation with the experience in which it is given is what
.
and
s last work is also marked Now it is well known that Husserl We have by an interest in history as a philosophical problem. l to this new concept of already suggested that what leads Husser ific outlook with the lifeworld is his recognition that the scient
'
historical phenomenon, which we are all so familiar is precisely an human consciousness as something that is not coextensive with
s as a tradition. and place and has been handed down to u wn and receiving such a consciousness is capable of handing do
,
a direct
he horizon of tradition that subjectivity stands not only within t its own history and the world but also within the horizon of istic of conscious life with embodies its own history, is a character ied in his last years. which Husserl was increasingly preoccup ical character of Is it possible that the recognition of the histor
100
101
the sense this world has for us all'? Can a philosophy which is
a multiplicity of such acts is unified. The act as present stands out against a background of past retentions and against a projected future of pretentions. This is not a description of consciousness
in the world, in the empirical sense, but a description of how consciousness is for the world, how it is intentionally related to
the world. Indeed, this is how it must be if there is to be a world for it at all. The idea of consciousness as a flow which bears within
philosophy? This is the problem raised but not resolved by HusserPs last work
and it is the problem I would like to explore here HusserPs late preoccupation with historicity came at a time
,
. .
when the heightened historical consciousness of the nineteenth century was undergoing a revival in Germany The seventh volume of Dilthey's collected works devoted to philosophical problems of history had appeared in 1927, and Husserl's attitude toward Dilthey was always one of respect even though he had attacked
,
, ,
itself its own past even as it projects its future before it already has something of the historical in it, as Husserl indicates in the
Cartesian Meditations when he says that the ego 'constitutes
him on precisely this point in 'Philosophy as Rigorous Science Heidegger's Being and Time (1927) also had an important section on historicity which itself claimed to be derived from Dilthey's
'
.
notion of historicity is its relation to intersubjectivity. This characteristic, while it is also implicit in Husserl s earliest investigations,
work. And there is the fact that Germans in the 1930s no doubt
had a sense of 'living through history' that they could not ignore
mediated by its relation to other subjects. The world as experienced is essentially transcendent. This is not to say that it is out of
all relation to consciousness; on the contrary, this is precisely its
sense as experienced. It is transcendent in the sense that if is not an element or real part of the experience I have of it. But its full
transcendence or 'objectivity' must be explicated as its
'
from Heidegger through the post-war work of Gadamer and others, can be found precisely in the peculiarly Husserlian version of transcendental philosophy dating from the first explicit formulations of the phenomenological program And it is not surprising that these seeds should have borne fruit in Husserl's own thinking
,
thereness
for everyone', which means that its very sense as transcendent is dependent upon at least the possibility of others. The onley way
to make sense of the transcendental subject - i.e., the subject as
before he died.
r
must be considered temporal without thereby losing its transcendental character. Consciousness seen from the transcendental
,
him as already intentionally intertwined with others in relation to a common or public world. Even though the multiplicity of subjects must be explicated phenomenologically by reference to my experience - this is what Husserl tries to do in the Fifth Meditation - intersubjectivity, and not merely individual subjectivity, is the key to the sense this world has for each of us
considered as an individual.
I1
it
It is these notions that lead Husserl to the concepts of historicity that so interest him in the Cm/5. Through its intentional intertwin-
ning with the experience of others, consciousness in its temporality involves not only its own past but also that of the community. Or
rather, the community s past becomes its own past,
'
the
102
103
background against which present experience stands out. To exist in a community is to appropriate and take for granted its experience as a horizon of retention
.
But the concept of historicity immediately takes on broader implications which lead Husserl to the historical investigations of the Crisis. To exist in a particular community, with its historical
tradition
,
in the spelF5 of such a tradition the original distinction between lifeworld and scientifically interpreted world is blurred and, it appears, is finally obliterated. We can no longer separate
ed by our scientific concepts.
sense of a broadened awareness of certain facts about the world. It is also to inherit certain ways of interpreting the world as a
Although this latter side of the paradox is only hinted at in the Crisis, we find it pursued in some depth in the Introduction to
whole. The prime example of this the one which occupies Husserl in the Crisis is our own participation in the tradition of modern science. So great has been the success, so all-pervasive the influence of modern physical science that all of us, whether we are scientists or not tend to see the world through its eyes This
,
iting
of the Crisis.6 In any case it explores a difficulty raised by Husserl's thought that needs to be explored; so we should not be
etc. that allow science to do its work In doing so we overlook the work of idealizing interpretation that the originators
,
.
causality
explanations about the way things behave - for most of us our actual knowledge is sketchy at best - but that we view the world around us in terms of the concepts of space time, thing, event,
,
ious life it is not enough to stand the role of judgment in consc abstract from the content, as the logician does, and consider
events and relations of the surrounding world in order to be able to deal with them in mathematical terms Their accomplishment
.
-
purely formal relations between judgmental forms. Rather we thing can be present to us must explore the problem of how any beforehand such that we can judge about it. In order to under-
but also in
f
i
i
immerdiate experience and the scientifically interpreted world which is constructed upon the lifeworld and constitutes an idealized abstraction from it a realsm of postulated entites and relationships that are not themselves even available to direct ex-
In the text of the Crisis this gives rise to a peculiar paradox. On the one hand we find Husserl insisting that we distinguish between the lifeworld - the world as it actually presents itself to us in
understand how objects - and stand judgment ultimately, we must at the most fundamental level individual objects - can be given, hat is the nature of our direct and this is the problem of EU. W encounter with things prior to all predication, an encounter which world of immediate encounter, predication presupposes? It is the that must be understood first which EU also calls the lifeworld,
and foremost.
rience, as it is related to out that 'in the flow of our world-expe ill not always find so the always already pre-given world, [we] w
It turns
1=
.
its roots in the lifeworld the world in which we actually live. On the other hand he says that the results of the scientific activity of idealization flow back into the lifeworld 4 and thus determine its character for us that is, they determine the very way the world
,
of the objects judgment as an example and ask after the givenness the world in which we to which it refers. And why not? Because
'
ly original self-evidences of easily those sought-after, ultimate 7 It will not suffice simply to take any experiential experience
from which live and in which we act in a cognitive-judging way, substrates of possible judgeverything comes which affects us as
104
105
ition'.9
tal activity either my own or that of 'others whose experimental acquisitions [I] take over though communication, learning, trad,
,
ments, is always already pre given to us permeated [durchsetzt] with the deposit [Niederschlag] of logical accomplishments'.8 Thus it is given as already 'worked over' so to speak, by judgmen-
that what makes it unacceptable is that it is based on reflection J4 d What is reflection but the act of turning from our straightforwar
concern with the world to our own experience and to the manner
Like the Crisis and in part by actually quoting from it EU cites the concepts of modern natural science as the prime example of how the 'original life-world' gets 'covered over' with the deposit or sediment of the mental activity of the past Even more than the Crisis, EU insist that for us as heirs to the scientific tradition the world actually presents itself is actually pregiven as a scientifically determined or at least determinable world Thus it is not merely a matter of the way we have learned to tninK about the world not Vi ?1W vyaj wc uitve learned to think about the world not merely a matter of a certain stock of concepts we apply to a world
,
.
ical
based on reflection would condemn us to a hopeless relat Once it is admitted that our historical position determines the very lso to admit that any way the world is given, we would have a
reflection-based description could not extend beyond what is
available to us as men of our time
'
'
.
ivism.
objectivity, and of our experience that non: flection would be limited to a particular historical,o iv/Vtrh harmpn phenome flection would be limitea to a parutuuu m ww K 1 1 -i--~ ~C
'
Clearly
the very start [von vornhereinY 10 the world of our experience has already been interpreted for us in virtue of our membership in the vw lsji us m virtue oi our memoersnip in iuc Cllltlirp that A****smA~ r - - . . ?t_ culture that descends from Galileo and his contemporaries We might say that their legacy to us is not merely a way thinking about the world but the very world about which we think But what has become of the task of tracing judgmental activity back to its roots in the lifeworld? EU is quick to grasp the
.
Rather, 'from
ho happen we would be describing only the world of those of us w he stamp to exist at this particular time in a culture which bears t of the scientific tradition. Clearly *h would fall short of the this wnW 11 -. all' where the 'all refers genuine sense the world has for us
'
that transcends historical precisely to the sort of universality differences. Of course, the claim that philosophy is incapable of other than the transcending its own historical situation is none historicism' that Husserl had attacked, as a variant of psychologPhilosophy as Riism, in the Prolegomena to Pure Logic and enology once historicity gorous Science'. Is this the fate of phenom
' '
original lifeworld is not one which simply accepts [hinnimmt] the world of our experience, just as it is given to us 12 The original
,
is taken seriously?
erected
has been covered over hidden from us in a certain sense left behind and has to be rediscovered. One curious result,
,
,
,
H -
at world is given; for to do so would be to inquire into the experience of 'subjects who are already precisely subjects of our world - a world which is already covered over [uberlagert] with idealizatinn and i ~ * . . idealizations s apperceived in terms of this covering . EU dismisses such a procedure as 'psychological', but it is clear
-
according to the terminology of EU is that the lifeworld is no longer the world in which we actually live But more serious is the matter of how the lifeworld is to be rediscovered It no longer suffices simply to turn from our world to the ex th periences in which
,
.
.
ust do, according this, how is it to be accomplished? What we m hich is already to the text is 'pursue the historical development, w in AH the deposited in [the pre-given world], back to its orig at hand m our deposits of sense' (Sinnesniederschlage) that are
'
.
'
'
dismantled
'
sources from which [t an inquiry back... into the subjective n accomplishing deposits of sense] have arisen, and thus into a
hese
106
107
psychologically, sees himself confronting the ready-made world. Rather it is that subjectivity through whose accomplish,
our world -
But the possibility of such a move becomers problematic if we ask ourselves just how the Nachvollzug of the accomplishments of our predecessors is to be achived, given the presuppositions of EU.
What the text apparently has in mind is an investigation of the historical sources of the tradition of which we are the heirs. In the case of the modern scientific tradition what is meant is presumably the examination of Galileo and his contemporaries as it is
,
of all, an understanding of his goal - the achievement in respect to physical nature of the kind of clarity and intersubjective agreement found in mathematics. Then it traced the fulfillment of this
goal in the application of ideal geometrical concepts to the experienced world - or more precisely, the application of the experienced world to those concepts, through the procedure of
idealization
live. Now we are apparently being told that the subjectivity to which we must turn if we are to understand anything else is a
,
Galileo 'proposes', as Husserl puts it, to deal with the real world theoretically only to the extent that its experience.
will not do if we consider reflection as the subject's examination of his own conscious life Presumably the result of this interro,
.
properties and relationships. His greatness lies not only in this proposal, but also in the degree to which he was able to carry it out by finding more and more aspects of the real which could be
'
But the difficulty inherent in this proposal is obvious: how do we, in our time make the kind of contact with originators of our tradition that would enable us to understand how they experienced the world? We have their written works and other documentation about them. Will this suffice as a means of access to the world in which they lived? According to EU there is more that we can do. We need to
, ,
we who live in an age so thoroughly dominated by this thoug Clearly the analysis of Galileo in the Crisis, and the understanding we are supposed to achieve through it, can only succeed if we
,
ht?
In other words, we must place s accompUshment in ourselves in a world which preceded Galileo
'
ders-
but it is
Yet this is the very thing that EU says we cannot do. As the heirs have
trad.
We could not understand [their accomplishments] if we could not reproduce [nachwollziehen] these accomplishments in
ourselves
,
experience
if we could not re-experience [nacherleben] this aristhat is, [if we] could not complete in ourselves this
-
investigation prescribed. EU seems to leave us at an impasse. exhorts us to recapture the original lifeworld which has been relive
'
return [Ruckgang] from the covered-over lifeworld with its garb of ideas, to the original word experience and lifeworld 18
.
108
109
original lifeworld that we seek. Otherwise living as we do in the already mathematized world of science it seems we can only speculate as to the nature of an experience and a world in which this mathematization had not yet occurred The only helpful hint offered by EU is the term 'dismantling
,
, MO TT\*
111
lilt
turns out to be impossible on our analysis of EU, namely an account of Galileo s accomplishment by reference to the world of immediate experience From there he goes on to an exploration of the lifeworld for its own sake, separated, from its relevance to the problem of science. If we are convinced by Husserl s analysis,
'
.
'
lutaii-
and feel that he has gone some of the way toward discovering or
-
negative construction
,
been superadded to the world by the function of tradition and f : - what w 1 ' thereby arrive at as present before this process began. But we are given no further clue as to the nature of this Without an idea of what procedure. was there before how are we to know what has been superadded? Again a circle begins to appear What is more such a dismantling procedure seems to suggest a kind of npaat;,,* .
,
access to 14. Presumably we can reproduce in ourselves the accomplishments of our predecessors, which means that we have
some awareness of the world in which they lived and on which
'
duction ,n us of the original life-world in its relation to the ideahzing accomplishment. This is a far cry from the phenomenological insistance on grasping in original intuition the thing
we no longer live in the original lifeworld since the world no longer presents itself to us in this way we cannot simply turn, in
,
,
Since
fundamentally the same. The lifeworld is the world in whic we truly live according to the Cm/5, the world as we actually experience it if we would only recognize it, which is what Husserl is trying to get us to do. When Husserl tells us that the things we encounter are not themselves possessed of exact geometrical properties but fall into vague and approximate types, that they are hat they encountered in space oriented around the lived body, t
j
have both primary and secondary quahties, and so on, we recogience nise all this as true because we can reflect on our own exper
and * that it is so Rather than directing us to someone
.
Yet now, for reasons we have seen reflection will no longer do If the procedure of 'dismantling' and the resultant
.
the manner of reflection, to the way in which it is given. Reflection is the form of intuition in which we make the kind of contact with
else
'
experience, the Crisis seems, like Husserl s earlier tration phenomenological investigations, to rest on a superior pene
into the nature of our own
.
meaning
Is there any escape from this predicament? One possibility we should examine is that EU has simply gone too far with the notion of historicity found in the Cm/5 beyond Husserl's intentions exaggerated its importance This might be Landgrebe's fault.
,
.
however it may be described in relation to the classical conception of phenomenology, EU seems to leave us stranded in the very position it exhorts us to escape: engagement in a world determined by our historical situation We are condemned to history and
.
l of our world and reproducing his train of thought, and if the goa genuine sense this undertaking is a grasp of the lifeworld as the world has for us all' then why do we need recourse to history at all? If we have direct access to the life-world, then it has not been cut off from us by history, and we do not need to go through tea history in order to rediscover it We might, of course, be mteres
'
,
.
But this raises a further question. If we can appreciate and understand Galileo's accomplishment by reflecting on the We-
in history of its own sake from the point of view of consciousness ts took wondering how Galileo's and others, accomplishmen Place. But the matter would have no urgency from the transcendental point of view
,
110
111
The real work of phenomenology would remain what it was always thought to be: the isolation and description as such* for 'consciousness as such' which is presupposed 'world of this by all the particular expressions whcih make their appeara history nce in human Now while such an approach would indeed save us fro predicament we described it would at the sam m the compelli e time deny the
.
many ways of building upon the sense of the world that b to consciousness as such irrespective of its historical situation elongs
,
itself The various ptual innovations and their ensuing traditio make nalization which up the flow of the history of consciousness would be so
.
historical period is different in a fundamental way from others requires some access to those others as they really are. Another troubling aspect of the theory suggested by EU is that
it concentrates so heavily on the modern scientific era as the only
example of historical sedimentation It suggests a kind of 'age of
.
of Galileo and his contemporaries as free of any historical trad 1 ition. Indeed we useually think of such pivotal historical figures
not as initiating a view of the world ex nihilo in a cultural vacuum, Us it were but as introducing a new way of looking at things and
,
which remains fundamentally unaffected b ommon world in order to save the project of a transcendental philosophy willing, y them. Are we up an insight that seems not only compelling and undeniable in to give itself
,
,
and at the highest level even its own Weltanschauung own view of the world as a whole But these would remain its precisely so many 'views' interpretations of a c
,
norms
role in the constitution of hie role in the constitution of his deny each historical
,
in the first place: that of the historicity of subjethe predicament get us into ctivity from the phenomenological point of view Of course in histo which is to say that he enters thethe subject is always scene at some particular time and in some particular and vanishes 'being in history' would have no transcendental function or signisociety. But his ficance that is, his position in ro\n*xZTT! ficance + Z 10 nistory would 0r no iciauon play
.
the Aristotelian
ry
j val way. In the Cm/5, Husserl stresses not only the break but also the continuity involved in Galileo's accomplishment: his depen-
Z I .hlSt0ry WOuld play n0 world. To be sure as no one can epoch would have its own concepts its own
*
~"
dence on the ancient idea of mathematics and the overall Renaissance conception of reviving and fulfilling the Greek ideal of
the origin of the Greek idea of knowledge generally, as Husserl points out in the Vienna Lecture And yet Husserl does not suggest by analogy to EU that the whole Western tradition from the Greeks on represents a kind of covering or hiding of the woria
.
which we have inherited and from which we cannot, by our own power, escape This is the view of extreme historicism put forwaxa
.
by the later Heidegger and, in somewhat different from, oy Derrida Metaphysics philosophy itself is a kind of enclosure m
.
But the fact is, as Husserl showed in his early attack on historicism
.
4r
.
be accepted
,
the one hand we should be suspicous of the extreme histo ricism suggested by EU and not merely because it int with the project of transcendental philosophy erferes were the c If this interference
.
e thus toand anyitphilosophical attempt move witnm held, escape would be but another to Penetr behind it and
which we ar
onsequence of a
,
sound view
view claims y history as this Historicism assumes a trans-historical theory does not allow Even the minimal claim whichour own perspective that its own
.
.
that if we were really as bound b we would have no grounds fo r aserting the view itself
innocence' behind or prior to the whole Western tradition in th sense it would indeed fall prey to such extreme historicism bu if we follow the Crisis rather than EU, the We-wwW something distant from us, or belonging to a subject than our own, but rather what is
,
represents
furnishing
declaring
112
113
philosophy. If we say we have direct, unmediated reflective access to the lifeworld then we are saying not only that historical
,
reflection has no importance for phenomenology but also that history has no power to affect the way we experience things In doing this we would be giving up one valuable aspect of the
.
succeeded? What guarantee is there of having arrived at the sense the world has for us all' rather than merely another expression of our historical situation? Historicity offers us the strongest reason,
though not the only one, for considering the eidetic claims of phenomenology as tentative - a position Husserl himself admitted
at the end of this life.
in the lifeworld - not that we have left it behind and are cut off 1 from it by history - and on the other hand that we as philoso,
t
i
phers must go through history in order to get at the lifeworld. Reflection is not ruled out as the key to phenomenological method, rather it becomer itself a historical undertaking The prec.
onceptions deriving from our historical situation - in our case those inherited from the scientific tradition - stand between us and
phenomenological claims does not render totally illusory the ideal of transcendental philosophy, as long as we consider it an ideal to be pursued rather than something already in our possession. History is not a prison from which there is no escape. Or at least we have no ultimately compelling reasons for thinking that it is. We are justified in continuing to seek to escape in the sense of seeking to arrive at insights that are not historically relative. But we must resign ourselves to the unsettling recognition that we can
never be sure we have succeeded.
the direct access to the essence of our own experience that reflection was thought to provide What is ruled out is reflection that
.
is historically naive that does not take into account the role of
,
history in our thought and experience The idea of a reflection that is historically aware is that of a procedure that can penetrate beneath the layers of historical sedimentation once it recognizes
.
what they are Its aim is still to describe 'the sense this world has for us air in the totally unrestricted universal sense of the 'all'.
.
But it takes into account the blocks that history places between
us and that universal sense though it is the closest thing to us.
,
found in practice - though is not dwelt upon in such a tortured way - in the work of Merleau-Ponty Like the early Husserl he often seems to be saying that we must simply turn our backs on historically derived conceptualization and go directly to the world as we live it. Yet his phenomenological descriptions always emerge from a dialectical critique of what he calls 'intellectualism, and
.
'
The introduction of history into phenomenology does not force us to reject its claim to status as transcendental philosophy or to reject the idea of transcendental philosophy altogether but it does force us to reassess that claim History represents an obstacle to
,
.
114
NOTES
1. 2.
Cartesian Meditations trans, by Dorian Cairns The Hague, Martinus Nijhoff 1960, p. 151.
,
,
3.
4 5
.
The Crisis ofEuropean Sciences and Transcendental Phenomenology trans. by David Carr Evanston, Northwestern University Press 1970, p. 123.
,
6.
7 8
1964
Ibid., p. 39.
.
9 Ibid.
.
10. Ibid
18. Ibid
II.5. Intentionality:
Discussion among analytic philosophers of the concept of intentionality at least under that name, dates primarily from R.M.
,
Chisholm's paper
'Sentences
,
topic to date have grown to the point where an anthology was thought appropriate: one has recently appeared under the title Intentionality Mind and Language, edited by A. Marras.2 Chisholm derived his presentation of the concept from Brentano who
,
this medieval term Most of the analytic discussions of intentionality have taken their point of departure from ChisholnTs reformu.
lation of Brentano's thesis and little attention has been paid to the fact that intentionality as Husserl borrowed it from Brentano
,
and also reformulated it is one of the key concepts, if not the key
,
concept
serl
.
Even Chisholm himself who knows the phenomenoiogical literature well warns readers of his article on intentionality in The
'
theses'
l
theses of phenomenology and existentia ism' 3 This almost suggests that the two traditions share only the word and not even the concept; or that, if the concept is the same,
-
Now there is no doubt in my mind that the concept is the same, but it is partly true that it is treated in different ways. Chisholm, following the iinguistic turn transforms the discussion of what
'
,
-
.. .
rj- 1
ii
119
118
is not the way phenomenologists tend to proceed, and such a transformation was in any case foreign to Husserl. After the logical properties of certain sentences about the psychic have been delineated, the question arises as to whether such sentences are
which 'we need when we talk of the intentional use of language logical states and events and which 'we can about certain psycho t non-psychological states and events avoid when we talk abou hic phenomena (or sentences The claim is that all and only psyc are intentional. about psychic phenomena) which we can identify the Chisholm introduces three criteria by these out now, with some intentional use of language. I shall set a basis for further discussion. examples and comments, as
'
'
'
'
the other hand, this question is taken as answered - intentionality is indispensable in dealing with the mental - and the investigation goes on from there, applying the concept in its attempt to describe
everything that falls under it.
is intentional if it uses a (1) A simple declarative sentence a name or description in such a way substantival expression contradictory implies either that that neither the sentence nor its
-
In this paper I would like to suggest that despite these broad differences there are more parallels than have been noticed between the Chisholm statement with its ensuing discussion, and the phenomenological treatment of intentionality, especially in Husserl's original introduction and elaboration of it in his Logical
,
inking of the Dnieper Thus 'when we say that a man is th there is or that there isn t such a dam; we do not imply either that he is thinking of it Chisholm has similarly when we deny that thinking of, imagining, in mind sentences involving such verbs as for, etc. Translating this back into
' '
.
Dam,
envisaging, wishing or hoping oiot,that the existence or occurrence or occurrer i-i j ?? .a*.
that have been seen by Chisholm and his successors were also seen
* "
by Husserl,; and he ha7 ovided soluti n to them, as I shall argue, that is surorisinslv like that of certain recent analytic argue, that is surprisingly like that of certain recent analytic
a
while it is ne of such a 'psychic phenomenon , nor the non existence n the existence nor the
-
about or
proposals. I shall try to show, further, that Husserl's solution to certain problems of intentionality forms the basis of his phenomenological method.
Ages called the intentional (or perhaps mental) inexistence of an object, and what we thou.h not without some ambiguity of
.
oremano, 'is characterized by what the Scholastics of tne Middle or the mmu.v Brentano,4 is cnaractenzed by what the
,
'Every
psychic phenomenon
'
,
says
l verb is true or that "T* the o1 lf neither following the Principa either thaUhe phrase
contradictory imply
expression, call the relation to a content the direction toward an object (which is not to be understood as a reality) or immanent
,
something is represented
or rejected, . -jeeceu
in judgment something is acknowledged [etc.]... This intentional in love somettung is loved letc.j... This imenu m love something
, ,
f? is Thl'd, Chisholm"
reference'
,
uce
or what is often ca
s,8
lled
referentia
*A name
/
-
v
.
120
121
to
'
inexistence*
immanent objectivity'. A second alternative would be the view of Meinong, who claims that while such items as winged
horses do not exist in reality, they are also not merely mental
'
independent
status, and he uses the term ausserseiend ( beyond being'), for this status.12 In the first instance the mind is related to something, but
l, but extramenta
an entity.
intentional
Thus I may see that Jones is here and though Jones is the chairman of the philosophy department, I cannot be said
.
All this concerns the status of the intentional object, and these alternatives are clearly designed to cover such things as winged
to see that the chairman of the philosophy departments is here, unless I know that he is the chairman of the philosophy department.
tentionality exhibits similarities to these three criteria, provided they are translated back into non-linguistic terms Husserl repeatedly states that the existence of an intentional reference to an object does not imply the existence of that object just as the reference to a state of affairs does not imply that that state
.
it is customary to disordinary, existing objects. In any case, he intentional tinguish the question of the ontological status of t mark of the psychological and to deal object from that of the 13 Actually, this is not so easily done, for if with them separately. the first of the above two alternatives is chosen, one is saying l by saying that it somesomething about the nature of the menta s of how contains an object or image within it. Still, for purpose
' '
,
his question aside for the comparison with Husserl, we shall put t
moment, returning to it later.
must exist
.
.
when he distinguishes between ' The object as it is intended, and the object (period) which is intended' 'The idea, e.g. of the German Emperor' he says, 'presents its object as an Emperor, and as the Emperor of Germany. The man himself is the son of Emperor Frederick III the grandson of Queen Victoria and has many other properties neither named nor presented'.11 One question about intentionality is notoriously left undecided by Brentano's thesis and also by Chisholm's reformulation of it. If we take Chisholm's first criterion which affirms that the existence of a given mental state implies neither the existence nor the non-existence of the thing to which it refers we can ask: does the existence of that mental state nevertheless imply that there is some other type of object? This would be affirmed by anyone who stated, for example that when I think of a winged horse there
,
Brentano and Chisholm, in of intentionality, was interested, like Did he make the claim discerning 'the mark of the psychological haracterized by inthat all and only psychic phenomena are ac
'
.
the answer is no. Not all psychic tentionality? As for the le definition of psychology phenomena 'in the sense of a possib 14 Intentionality is characteristic of only are intentional, he says. [Erlebnisse]',15 not all a sharply defined class of experiences not to be confused with experiences. He regards sensations of feelings as being nonsense-perceptions - and certain types
'
all
'
'
'
for
'
? A version of this Are 'only' psychic phenomena intentional following upon Chisholm s question has been part of the debate
Jii-.-kiL
-.
is
122
123
formulation
often result in sentences that seem to satisfy the criterion (1). For example, the sentence 'Some lizards look like dragons' does not
commit us to the existence or non existence of dragons (nor does
intentionalist
thesis is to be decided, and Husserl clearly does not deal with it.
its contradictory) yet it is clearly not about the psychological 17 It has been pointed out that sentences like 'it is probable that p' and 'this is consistent with p' satisfy criterion (2) since both they and their contradictoires are indifferent to the truth-value of p}% It has also been noted that sentences bearing the modal prefixes it is necessary that and 'it is possible that often satisfy
,
.
But perhaps the most important reason why Husserl does not look at the question this way is that this purpose is not to
circumscribe the domain of psychology and distinguish it from that of other disciplines. This was Brentano s purpose, and Chisholm has taken up the problem from this point of view. What,
'
'
'
'
...
...
criterion (3) For example, if the governor of Alaska is the governor of the largest state in the Union the statement 'It is necessary that the governor of Alaska is identical with the governor of Alaska' does not imply that 'It is necessary that the governor of Alaska is identical with the governor of the largest state in the Union' In other words here the substitution of an
.
then, is Husserl's purpose? In the Logical Investigations, it is to provide, as he says, for ein erkenntniskritisches Verstdndnis der reinen Logik, an understanding of pure logic from the perspective of a critique of knowledge;20 or, as he also puts it, his task is 'to
bring the Ideas of logic, the logical concepts and laws, to epistemological clarity and definiteness 21 In the first volume of the
'
.
expression with an equivalent extension results in a sentence whose truth-value may be different from the original sentence.19 Here the difference between the linguistic and non-linguistic
approaches is crucial Since he did not make the shift from the
.
something' in the way that certain experiences are. Still, the problem cannot be disposed of so simply. If asked whether the egories' which to quote Chisholm we can avoid when we talk about non-psychological states and events' he probably would
'
,
,
ical and non-psychological sentences does not imply that there is anything outside the mind that is 'directed upon an object' or 'of
have occurred to Husserl to ask whether some sentences about non-psychological matters share certain logical features with those about the psychic Perhaps, even if it had occurred to him he would have been neither troubled nor surprised He was, after all, interested in the nature of certain experiences not in the features of sentences The presence of shared logical features in psycholog.
when he begins the Investigations proper, his point is to ascertain d with. To this end, what logic is (or ought to be) concerne from mental states and strangely enough, he does not turn away ith the idea of seeing how processes, but turns back to them, w
hey can logical concepts and laws are related to them and how t ill to refute be disengaged from them. In a sense his purpose is st eans; instead of advancpsychologism, but the chooses different m
hologism
like, we will see that they must be separated from their logical
'
or 'cat-
content, and that the latter cannot be dealt with in terms of the how logical former. But his purpose is also a positive one: to see esses in the context of a concepts and laws relate to mental proc
theory of knowledge and a critique of This when Husserl singles out intentional experiences
'
,
ledge. know
as
'
have answered in the affirmative. The question is really whether experiences constitute a domain that can ultimately be reduced to physical states and events and dealt with philosophically in their
he does so because such sharply defined class of experiences of relating logic to the experiences are relevant to his purpose is saying, enter into mental mental. Logical concepts and laws, he ts pf psychic life primarily in the knowing situation. It is the aspec
5S
124
125
sense of these words'22 that interest him, and these are all in-
tentional. Now perhaps HusserPs interest in the intentional as distinct from Brentano's, is actually shared by Chisholm through the fact that the German word psychisch gets translated into
,
phrase but precisely requires its truth. Incidentally, this was one of the main criticisms levelled by Gilbert Ryle against Husserl s concept of intentionality in his report on Phenomenology to the
'
him, most often speak of intentionality as the mark of the mental rather than the psychic or psychological. When they refer to the mental, most English speakers usually mean precisely cognitive and related phenomena and not necessarily everything that belongs to the domain of psychology Though this distinction is not made as clearly as it is in Husserl it appears that analytic philosophers, too, are interested in intentionality only as pertaining to philosophy of mind or epistemology, not as the distinguishing mark of all phenomena considered by psychology For Husserl,
,
serious objections that can be raised against this criterion. Chisholm states it in such a way that it applies to simple declarative
sentences whose action verbs take a substantive expression as their object but the examples he gives are of complex sentences, i.e. sentences whose verbs take a subordinate clause. Doubtless Chisholm states his third criterion in this way because he believes, as he says in a footnote 24 that it can be made to do the work of the first two; thus he wants to cover both cases. But one may ask
, ,
his interest, a term which has very much fallen out of vogue among
analytic philosophers.
As we have seen it did not trouble Husserl to assert that not
,
that I have seen the evening star, even though I didn't know it?
.
25
run counter to his view if it were found that intentionality was not a feature of all those aspects of mental life deemed relevant to a theory or critique of knowledge; or to put it in his terms, that
,
'
seen the
Even complex
Ik---
-:
criticisms that have been levelled against the theory of intentionality. It appears that precisely those mental activities that one would think the most relevant of all to a theory of knowledge do not meet the most important criteria of intentionality This claim has been made about the so-called cognitive verbs such as
.
and I see that Jones is here, could it be the case that I don see that the chairman of the philosophy department is here? The
ment,
t
'
'
least some sentences employing so-called cognitive verbs seem not to be intentional by Chisholm's third criterion; and if they are not
'
'think
intentional by the first and second either, we must conclude that they are not intentional at all, at least not in Chisholm s sense.
'
of, 'suppose' conceive', i.e. verbs which make no claim to knowledge it does not seem to work for verbs which do make such a claims in one form or another If I see or perceive x x must really be there to see. If I remember
.
any sense in which the verbs in question (or the corresponding pjenomena') are intentional? If not, then Husserl s claim, that
'
'
x,
be the case. Thus Chisholm's first two criteria are violated A sentence employing 'see' perceive' or 'remember' implies the existence of the objects of these verbs A sentence employing knows' is not indifferent to the truth value of the subordinate
' ,
.
such as perception
'
126
127
presumably be on the lookout for verbs that do not d activities esignate such Following Ryle, we may want to assert that many terms applied to the mental d esignate not activities but achievements, dispositions etc.
,
.
esignate such activities are likewise i Chisholm's first t ntentional. And for this wo criteria will suffice. However we must
use Brentano's words, these are not strictly speaking, 'psychic phenomena'. We can still say that all mental acti tentional and th vities are inat all sentences employing verbs that genuinely d
.
nality was not designed to deal with them in the first place
,
completion of a task. To know something is, according to Ryle mor e like winning than running a race In order to win run, but 'winning' i one must s not itself a term that designates merely a particular activity; its concept may involve running it to the rules but it relates the finishing line, etc. The non-intentionalit
,
.
designate certain me rbs which ntal activities' 28 Then he invokes Ryle's concept of Achievement verbs' to tell us what they do designate 29 Rather than an activity he says, they refer to the successful
,
. .
not intentional because intentionality is meant as a characterization of verbs designating mental activities Despite appearances to the contrary he says, cognitive verbs are not ve
.
generally and remembering, that he considers them mental activities, and that he considers them intentional Furthermore, he is
.
It is interesting to note further that if we allow for the analysis of mental terms into disposition ot achievement terms some favorite examples of intentionality seem to be affected. Brentano said: 'in representation something is represented in judgment something is acknowledged or rejected in love something is loved, in hate something is hated in desire something desired'. We look in vain I think, for a mental activity directly corresponding to loving hating and desiring, and find it easy to interpret these phenomena as dispositions to say, feel, think or do certain things
,
s at all are to designate mental activities - a question that could be debated but is not even raised by Cornman - surely these do
,
that while Ryle's concept of achievement verbs may works wellsay to in the case of kno wledge how can it be applied to th verbs mentioned namely 'see' perceive', 'remember'? If any e other cognitive verb
,
,
to Husserl
phenomenological method is derived from that concept. Cornman's view may seem highly objectionable in its own right, and it may seem even more objectionable to attribute such a view
.
are not intentional, but that he is provided an answer to it which in some ways like Cornman's. More than this it seems to me that Husserl's version of Cornman's solution is at the very heart of
-
I would like to argue that Husserl not only anticipated the objection that cognitive verbs - or the corresponding phenomena
,
into inventing something that isn't there. And curiously enough, I think that no verb is more susceptible to a disposition analysis than 'believing9 the very term which Chisholm takes as a paradigm of intentionality
,
.
non-action analysis of some mental verbs does not entail that all
mental verbs can be so analyzed and it can be argued, as Cornman
,
that just as winning the race implies running it, so knowing implies the existence of some genuine mental activity. He suggests
does
,
ing
something other than activities. This is amply shown by the fact that Husserl's key term is Erlebnis (experience), which for him is
clearly an episodic term The terms 'experience and 'content*, he
'
.
says
'
,
Vor-
perceiving
kommnisse) (Wundt rightly calls them 'events' [Eriegnisse])... In this sense percepts, imaginative and pictorial presentations, acts
128
129
of conceptual thinking, surmises and doubts joys and griefs, hopes and fears, wishes and acts of the will etc are, just as they flourish in our consciousness experiences' or 'contents of consciousness* \31 He then goes on to distinguish the phenomenological from the psychological concept of experience but the phenomenological refers no less to mental occurrences or events As for
,
.
'
Husserl's interest in a theory of knowledge it would not be inconsistent to accept an achievement analysis of knowing itself and still insist that the class of intentional experiences is relevant to a philosophical understanding of knowledge
,
.
ing' which are termed cognitive: 'seeing' perceiving remembering', one of which Husserl mentions in the catalogue of experiences just quoted. These seem to refer directly to mental
'
'
'
before me just as I experience it. Perhaps this is not a seeing. Is it because seeing implies a causal relation between the Tower and my experience of it? I do not intend to argue this question, for it is not important for my point. It suffices to state that having the convincing visual experience, and the tower's really being there, are necessary conditions. What is perhaps curious about this two-part analysis is that, from the experiencer's point of view, the first part implies the second. If my visual experience is really convincing, then I am convinced that the tower is really here before me. For me, all my convincing visual experiences are seeings, at least while I m having them. The case of illusion, however, shows that not all are seeings.
'
nevertheless
The judgment on whether a given convincing visual experience is genuinely a seeing is rendered on the basis of another experience independent of the first, whether it is a later one of my own, that of an external observer or ultimately that of an d\\-seeing God. This analysis permits us to apply the Ryle-Cornman distinction
between achievement and activity to perception. Having a con-
here before me. I say 'convincing' in order to rule out cases like the well-known mirage of water on the road ahead: here I could
be said to have a experience of water on the road ahead but it
,
;5
.
11,
no reasons
vincing visual experience can be called a mental activity with a certain goal, and the independent judgment, mentioned above, decides whether or not the goal has been reached. The analogy to running and winning a race is a good one: there, too, the decision as to whether a given case of running is a case of winning is left up to an external authority. When I have a convincing visual experience, I think I have achieved my goal. But the decision cannot be left up to the perceiver alone, any more than the runner
can decide whether he has won the race; or, if he does decide, he does so in a different act, and according to standards agreed upon
occur to me,
.
from past experience or whatever for questioning what I 'see' However, it is also possible, of course, in the case
,
to have a
be said to be seeing the Eiffel Tower. Here we might be inclined to say, tentatively, that the visual experience is like that involved in the seeing of the Eiffel Tower in every detail except that the
,
Husserl's approach to seeing could be described in this way: he is concerned with describing convincing visual experiences as such without rendering the independent or external judgment as to whether or not they are cases of seeing. Clearly, the description
of such an experience would have to include the fact that it considers itself, so to speak, a case of seeing. But Husserl is
interested neither in concurring in nor in denying that judgment as an external observer. Rather, he withholds judgment. This was
I have a convincing, but hallucinatory, visual experience of the Eiffel Tower when the tower, quite by chance, happens also to be
his approach, I would argue, in the Logical Investigations, though he was not explicity aware of its peculiarity and its value. He
130
131
became explicitly aware of both in the years following the publication of Logical Investigations and the approach developed into a full-fledged method of philosophy in the Ideas of 1913 under the title of phenomenological epoche or phenomenological re,
where it is applied to all mental activities represented by the so-called cognitive verbs It is to be noted especially that in the analysis I have given, in a case of seeing the visual experience is not something other than
,
.
duction
like object.
However, in one case there really is a dancing bear, in the other there is no such bear. Since these two details are not alike, we should not count the bear himself as one of the descriptive
the seeing. This would seem to differ from the sort of analysis suggested by Cornman's solution to the problem. But I do not think it does Running and winning a race are not two different activities or events Rather, to call a case of running a case of winning is to affirm a relation between it (the running) and a
.
.
say that
'
which is different from the bear himself, but which in the one case
corresponds to (resembles, or whatever) a real entity and in the other case does not. Now this appearance, we could say, is the
certain goal So, in the case of seeing the visual experience is not one mental act while the seeing is a second mental act somehow superimposed upon it Rather, the purpose of the independent
.
intentional object of the experience in both cases. Whether or not the bear exists, this object must, in some sense, exist. But in what
re than the object has a status 'that is short of actuality but mo 34 As we have seen, this could mean that there exists nothingness'.
Or,
evidence of which one it is Thus, as long as we consider it purely as a visual experience we are not committed to saying that it either
.
in both cases a mental entity, say, a dancing-bear-Zwcge. dence of Sosein from accepting Meinong's doctrine of the indepen
thing that
,
criterion
that its object exists In this sense we can say that a convincing visual experience is intentional according to Chisholm's first
.
experience
ing Brentano's Husserl rejects both of these alternatives. Criticiz f two misunderstandpresentation of intentionality, he speaks o that we are dealing with ings that are promoted by it. The first is lationship, taking place a real [realen] event or real [reales] re
d,
mutandis)
between 'consciousness' or 'the ego', on the one han and the her'. In rejecting thing of which there is consciousness, on the ot he
e affirming that t such a real relationship, Husserl is of cours im also to be stating that object itself need not exist; but I take h mental
when it does not exist
a convincing visual experience (to stick with the same example) can
"
ot, say
be given which is indifferent to whether or not it is a case of seeing. Whatever the decision of that 'independent judgment' we spoke about ,t will not change the details of the experience itself. Or, to put m m another way given two convincing visual experiences
,
,
thing
i
-L
second misunderstand.ng perience stands in a real relation. The hings, both is 'that we are dealing with a relation between two t nd ciousness, an act a present in equally real fashion [reelf] in cons
an intentional object of mental contents'.36
,
we need not invent some other extra such as a Meinongian Ausserseiendes, to which the
-
ex-
e me same)
132
In rejecting these alternatives, Husserl is affirming that the intentional object is not something other than the object referred to in the experience. He says explicity with emphasis, 'that the intentional object of a presentation is the same as its actual object and on occasion as its external object and that it is absurd to
,
,
rAl obje K he Ud s that this 'does not, of course, stop us frort, i jngui g, a$ \ve said previously, between the object tout c tf1 which's intetid
tl i* intend
"
afl*
how
can we say that they have a like object if the object exists in one
ss r' From these passages, one begins to get a *eof H C' rly he \vi*nt$ t0 means by phenomenological description.
case and not in the other? Is it not necessary to say that they both have a mental image and that this is what they have in common, while the actual status of the external objects constitutes differ,
experience without thereby collapsing the object a real part of the experience. Further1V*, he w*nts to fe able to characterize descriptively the diffet eti \roys x*\tcntUng*'
'
1 tn fe tf16 as
Still criticizing Brentano's terminology Husserl makes this remark: 'it will be well to avoid all talk of immanent objectivity.
,
In Brentano's presentation of intentional e say ot1 o*1 point has importance for us namely that itff* are di' fei11 W V8
'
,
'
mere repose1
'
38
.
etc.40 To say
afield. It should be pointed out in passi p notion of the intended object is in itself neut
UoweVr. t&at t 16
taken as an insult it still makes perfectly good sense to speak of the intended insult If the remark hits home however, i.e. an actual insult does result it is not different from the intended
,
.
l a idiWj
nS Miich
e'
insult
v
.
o pt\c thi* Poil* he' seem openly idealistic. I do not intend t k taKn a* suffice it to say that if these formulat *
?7
experiences of a dancing bear one veridical and one illusory, that what they have in common is an intended object. The intended object is not necessarily some real thing whether internal (mental)
,
of ju
l
'
01 tfa*
rd
,
'"
str*KHtfor>v*
To speak of an intended object is to refer obliquely one might say, to a possibly real object, but not to commit oneself to its reality (or unreality). Possible equiva,
.
lents for 'intended' would be 'putative' or 'alleged'. Thus one can speak of an alleged crime and describe it in great detail without
at the same time affirming that
What I hope to have shown here is how ,4* r cal device the epoche, was developed as a deal1 v h j ,s, the problem raised by Cornman and othe f %jnely Ihe f bl of the intentionality of experiences or mery Mviti cs ha 0
,
s n hc
lo
"
such a crime took place. To speak of an alleged crime or an intended object, however, is not merely to speak of some random possibility, for one is dependent, for the
content of one's description upon a particular act of alleging or intending Thus while Husserl denies that the intended object is
,
.
whil
/
- ,
l Zl .re
134
135
import. Husserl believes that this approach is the only proper one for a theory of knowledge understood as a critique of knowledge. It makes it possible to deal consistently with claims to knowledge
on the validity of those claims. One might well ask whether phenomenology understood in this way qualifies as a theory
,
and valuing outside the context of the knowing situation But at the same time phenomenology does claim to have epistemological
.
as understood by both Husserl and his successors is intended to be more than just a theory of knowledge It wants to deal, for example with such phenomena as thinking imagining,
, ,
.
nology
A world should be said in conclusion about the relation between HusserPs approach and a theory of knowledge. Clearly phenome1
.
NOTES
ed. A. Marras (Chicago: Univer /ML Intentionality, Mind and Language, sity of Illinois Press, 1972). New ions, trans. J.N. Findlay ( LI Edmund Husserl, Logical Investigat
-
or, as in the case of perception, claims to a direct contact with reality - strictly as claims, i.e. without having to commit oneself
-
. Edwards, (New 'Intentionality in The Encyclopedia of Philosophy, e Chisholm does relate the concept York: Macmillan, 1967), Vol. 4, p. 201.
'
d. P
to phenomenology in the
4
.
Cnr\Of*r\i
the problem of intentionality I have not touched on at all The most important ui mese is doubtless the question of whether this Huiuuu of these is doubtless the question this
.
knowledge at all or even as a critique But it must be pointed out that the epoche does not rule out a treatment of knowledge evidence and even truth as intended (claimed) knowledge intended evidence intended truth. And this is in fact, the way Husserl treats these topics. He speaks at one point of 'the 'experience' of truth' (das 'Erlebnis* der Wahrheit).41 But an adequate exposition of these subjects would likewise lead us far beyond the scope of this essay. There are many aspects of
,
.
s Introduction Editor
'
to *eal*,d t
1960>-
he
blot,
hological states and IML, p. 31. It is true that Chisholm says 'certain psycthesis, and does not but he seems to argue for the 'all and only events
tano
'
s claim.
Findlay (New York: Hum 10. Logical Investigations (LIO, trans. J.N.
.
anities
....
Al
"
'
76
i: , toe. cit (note 33 (note f Chisholm in 'Intentionality lnr rhisholm in 13. Cf Marras in IML, PP- 3f.,
,
.
ffff
above).
14
-
SI
LI> P- 552,
15. LI
Beings
J such experiences'would
n H. Orccn.
16
noot be called 'psychical by anyone (ibia-h Cf. LI, pp. 569 ff.
18. LK MoteW, The Concept of PP" 68 f 1972). P- 28w sentences in 19. A Marras, 'Intentionality and cognitive Findlay. differenUy from
'
,
.
20. LI
132
133
to in the experience
In rejecting these alternatives, Husserl is affirming that the rf v *-wwii ivw, iiuascii is amrmmg mat me
.
imentionai object of a
our example of the two experiences how can we say that they have a like object if the object exists in one case and not in the other? Is it not necessarv to sav that thev both
not exist? To return to
, ,
and on occasion as * external object ana that n is absurd to its vyv mai uujcci and mat it is ausura iu w distinguish between them'.37 But again what if the object does Hot PYlCt? Tr\
,
,
He says explici.y, with emphai, '.hat h presentation is r/ie 5ame as its actual object
,
where there is a real object), he adds other than the real object ( " we ?c frrim Histineuishinc, as we does not, of course, stop us from distinguishing, as that this does not, of course, v* this ">a, *i/fit h i<: intended is in ended
' '
P'""*' "Vthe object as U isHhe Tta and it then intended... an on a given occasion,
the obW
' " fS
d ended... and
JL
! ,. considered a technical T T a tecnmuu -... imtmiuii , usually considered usually term is realwwv term, . ,_ is realy very close to our ordinary use We can speak of an
Philosophical t m
.
.
it tentional object' which is not exposed to How does this help? I suggest that instead "
. . ..
illt t Ts Ln
,
From these passages, one begins to get a s l description. Clearly he wants to "leans *the intentional object as a descriptive component of an phenomenologica ider cons without thereby collapsing the two so as to make the experience
,
t a sense ot what Husserl of wnat Hussen From these passages, one begins to ge ense
, rM orK/ hp wants
39
to
acharacteriZe descriptively theFurthermore' heofWantS ? be real of the experienCe- different ways intending. able to
pomi nas unpoi imiw x w
f * Brentano's presentation ofnamely object - in as intentionallyfor us to an object importance related to an of being related
'
'
'
mere represenrepresen
trm
nl , intention
n
'
. TT
'"TZ
h
iption would lead us too topic of phenomenological descr ted out in passing, however, that the afield. It should be poin
a ia
anni,hA
far
..
insult
tion of the intended object is in itself neutralthe notion I have with regardKh vc iHealism Insofar as question of realism vs. idealism, m fundamental to outhned is fundatnental ,0 Husserl's phenomenoiu * constant throughoutl ZtZ J Sm of epoche remains
of many later formulations w these two alternatives in spite
d that Husserl's career, it could be argue
the intended insult If the remark hit home ilt. ? me remark hits home, however, i.e. a" s actual insult does result it is not different from the intended
...ou.i.
,
,
hich
insult
if
content of one ZZ T
rrmtf ~r , *
lUUK PC' of an alleged crime or an intended uan alleged crime or an intl 7 ot object however, is not merely
.
is to refer obliquely one might say to a possibly real object, but not to commit oneself to its reality (or unreality) Possible equivajr yui uiireaniy;. rossioiecquiva lents for 'intended' would be 'putative' or 'alleged'. Thus n, can 'nntativ*' intend .j. ran one speak of an alleged crime and describe it in great detail without at the same time affirming that such a crime took place To speak
,
,
experiences of a dancing bear one veridical and one illusory, that what they have in common is an intended object. The intended object is not necessarily some real thing, whether internal (mental) or external that they both have. To speak of an intended object
,
,
I do not intend to argue this point here; seem openly idealistic. these formulations are taken as being suffice it to say that if t of the suspension of judgment that expressed within the contex nnt translate into straightforward -. a~
.
idealistic claims.
the
what l hope to have shown here cal device) the fpochgt Was developed as a wayblem raisel by Cornman riences or menta h intentionality of expe of the intentionality or expci it
uvw .
>
and otners
wcMit
designated
Jution
ranHnm oo.u:i:...
random nn
din,
<-
by the so-called cognitive verbs. An Cornman hiself. While the that of to the problem is not unlike only m icall tool. is explicitly formulated 5> only epoch* as a methodolog i ePoc methodologica f ,/o
,
d as 1 have
as I have sa.d hw so
.u,
rrsssss:
the Ideas, it is already at work in sense of what Husser, the ake on this assumption canrelated topics we m
.
.
-
.u
? Investigations. Only
there
136
23
'Phenomenology
,
24
25
tary Vol, XI (London: Harrison & Sons Ltd, 1932) pp. 80 f. IML, p 34, n. 3.
,
Marras in IML, p. 67. Cf. A. Kennyy Action Emotion and Wilh (New York: Humanities Press
,
26
1963), p. 198.
.
205 f
27
.
in Phenomenology and
'Intentionality
28
29
IML, p
63.
pp. 149-53.
30
.
IML, p. 64. Cf. G. Ryle, The Concept ofMind {London: Hutchinson, 1949),
,
.
31
32
33
of heat upon the light which strikes my retina I do not think there is any
.
I may, of course, take it to be something else Here I am ruling out an analysis stating that what I 'really see
.
'
transcendental ego. To avoid terminological disputes I shall refer to the latter simply as the non-empirical ego. Insofar as I deal here
with textual formulations of the distinction I shall refer to Kant s
'
see.
'Intentionality'
above).
36 Ibid.
.
.
38
39 40
41
cally; and to Husserl's phenomenology, in which, among recent versions of transcendental philosophy, this distinction plays the greatest role. But my purpose is less to interpret texts than to get at 'the thing itself to use Husserl's expression. Like others I felt
,
I began to take it for granted, make use of it, speak of it and draw consequences from it without directly testing it. But when I began to reflect I slowly realized that I hardly understood what was meant by it. Then I encountered more recent forms of transcen,
either explicitly reject the distinction or get along perfectly we without it All this prompts me to attempt the following critical
.
ll
examination.
First let us consider Kant. Shortly after the beginning of his transcendental deduction (second edition) he introduces the conm cept of pure or original apperception, which he distinguishes fro
ss
'
138
139
which,7 while generating the representation '/ think' (a represeno - - --"-c? x w vxai.c4h xi j: ifiiftfx ya icpiCflCIltation which must be capable of accompanying all other representot,* .. ... , ., , ?,u:?u :? ?? tations, and which in all consciousness is one and the same)
v w mi
v xA j aax
t XX
1 Vpi VklVll"
,
ish to understand questions which we must not wcrw sight of if we w qiiCMlUlld W 111 11 wv iiiuou nvi, lose v* ** i-isolation i.e., it. Still, it makes good sense to examine it in quas
,
we are ask ng not how this concept functions within the critical
.
cannot itself be accompanied by any further representation Thus he is speaking of two ways in which I am conscious of myself. In empirical self-consciousness I know myself as an ob'
"
" V*
7 iJ
iii
-mrr.Qlf
--If
TT11J.W11 i
Cllll
WWlliJVIUUO
Wl
-*
V u-i p
JLV T
XAA
kJWXX
W-kJ
MXX
philosophy, but rather what it is that has this function. Our first question is a simple one: Can there be such an ego, with no particular properties, in consciousness or elsewhere? Kant da.ms self-consciousness, though it is not knowledge,
V UJ. AAA WVUVAWA* ** ----j
-
ly - ?+
icular properties, what of such an ego and then substract its part
described as knowledge;4 in another he calls this apperception the first pure knowledge of understanding'.5 Pure apperception is characterized as the apprehension of my own existence ('... not as I appear to myself nor as I am in myself but only that I am');6 on the other hand it is described as if it were a 'mere representation' i.e. an empty thought not of an existing but of a merely
J .1 1 1 . . A . '
,
, ,
,
Kant insktc that th;* selt-conscio . , . . jvcuii insists mat tms SC1I-COnSClOUSneSS IS by no means to be iolo mai uns usness is Dy nO means tO DC
"
consciousness which accompanies all concepts indeed, it is that of which 'we cannot have any concept whatever'.3 In one passage
'
standing;2 a few pages later he calls it a representation, and we cannot even say that this is a concept, but only that it is a bare
i
dictory: at one point he says that here I make use of a concept that should be counted among the pure concepts of the under-i+n**
the claim is that such properties belong not to the ego but to the
body, then one can quite properly reply that in ordinary language,
AZ~*
2 ~ J?
...
'
ties to myself, not to my body at least, I ascribe such proper Philosophers are of course known for their uncommon use ot language, aim many are ~ language, and maiiy cwv proud of it, but even the most stubborn feet
tall, weighed 170 pounds and had blue ' Jj phy, and in the work of Merleau-ponty, we find imP0 * f drawn from linguistic usage, to.the ettect t ments, not merely ept of the ego he concept of the ego and its corporality belongs essentially to t conc " -"" tiMv to the
um-aut Maim that nnt he but his body was six Cartesian would hardly claim that not he but his body was six teet antaian w uiw u ij h*1n<;n
identity, even my own identity for myself. Yet I would like to set aside this whole discussion,
important
If we attempt to understand this pure self-consciousness by contrasting it with empirical self consciousness then we apparently must call it the representation of an ego, my ego, that is
-
'
r-
an instance of empirical consciousness. Thus the ,?o modes of consciousness can be disUnguished
rt+ 1
vwiiawiuudiicss can uc uisLme 1"**"
.
qualified by no particular properties Particular properties are also called empirical properties. Insofar as particular qualities of
.
to choose the Cartesian as it is, for I believe that even if we were side of this debate, and exclude bodily properties, there would be f a non-empirical ego. To be grave difficulties with the concept o lar bodily properties but all excluded here are not only particu l predicates, which supposparticular properties. And even menta
_
dy, concern particular propedly relate to the ego and not the bo certain experiences, actions, erties. *. Thus I ascribe to myself ce*m ascr.be o
"
nor+
::
=!
at least because of a difference in their objects: in one case an ego with its particular properties is represented; in the other, an ego
self-consciousness
houghts, cogmnons, f' up my' personalt - "ispohistory or are dispoparticular episodes making
w iilor ar\\cf\Ap>Q fTIJilfinff UD mV DCrSOndl lUSLUl y
1
without such properties In this way we can speak as the postKantian tradition has done, not only of two different modes of
,
,
one
had such predicates in mind when have thought of he was enough of a Cartesian that he would not l and ontological bodily properties of the ego. In short, the logica
cannot be limited to what is status of particularity for the ego
bodily.
'
particular mental
140
141
we speak meaningfully of something that has no particular properties? How could one distinguish this ego from other things? According to classical ontology an entity exists in virtue of its
essential;
To this conception it may be objected that in view of the generality of the object of consciousness the expression self-consciousness' is not appropriate. If I abstract from everything that
'
distinguishes me from others, am I dealing with 'myself at all? Kant's remark that, in pure apperception I am conscious of my exisown existence, would seem incompatible with this view, if
'
nothing.
emphasized. The ego's function as condition of the possibility o knowledge - and morality as well - is supposed to require this very feature. The universality of cognitive judgments and moral judgments supposedly requires a universal subject. Here it is no longer
a matter for my ego
,
experiences which distinguishes me from other persons. But I can also abstract from these particularities, look away from them and toward the general Here I deal not with what distinguishes me
.
But perhaps the defender of the non-empirical ego has something else in mind Of course I am conscious of myself as something particular he may say, and thus as having particular prop.
of the ego which is identical in all genuine cognitive and mora judgments. Such judgments are to be regarded as its acts, in which I this particular person, somehow participate insofar as I am guided by such judgments. Reason is one, and with respect to reason there is nothing which could distinguish me from other
,
persons. Such distinctions obtain only where there is unreason and error; or they concern the accidental features of thought and
properties is unthinkable is indeed correct but properties need not be particular properties. They can as in this case be quite general, expressed in the universal predicates we use all the time even m ordinary speech Through such predicates the ego is distinguished from other sorts of things, e.g. physical bodies but one ego is not thus distinguished from another ego In this sense the pure ego is something that can very well be the object of such a universal consciousness; we can speak meaningfully of it; and it is clearly to be distinguished from the empirical ego, since no particular properties pertain to it Kant's pure apperception thus refers not to a particular ego but to the ego 'as such' the ego 'in general',
,
not with particular aspects of myself but with the essence of my ego. Since it is still with the ego that 1 deal one may speak of a sort of self-consciousness. The objection that an object without
,
,
her way, the particular ego but the ego itself. Or, to put it anot we deal with it but only indirectly. Our concern is now with a
,
ak only of we move to essential and general predicates and spe what pertains to the concept of the ego, we leave behind not only
eidos. To be sure, the concept is that ot
action which have nothing to do with their rational content. But the objection mentioned above, that this conception ig fact, insofar as nores the individuality of the ego, is too weak. In
,
concept - or an essence
the ego and not of something else. But the concept of the ego is
to descnbe this Precisely a concept and not an ego. If we try
,
,
whether we call it 'conceptual analysis or m concept t be fulfilled sensschau' we are listing the conditions which mus t
the particular, can exis , saying that only the instance
,
if a particular item is to count as an instance of this concep . I his I am is quite different from dealing with the instance itself. while not t
142
143
universal cannot. There is no need to choose nominalism over realism in order to make my point Hence I shall use 'concept' and eidos' indifferently even though one has a subjective and the other an objective coloring For whatever the mode of being of
.
group is after all, in the logical sense, an individual, and in such usage it is particular properties that are being ascribed to it. When
one ascribes particular properties to a particular subject, no
'
a concept or eidos it is not to be confused with the mode of being of one of its instances Quite simply: the concept 'table' is not a
,
.
'
table, in the sense that one cannot put anything on it eat from it, etc. It is located neither here nor there nor anywhere else and
,
,
'
And it does not change matters if we speak of the 'table as such' rather than of the concept as the eidos 'table' There is no 'table
.
as such' - unless
this may
be called predication indeed universal predication; but the object to which these predicates are attributes is not a universal table but
a social subject, that my criticism is directed. If this criticism is correct, we may now well ask what has become of the non-empirical ego. To be sure, our critique was directed
hich 'being empiriagainst a particular formulation according to w cal means 'having particular properties The pure ego, thus conceived, is supposed to be non-empirical and yet still not only exist as an ego but also somehow function as an ego. But such a ble. Must we then give up conception has proved to be untena
'
'
particular table, but then we are speaking not of universal properties but again of particular instances of these properties So if we abstract from all the particularities of the ego we do indeed come up with something universal but not a universal ego. Whatever the legitimate ontological status of the concept or eidos
.
l ego, or is there another altogether the concept of a non-empirica he logical difficulties? conception of it which can avoid t
ego', it does not play the role of an ego. Just as the concept table may be said to express but not to exercise the function of a table
,
'
so it is with concept of the ego: it neither acts, nor sees, nor hears, nor understands The idea of an actually existing ego that acts without doing anything in particular thinks without thinking
.
II
Turning now to Husserl, we do not in fact encounter hasized difficulties, yet we find the explicit and repeatedly emp
distinction between the empirical and the non-empirical
' '
'
these
seems to me untenable a logical mistake of confusing the concept with its instances
,
,
.
functions
ego.
The concept of a supra-individual subject, which I have rejected here for logical reasons should not, however, be confused with the concept of a social or communal subject. In ordinary language
,
properties such as actions opinions, intentions and a significant and interesting philosophical question
,
the like. It is
whether and
how far such language is justified, whether it is meaningful in social theory etc. However one may answer this question, the
,
ed as an individual.8 Transcendental philosophy, according to one the knower s reflecting on himself and his knowing passage, is life'; the source of all transcendental-philosophical claims is - or 9 As transcendental ego I am the subject of a am - 'I myself of individual experiences. I am conscious life made up of a stream also a 'substrate of habitualities 10 and am constituted in the unity 'transcendental ego is used of a history.11 Accordingly the term
'
.
'
'
by Husserl in the
144
145
in the sense of a community which consists of individuals 13 Still, Husserl wishes to distinguish sharply between this transcendental ego and what he variously calls the empirical the physical or the mundane ego, or simply % this person' ('ich dieser Mensch').14 What does Husserl mean by this distinction?
.
dental ego, he means the ego insofar as, and only insofar as, it
bears this same relation to what is other. The ego is thus transcen-
Clearly Husserl can maintain it only if he construes the opposition between empirical and non-empirical in a way that differs
from ours so far In fact, the opposition for him is not between having or not having particular properties Rather, if I understand
.
.
dental insofar as it is the subject of intentional acts of consciousness. Such acts are considered particular episodes in the ego's or stream of consciousness which together make up a particular
personal history.
him correctly it is a matter of two ways of conceiving the relation between the ego and the non-ego Both cases concern particular properties or activities of the ego - perceptions rational thinking,
,
.
valuations and even feelings - but these can relate in two different
ways to other objects and events They may stand in causal relations with things and occurances in the world; or they may be intentionally related to them Understood intentionally every. .
and future experiences are considered only insofar as they have a meaning for it. In this sense they influence' present conscious'
ness, but not in the sense of a causal influence. This is how Husserl
thing other than the ego can have only the status of an object for its consciousness; or better - since the word 'object' is too narrow
-
it has no other status than that of having meaning for the ego
.
In short, on this view everything that is not the ego is regarded as having a sense, whereas the ego itself, through its acts of consciousness, is regarded as giving sense. Even in relation to itself
nothing for it
it is sense-giving, or - as Husserl expresses it - it constitutes itself. We can also say: the empirical ego is in the world, the transcendenit. To be tal ego for the world, or alternativety, the world is for in the world is to be part of a causal interaction. To consider the
implications
ited
ith
sense only in the intentional context, terms indicating intentional relationships Concepts like space and time which also function
,
sense.
purely internal phenomena - perceptions, Thus it is not the difference in our mode of in the same way
.
It is from his concept of intentional relations that Husserl derives his notion of the 'transcendental' The remarkable thing about consciousness is that objects are given to it but do not become part of it are not 'really contained' {reell enthalten) in it. In this sense objects transcend consciousness 15 Phenomenol.
ogically
bservation - which access to the ego - introspection or external o makes the difference between the two ego-concepts. Also, this difference must not be confused with that between the eidetic and logy is not the empirical or factual. What distinguishes phenomeno that it is eidetic for many other disciplines are also eidetic; rather, hat its eidetic theme phenomenology is distinguished by the fact t
,
r4
146
147
i
we could not look on consciousness as an absolute region for itself alone in the sense in which [in phenomenology] we must actually
do so\16 For phenomenology is supposed to be a concrete, not an abstract discipline. Let us now look more closely at HusserPs
argument.
formulation. One could object that here too we are dealing not
with something concrete but with an abstraction Of course we can
.
abstract from the empirical - i e causal - relations between the ego and the rest of the world that is, we can simply ignore them
. .
For Husserl the ego's causal relatedness to its surroundings is necessary only if the so-called natural standpoint is assumed. Under this standpoint a unified, all-encompassing space-time
world, to which I and my conscious life belong, is posited. To the essential structure of this world belongs the regular causal interrelatedness of all events, including psychic events.
in favor of the intentional This would be a different sort of abstraction, of course from the one described earlier. In this case
.
our gaze is directed not away from the particular and toward the general, i.e. from the instance to the concept or eidos; instead, it
As is well known, a basic and indispensible part of the theory im one can at any time of the phenomenological reduction is the cla
'
is directed toward one feature of the ego and away from another Such a focus of gaze or interest is always possible but this is not
.
consider and describe it, but refrain from participating in it. This
to say the object in question can exist concretely or even be conceived concretely under this one aspect alone We can, for example, at any time consider only the color of a physical object,
,
,
.
sidered their spatial shape But this does not mean that such objects can exist concretely without spatial shape, or that we can represent or think them concretely without extension. According
to this objection we would have to say that a purely intentional or transcendental ego cannot exist strictly speaking, though we can certainly consider and investigate the concrete ego under this
,
from the concept of cally everything else in phenomenology, l subintentionality. As we saw, the ego considered as intentiona
its
ti-
has causal relations to the rest of the world. How is this objection to be evaluated? Can the transcendental ego in HusserFs sense concretely exist? As might be expected,
ontological status, objects, so that they and the ego had the same
time world. In this surroundings of the ego within the one space h a world, these objects case, in keeping with the notion of suc would have to be related causally to each other and to the ego as l relation to the world well. The ego could have no intentiona
are conceptually and ontologically possible *If conscious experiences were inconceivable apart from their interlacting with nature* he writes, 'in the
,
consciousness
conceived transcendentally
.
without having at the same time ld have to exist concreteanother way, the transcendental ego wou
ly also as empirical ego.
that it does not imply the existence of its object. I can take
7.
if
.".i
..
148
149
not; I can believe that something is the case when in fact it is not;
and I can think and imagine all sorts of things without even
claiming that they exist Intentionality is not a relation in the extensional or truth-functional sense which implies the existence of relata or the truth of sentences Even Brentano saw this when he described intentionahty as merely 'relation like'.18 This makes it possible to posit the existence of an intentional ego without having to posit the existence of the world Yet with this the world is not lost as Husserl repeatedly reminds us; for the transcendental ego exists precisely in intending the world. Posited with the ego is the world as intended world objects as intended objects. But
.
but rather particular acts or episodes of thinking in which something specific is actually thought. The relation of the ego to its representations takes the form of particular acts, as Kant says:
That relation comes about, not simply through my accompanying
each representation with consciousness, but only insofar as conjoin one representation with another and am conscious of the synthesis of them 19 Kant calls thinking spontaneous. It results
'
.
r
in knowledge, expressed in judgments, which derive from acts of judging. If knowledge arises from concepts, as Kant says, and
concepts in turn are understood as rules,20 then knowing must involve acting according to these rules. The ego that so acts, and
'determining', as opposed to the determined or determinable. To put it another way, but still in Kant's terminology: the I think' must
'
accompany all my representations; since this accompan takes place in thinking and not some other way, its function must be, as Kant says, to refer these representations, through concepts,
to an object.22
iment
It is easy to see in Kant's framework the concept of intentionality, expressed in other terms, and this should not surprise us. In knowledge - what Kant calls experience (Erfahrung) - the subject
reaches beyond itself toward the object. Since here of the knowing or experiencing ego, he means the ego
Kant is speaking
III
may be possible to use this conception in order to cast light on Kant's distinction in order to find for it a more satisfying inter,
relation to the objective. The latter, to which it stands in this relation has the status of object of knowledge. The ego is determining, i.e. it determines how the object is, it apprehends it as dgment, and such and such; the object gets determined in ju
,
riencing expe
lf
or explicity; indeed we could say that the whole book is about such
Kant is in fact far from de properties. But nying properties to this ego On the contrary the Critique often speaks of such properties implicity
.
hts,
things that happen to the ego. Given to myself in inner sense, l says, I am like any other object in the world, subject to the causa
,
experiences, judgments,
pression 'I think' already ascribes something to the ego And in keeping with our earlier critique we must say that it is not thinking in general' that is ascribed to the ego (whatever that could mean)
.
properties. Just the fact that this ego is introduced in the ex'
order. If something happens to me, it must be causally related to what is going on around me, with what happens before and after. d
,
llows rules of the rather than activity which rather than an activity which spontaneously fo understanding If we take Kant in this way, then we can y,
Si
"
..
.j
fi-
.
.
-.
150
151
r
f
i
we did with Husserl that in one case the ego is in the world as
,
is
part of the causal order, in the other the ego is for the world and
The verb 'accompany' which Kant often uses for the nonempirical ego can also cast light on his distinction. In the case of
self-intuition the ego becomes the object of my thought and experience. But the ego appears in connection with any object of experience including self-experience - though the word 'appears' is not right since the ego is not in this case an object but is related to the representation of some object as its subject It occurs solely in this relation of thinking to its object it only turns up insofar
,
knowledge. To be sure, the idea of a consciousness which is not knowledge is unproblematic. It could mean an empty intention,
in which one 'entertains' the idea of some object without making
is thus and not otherwise. In those cases one has the mere concept of an object, a merely possible object. Perhaps Kant means such an empty consciousness, which is then transformed by inner intuition
as something else is occupying consciousness in the capacity of object. In Husserl's language we could say that it is co-intended in the manner of a horizon This interpretation of 'accompanying' would thus confirm that the pure ego s mode of existence is
.
into knowledge. At first glance this seems quite proper, since this works with other objects: an empty concept becomes knowledge ion; we learn when coupled with intuition of the object in quest
thereby that the object really is as we thought. But the present case
'
intent ionality
knowing subject, freely following the norms of the understanding, but that of a causally determined object of nature. Thus we do
way.
not move from the possibility to the actuality of an object; instead we construe the object, in this case the ego, in a totally different
Besides, Kant's 'pure' or 'original apperception
'
'
an important role in his whole architechtonic i.e. in his critique of rational psychology and in the transition to this theory of
,
to the categories etc. Of course, it is wrong to say that this is an embarassment for Kant since the unknowability of the ego plays
,
ly linked to Kant's system, for example the principle that an object of knowledge must be given in intuition thought according
,
circle, since any judgment upon it has already made use of its representation' 23 On the other hand there are problems specifical.
the ego always slips through my fingers when I try to grasp it. Every time I try to make it my object it pops up again, so to speak, behind my back So the attempt to grasp this ego is like trying to jump over one's own shadow or even more appropriately like trying to see one's own eyes. Kant saw this problem; he speaks of the subject about which 'we can only revolve in a perpetual
.
s remark that here I am of something. First, we have Kant econd, as we saw, we are given conscious of my own existence.24 S a whole series of descriptions for the ego, which form an impor-
tant part of the critical philosophy, and of which Kant wo ite hardly say that they are merely possibilities. Of these we can qu
uld
bject of knowledge properly ask how Kant can know them if the su
tations
are simply together side by side in one consciousness. It must mean hat through that they stand in a quite peculiar relation, namely t is is what the representation in question / think an object. Th
consciousness means, that I not merely have' a representation,
'
is:
;:
.
152
153
as if it were something happening to me physiologically or psychologically, but that through it some object is thought. Now perhaps there can be representations without self-consciousness ,
nomenologically. The givenness of an intentional subject to itself, as a special case, can then lead, when the natural attitude is
bracketed, to the theory and method of reduction. This does not,
this is an old controversy. But there can certainly be no self-consciousness unless it is related to some object of thought This is simply to say that I take myself to be the subject of such thought So it is hard to see how Kant can avoid speaking of a self-consciousness that is at the same time self-givenness and self-know.
ledge.
regard the objective givenness of an intentional subject as an insoluble riddle or paradox from the start, he did not see it as a problem in the special case of self-consciousness.
Even if we thus free ourselves from the Kantian assumptions,
<
The considerations which prevent Kant from arriving at this conclusion can be avoided if we put aside the demands of the Kantian system and think about the issue systematically The old
.
familiar paradox of self-knowledge is really not a paradox at all It is important in epistemology not to confuse the act of knowing
.
one problem remains which we also touched on in connection with Husserl. This is the problem of how an intentional subject can be i concretely given as such, and thus how and whether a non-emper cal ego can exist and be thought concretely. We saw how impor tant the solution of this problem is for Husserl; but has he really
-
T
"
i .
I
i
"
:
.
:;
In this
solved it? Even if it is true that we can apprehend the ego not only
But this
1
V
natural attitude,
-
i
I
.f
; !
:
can
i
k
; .
i;
I
!
ii
to recognize the natural attitude as an attitude, i.e., a scheme o its thought which rests on certain presuppositions, is to recognize
nological analysis is to show what poses, what it takes for granted as the basis for everything else but
'
i
1
i
To be an object means to be passive, to be subjected to worldly causality. This conviction makes it impossible for Kant to recogn-
ize that we constantly view not only ourselves but also our fellow humans as spontaneously thinking and acting i.e. as intentional
,
under
duction
and that this is how they are known to us But Husserl recognizes this and it serves as the basis for his theory of re,
.
subjects
logical these presuppositions and do not see them. The phenomeno heir hold on our gaze permits us to see them by neutralizing t l s phenomeexperience. Now clearly we can understand Husser
causally interrelated other persons are given and taken as intentional subjects In Ideas II and elsewhere Husserl examined
,
.
nological analyses; we can follow his nomenology ourselves. Does this not
phenomenologically the manner in which Person and Geist constitute their own region of being within the world The problem of intersubjectivity as dealt with in the Fifth Cartesian Meditation is above all the problem of how the objective givenness of others
.
But this does not really do justice to the complex relat between the natural and the phenomenological attitudes. Even
natural
'
V-
%
>
A
-
IS
154
155
belong to the nature, i.e. to the essence, of consciousness? Certainly not, one would think, if the phenomenological reduction consists in throwing off this attitude and replacing it with another. Still, certain of HusserPs images and expressions suggest something highly ambiguous and even contradictory. On the one hand he does not hesitate to call the phenomenological attitude unnatural 25 even 'artificial' (kiinstlich).26 This is in keeping with his repeated warnings against the temptation of falling back' into the natural attitude, something he accuses his erstwhile and errant disciples of having done. But whence comes this temptation, whence the gravitational pull which threatens something like a fall from grace? Whereas Husserl warns against such a fall,
'
d Husserl correctly, nological attitude which posits, if I understan a plurality of intentional subjects whose interaction is to be understood in strictly intentional terms. Here he borrows from
Leibniz's monadology, which at first glance seems quite approl relations among priate: for Leibniz there are no real or causa monads but only representational i.e. intentional relations.
' '
,
'
'
Husserl also sees the limits to this compromise, since it leads him in the direction of a transcendental realism. To avoid this, he adds that the monads in his sense are not to be understood as simply
'intentionales Ineinan-
tly executed, non-solippression, all the paradoxes of a consisten sistic transcendental phenomenology are somehow brought to-
Let us sumarize what has been said, without pretending to have given an unequivocal answer. The only acceptable concept of a
i
considered as intentional and non-empirical ego is that of a subject and be conceived concretely nothing else. Such a subject can exist
-
natural attitude.
it can be more than a mere abstraction - only if a p ied out, that is, only if the nological reduction can be fully carr
.
henome-
We may also ask if the phenomenological attitude might not be united with or incorporated into the natural attitude so that phenomenology could be practiced without altogether giving up
,
the latter. In a certain sense even Husserl thought this was possible when he developed the idea of a phenomenological-eidetic psychology, In contrast to an empirical-explanatory psychology this would be identical with transcendental phenomenology in content except that the decisive step of excluding the natural attitude
,
natural attitude is really dispensible. Otherwise, empirical and ional) egos are simply two non-emiprical (i.e., causal and intent in the natural attitude. aspects of my concrete self, just as they are l reduction can To the question of whether the phenomenologica
tisfactory
ed, but the ego thus considered would at the same time tacitly be taken as wordly or empirical Thus the transition to the intentional analysis seems not to require forsaking the natural attitude. A further question is whether all the implications of a consis.
tently executed transcendental phenomenology are really acceptable. Even Husserl saw that his approach led to a kind of methodological solipsism in which other persons along with everything else, appear merely as intentional objects.28 This is why he tries, in the Fifth Meditation to develop an intersubjective phenome,
,
'
-
I
_
lit
r.
-v
P. I
156
NOTES
1.
Immanuel Kant
B 399.
B 404. B 158.
B 137.
3 4 5
6 7
B 157. B 404.
8.
Edmund Husserl Ideas Pertaining to a Pure Phenomenology and Phenomenological Philosophy trans. F. Kersten (The Hague: M Nijhoff, 1983), p.
,
,
.
64.
9.
Edmund Husserl The Crisis of European Sciences and Transcendental Phenomenology trans. D. Carr (Evanston: Northwestern University Press
,
,
Nijhoff
.
13. CM 132.
.
Findlay's estimation of Edmund Husserl seems to have grown with the years. In the 1963 version of Meinong's Theory of Objects and Values Husserl is still compared unfavorably with Meinong who is called 'the true phenomenologist', while Husserl is rather darkly labeled a 'realistic subjectivist' and a 'cryptosolipsist'.1 But by 1966 and the appearance of The Discipline of the Cave, Findlay could call Husserl Mn my view the greatest philoso.
JN
,..
239.
115.
17. CM 68
spoken of in the same breath with Kant and Hegel or with Plato
,
25. Edmund Husserl Erste Philosophic, vol, 11 ed. R. Boehm (The Hague: M. i6
Nijhoff 1959), p. 121
,
,
.
.. .
136, 150-51
257.
bloom of his own philosophical maturity when some of his most important works were flowing or about to flow from his pen he took the time and the pains to translate the whole of the Logische Untersuchungen an effort for which the word 'herculean' can bring only a weary smile to the lips of one who has himself tried to translate Husserl Translating is a peculiarly selfless and thank,
...
less task: like words themselves whose humble nature it is, says
,
references introduce
,
and [which] merely serve to introduce, or to help objects and connections other than themselves', the
,
translator effaces himself before the work of someone else and struggles to make it appear somehow remaining what it is while
158
159
say for himself; he did it with such brilliant success that the result
turn derives from their handling of a concept that is even more fundamental for both: intentionality. This area is the focus of the
following discussion, which I hope will cast some light not only on Findlay and Husserl and the relation between them, but also,
through them, on the Sache selbst.
We should begin by noting another fundamental philosophical ith posture, one which Findlay shares not only with Husserl but w
almost the whole modern tradition. This is the reflexive posture,
below (or above) considered views on this or that topic; it lies rather at the level of philosophical method and, more important,
the insistence on dealing not directly with the world and what is in it but rather, at least at first, with how we encounter these things and know something about them. In Descartes and Locke this
It is found in two curiously opposed statements in the work in which Findlay most closely identifies himself with Husserl The
,
Findlay and Husserl, and also in Kant and Hegel himself, the
reflexive turn has another sort of motivation. Findlay says simply
Discipline of the Cave Explaining in the Preface that he owes much to Husserlian methods Findlay insists that he is nevertheless
.
not strictly a Husserlian phenomenologist 'since I neither practise nor wholly understand the epoche or suspense of conviction, of which Husserl wrote so much ...\6 Yet a few pages later in the first lecture he tells us that 'to be a cave-delineator a transcendental speleologist one must be a phenomenologist in Husserl's
,
,
,
them'.8 The motical, conceptual and linguistic approaches to vation is critical rather than skeptical: in what sorts of experiences
do we encounter reality rather than illusion? What rules do we follow to arrive at the truth? But that we do encounter reality in
some sense, that we do arrive at truths, is no longer doubted - not
than the epoche and the reader of these two statements now wonders whether Findlay shares this posture or not. The answer I think has to be another contradiction: he does and he does not; and this turns out to be one of those contradictions which are far more illuminating if we take the trouble to understand them than
,
7 Now anyone who knows Husserl knows that almost nothing is more fundamental to his whole philosophical posture
,
,
mended
recognition of the confusions upon which they rested. Foremost among these confusions was one which was manifested in the
'
many a string of consistent statements. The closeness and also the essential difference between Findlay and Husserl as philosophers
it
I
f
-
:v
71
1
j:-:
160
161
Here something like the notion of intentionality makes an appearance; and it appears in essence though not so succinctly
,
expressed, in Kant as well as the later Husserl which shows that it is not the property of realists There is no doubt however, that the notion has a realist first-order significance; it makes a kind
,
.
morning star but not the evening star, or that he is aware of an object that is many-sided but neither has nor does not have twelve
edges.13 If
of opening declaration of realism to which the philosopher despite all further wanderings toward idealism or whatever is sup,
,
radically different from its own and which for the most part do not depend on the mind for their existence. For these philosophers this notion is more than an appearance to be saved; it is a point of departure a basic category recognized as necessary after centuries of regarding it as an insoluble puzzle because it could not
,
posed to remain true. What it says is that the mind is what it is only by transcending itself by going outside itself and meeting up in various ways with things whose natures are for the most part
,
away all apparent references to non-realities and all 'referential really opacity One will try to show, for example, that they are
' '
'
.
Here we encounter the deep gulf of philosophical attitude and concern which separates Findlay from Russell and Moore, Ryle,
f real Findlay, one cannot serve the interests of a tidy ontology o entities and real relations without bringing about the 'complete
and Wittgenstein, and aligns him with Meinong and Husserl. For
be derived from something else Findlay compares it to the category of relations which occasioned so many headaches for philoso.
'
'
14 without doing
d
entities without
inhering in any of them or which seemed to require an infinity of other relations to cement them to their terms' but which
'
Even the reply that Russell, for example, was simply not engage
is no excuse if the pursuit of these interests blocks the fulfi
rebel, we were to give up and not only allow him to stay but also name him to the privy council.12 But it is another law of the history of ideas that the successful
and this occurs when the intentionality of mind is approached with basically ontological concerns or worse, ontological prejudices.
,
ceptual transformations are of this sort: it is as if after failing to eliminate or exile from our kingdom a particularly subversive
,
llment
a variegated mental life that does not ds, but seems to follow ceived logical and metaphysical standar
rules of its own, is a sort of philosophical embarrassment, like a lurid family scandal that has to be explained away or hushed up. d this But Findlay's first concern is to understand the mind, an
concern,
removal of one set of puzzles makes way for host of new ones
t to the mind, that objects be taken seriously as somehow presen in fact do not or for and as genuinely referred to, even if they
ires
ontologically unsatisfying character, as in those cases where it makes some kind of sense to say of a person that he sees the
.
many things that are not in the world at all Thus occurs either by mistake or quite willfully, as in the case of fantas And even the mind's con y and fiction. nection to what does exist is of a peculiar,
.
For what at first looked like a straightforward if unique, relation between the mind and various items in the world is complicated by the fact that the mind seems to have commerce with a great
,
s, is ultimately ontological too. Ontoland perhaps even Husserl should wait its turn until ogy, however, should not come first, but the study of mind has had its say.
restricted, realistic ontology that gets in the way of the philosophy ion generally. This view of mind, it is the ontological preoccupat s Theory (again in the is expressed in the last pages of Meinong
'
decisive one But there Findlay takes a further step, which is the for us. It is not only the preoccupation with the needs of a
4
. _
it
I .
' in
-
162
163
!
3
relation
theory of objects15 - follow his philosophy of mind taking seriously all those mental references to non-existent objects But
,
.
his
1963 version but N.B., several pages after Meinong is called 'the true phenomenologist') and used against Meinong himself. Meinong could be said to have made his ontology - in his own terms
, ,
reality nor anywhere else, but who can still be a valid object of
conscious reference, makes clear his refusal to ontologize non 21 But Husserl also sees that there are dangers in existent objects.
-
treating our references to the real world, e.g., in perception and forget perceptual judgments, as real relations. For we are likely to
that there is a distinction to be made between the objects of these references, tout cort, and such objects as they are referred to,
ly prior to them on which they necessarily depended' 16 Tor there to be a conscious reference or intention there must in some wide sense be something which that reference or intention is 'of If such objects do not exist they must subsist if they do not subsist they must have the extraontological status of Aussersein of being at least genuine subjects of predicates. But Findlay says, this whole line of argumentation is wrong for there is 'no valid move from the thought of X to the being (in any sense not defined in terms of thought) of X' 17 Meinong's ontological theory (or theory of objects) in which 'the golden mountain stood on a level with the Pennines the round square on a level with the Red S at quare 18
,
.
place Findlay suggests that this insight of Brentano's which ap peared only in 1911 might be traceable to a reading of Husserl L s ogische Untersuchingen (1901), a case of the pupil influencing his teacher 20 It was really Husserl who first saw clearly that intentionality should not be treated as a relation and who produced a lengthy study of the mind (especially the Fifth Investigations) based and Sixth on this conviction His discussion of the god Jupiter
,
which can take full account of intentionality and thus also of the objects of our mental references precisely as they present themselves to us whether as real, non-existent or absurd without supposing that the mind is thus relating itself to an independently existing or quasi existing world and thus without feeling the need to fit all these objects into an ontology. Findlay says that on this point Meinon teacher Brentano g lagged behind his who saw that intentionality was not a real relation at all but was merely 'relation-like';19 but in another
,
, ,
enough to keep afloat but the real damage is done to the philoso, ,
was hard
he wrote the Logical Investigations that this freedom from ontological commitment was the key to his success in that work; he without had described his investigations as 'phenomenological really defining that term, except to say that the investigations were
' '
rt of vow of approach to the study of mind and to take a so lear that this abstiontological abstinence: the epoche. But it is c nsistency in the nence had been practiced with considerable co
iple.
there, in the direction of Husserl. Even Meinong s one great the bold notion of Aussersein, which at least does idea', i.e.
'
,
Thus Findlay, at the end of the Meinong book, goes a it beyond Meinong and, it seems to me, though he does not say
step
of
by Findlay, at least in the precise sense in which Meinong intended it. If I am right in seeing
'
in Findlay's critique of Meinong's ontologizing tendency a de clear what the toward Husserl's epoche, I hope I have also ma
move
motivation for this move is, for both Findlay and Husserl: one
at all
one doubts the existence of the world, or for some other reason be caught believes that ontology is in itself a disreputable thing to s tend to doing; one does it because these convictions and concern
:
because
V
r
"
ft
164
165
!
i
1
obscure our view of the mind and its ways - and its intentional
objects. The epochemay close off some avenues
to open up
,
,
but it is intended
in all its richness and variety, all its subtle nuances of light and shade the life of conscious experience and the world
as experienced
.
philosophers, what Findlay describes (in Husserl) as 'a richness of categorial distinction such as we find in Aristotle', an awareness
of
'
in
which the direct influence of Husserl is less noticeable than in later works, and which deals with many topics Husserl hardly touched.
A phenomenological treatment may therefore be equated, in what, by persuasive definition we may call the 'true' sense of
,
Findlay may have learned some of this from Husserl, but it is more dy likely that he turned so strongly toward Husserl because he alrea
shared the latter
letter.
'
with an empirical treatment It is empirical, because it studies how things actually do come before us in
empirical'
,
,
...
'
experience
II
Findlay's use of the term 'empirical' to describe phenomenology, which echoes some of Husserl's own remarks is meant to stress the positive side of the enterprise, as against the negative coloring of such terms as 'epoche' abstinence' etc. One must look not only away from some things but also toward others. And what is more one must not only look toward these things but also be able to see them Husserl's way of presenting the epochs the phenomenological 'method' reduction* etc., seems to place him among those philosophers who are looking like Descartes, for the
,
Given the existence of this attitude, and its explicit cu l s epoche, through a methodological reminder like Husser
'
ltivation
'
'
what ication of course, is precisely can be accomplished? Its direct appl the philosophito what Findlay calls 'transcendental speleology predicament of the furnishings cal understanding of the human of our commerce with them. of the human cave and the manner Like Husserl, Findlay conceives of his phenomenology as an l in the sense that it catalogues eidetic enterprise: it is not empirica facts, but looks rather for structures, types under which the facts
'
,
'
'
follow
ogy
as a helpful warning to stifle one's ontologizing tendencies; it cannot by itself produce what is really essential to phenomenol,
s phenomenologifall.28 Findlay borrows liberally from Husserl lso criticizing them as he goes cal investigations, enriching and a
'
large regional distinctions of along. He is interested in exploring in terms of the different objects, such as bodies vs. minds,
encountered. Like Husserl, manners in which such objects are 29
that this sort of thing can be learned or propounded as a method. At best it is to be learned by example In any case it is this aliveness to the detail and texture of mental life which Findlay so admires in Husserl and which he exemplifies himself. There is a
,
,
.
it is necessary to talk of
h Abschattungen, so that the spatial horizons, of givenness throug ined in a single full givenness of an object can never be atta ndersns it is necessary to u experience; in the case of other perso tand how our fellows are encountered in and through their bodies,
"
"
PT.L
L1
166
167
but are nevertheless grasped according to categories which go beyond mere bodily existence Findlay also deals phenomenologically with matters which cut
.
spirit or attitude in relation to value, he explore this notion of made much of the notion in other contexts: his treatment of the natural attitude (naturliche Einstellung) in Ideen I which is fur'
'
,
across regional distinctions among types of objects, i.e. those matters which Husserl called 'logical' and treated in the Logical Investigations For example, we must distinguish in
,
.
in
general
which
as predication
develops in a theory of what he calls the 'variations of conscious light' or sense' 31 An important place in Findlay s philosophy of mind is also occupied by the distinction between the unfilfilled and the fulfilled intention i.e., between those cases in which what is intended is 'merely indicated, foreshadowed vestigially suggested, present merely in a reduced, attenuated or surrogative form' on the one hand; and those cases in which the object is 'fully and
'
.
We have mentioned only a small portion of the many topics and interests which Husserl and Findlay have in common, and only
'
repeatedly mentions Husserl's Erfahrung und Urteil as a place where these foreshadowings are described in detail But Findlay's highest praise is reserved for Husserl's treatment of the deepestlying most encompassing feat ure of conscious life i.e., the time.
which make
and he
ogical attitude of epoche is adopted, and of how these these vistas do ontology is studiously can be explored if the tendency to
avoided.
hiloso-
f because the epoche, as a reveals. This question imposes itsel it is, seems fundamental philosophical posture, as important as
' ,
valuation
should be mentioned which concern Findlay s value theory like Husserl First, Findlay seems to believe in a relation of Fundierung between valuative act s and those which are broadly termed 'cognitive'. As he says the real or possible facts or objects cognitively brought before us [are] the indispensable target or background for our evaluative responses'.34 Secondly in his actual treatment of
'
.
criticisms and corrections to make of Husserl's treatment. These are all points of close contact between the two philosophers in the actual practice of phenomenology. Two other points
,
to require some higher strangely unsatisfying by itself; it seems 37 some final assessment which will put it in its order comment bviously some deep philosoplace in a larger context. There are o This can be seen in the fact phical needs which it does not fulfill. that, once he did become aware of its peculiar features and began
to fashion it into a philosophical method, Husserl became so that he spent most of his preoccupied with its overall significance
'
It is further seen in the fact phenomenology rather than doing it. d enological metho that almost everyone who adopted the phenom
often to Husserl s dismay. went beyond it in one way or another,
'
in 'the general 'spirit' or attitude of mind lying behind our varying pronouncements'
rl, to my knowledge
,
did not
of the natural business of and Husserl point out, it is part orient itself toward objects consciousness to ontologize, that is, to to arrive at a correct that exist independently of it and to try
-
<:..*
168
169
awareness of such objects avoiding error. We all want to have things straight for ourselves no one wants to live in illusion To
,
,
.
cyan idealism - and this in a context where it is clear that these are two different things, the second being a higher order comment on the first.41
'
'
'
ogy-oriented philosophers of modern times tend to forget. But the normal person pursues his commerce with the unreal against the
backdrop of what for him, is real. Now the epoche consists
,
And clearly there are two different things involved here. The epoche, if it is really a simple bracketing of ontological commitment, a refusal to deal at all with the question of the ontological
status of the objects of experience, is not by itself idealistic. There are three features of Husserl s handling of the epoche which stand out, however. First, he insists on using it not just to deal with this or that object or type of object, but extends it to the whole 'world' of human experience - in fact, the notion of the world, as the
'
'
consciousness
suspension must go hand in hand with an ontological commitment of sorts: for if we accord merely intended status to some object we are at the same time according real status to the intention of
,
it; and if we then accord merely intended status to this intention we are again asserting the existence of an intention of it and so on. Findlay credits Husserl with seeing this a point clear to Descartes as it was not clear to Kant 38 Thus the very business of conducting a phenomenological description under the rubric of the suspension of ontological conviction requires that one ontological conviction remain intact namely, the commitment to the existence of the mind and its intentions
,
,
'
subject, or at least constructed out of simple parts. From here Husserl seems ot slide imperceptibly from the injunction not to world of objects - except consider objects - in fact, the whole
'
'
'
have
away from the methodological epocM or suspension of conviction which is preached in the later Ideas' as if the epoche itself was an idealistic thesis; whereas at another point he speaks of Husserl passing 'from a Cartesian suspension regarding the objective world to something that looks uncommonly like Berkel-
But this sort of thinking carries one dangerously into the vicinity of subjective idealism to which Husserl according to Findlay, finally succumbed Findlay makes some critical remarks on Husserl in this regard that are somewhat inconsistent He complains that the <?poc/te-posture for Husserl became 'fruzen into a permanent paralysis' 39 He says that Husserl should have been guided '
,
purposes of understanding the mind and experience, seems to transform itself into an ontological thesis; whereas it is quite clear, the examination of consciousness, and of as Findlay puts it, that
'
lication
must be said even if the whole world is investigated phenomenologically. Insofar as Husserl makes this move, it is clear that he, too, found d up ontologizthe epoche difficult to live with. He seems to en
heir givenness to t
rding
intention-
J>
Li*.
.
it.
J:
.
I -
is-
170
171
contact, with what is genuinely other than consciousness. But there is more involved than just this belief. The possibility that
Ideas sections 49 and 55 and of Formal and Transcendental Logic, section 99 which are taken by Findlay as evidence of
, ,
things might be other than they are given, points to a possible state in which they are given just as they are. The cawareness of what this possible state is or would be like is part of the business of
consciousness. Here Findlay is appealing directly to the Husserlian
theory of Evidenz: 'For Husserl... it is part of the notion of intentionality that there is a limiting state (ideal in the case of physical objects) in which the object as it is thought of or given ith, the object as simply fades out in, or achieves coincidence w
it in and for itself is'.45
but vehemently denies he is a subjective idealist and calls his idealism 'transcendental\ If this means that he is an idealist only within the brackets of the epoche then Husserl does not seem
course,
,
to be making any standard sort of philosophical claim, but only the tautology mentioned above But if this is all he is doing then
.
ject), but also the manner in which it contrives to hit in. The
order comment' on the phenomenological method at all Furthermore if this is the case,
.
epoche, whose purpose it is to focus our full attention on the sphere of the mind and its objects by isolating that sphere, cutting it off from its real or other relations to a pre-conceived reality,
at the same time shows how it is that consciousness, by its very with the world: nature, goes beyond its own sphere and meets up
As for Findlay he is clear that the phenomenological epoche requires a 'higher order comment' precisly the point on which Husserl is so unclear Since Findlay considers the idealist 'higher
.
itting h
be part and parcel of consciousness itself';44 that is to be conscious at all is to believe oneself in contact or at least capable of
,
,
r,
things have any being other than their givenness to consciousness After all Findlay himself made against Meinong the logical point that there is 'no valid move from the thought of X to the being (in any sense not defined in terms of thought) of X'.43 On the other hand Findlay sees in the practice of a phenomenological philosophy of mind and in some of its results some strong hints in the direction of realism For one thing the conviction that objects do have being other than their givenness to consciousness is even by Husserl without reservation taken to
.
On the one hand Findlay no doubt sees that his critical admonition to Husserl quoted above, can be turned around to apply to the realist: the examination of consciousness and of how things are given to consciousness goes with no implication that such
,
,
heory of Evidenz - the of those conscious processes related to the t fulfillment of intentions, the aiming at and the hitting of the
But doesn't all this beg the question? If the whole exam
ination
meant or thought to be given as it is. It seems henomein which consciousness meets up with the real world are, p
infer, from the fact to meet up with the real world. But can we it? Must we not still that it purports to do this, that it really does hought of X to the being say that there is no valid move from the t of X, even where the thought in this case claims the self-evident
'
'
'
' -
as-.
-
:S
v
1 ,
172
173
givenness of X? Isn't there always the logical possibility that X is otherwise or is not at all, or is nothing beyond our thought of
,
it?
reconstruct for itself the independent, public, compulsive order which its own existence and development presupposes, and to reconstruct it largely as it is in itself. For the world in which
'
But here we encounter one of Findlay's chief complaints intertwined with one of the deepest-lying characteristics of his philosophical Einstellung - and this time it is one that places him in a
,
rather different camp from Husserl If there is anything for which Findlay has no patience at all it is philosophers who make everything turn on a mere logical possibility To be sure, Findlay would say this logical possibility exists; but does it make sense
.
it suggests to those relying on the compulsive experiences it produces in them, is likely to be like its own structure. These propositions, repudiated by Kant as involving an unwarrantable
pre-established harmony between beliefs and things in themselves, would seem to be almost truistic applications of the
'
'
notions of the
'
to allow our philosophical thinking to be cramped by such a remote possibility? 47 For Findlay there are relations among concepts which are not those of strict implication and which thus leave
open the possibility of doubt and exceptions, but which are nevertheless compelling and reasonable guides to philosophical
Obviously, to this the idealist, or the skeptic, could still reply that instead of buttressing or certifying our belief in the external world, Findlay has simply produced another statement of that belief. It
is, after all, 'our idea' that the natural world serves this function.
belief, just as similar relations are reliable guides in our everuday dealings. At the everyday level concerning factual occurrences,
,
we speak of likelihood
for the
likelihood' or s assertions, at least without the shoring probability' to Findlay up of some of their presuppositions (the idea of an externally
'
'
produced structure of compulsive experience, for example), partly because I find it hard to dissociate these notions from a weighing
of evidence on either side of the question, which seems
inappro-
into other notions a natural implication of such notions and a natural favorableness and unfavorableness to other notions
,
,
is build upon such conceptual interrelations: Hegel 'made plain that our notions do carry with them a certain natural shading
,
Findlay
Findlay's thinking would be this: after a phenomenological analyd in particular sis of the workings of consciousness and belief, an of the manners in which they intend' to transcend their own sphere, we certainly have no argument that they fail to achieve this transcendence; and the appropriate and plausible higher order the beliefs that comment' on the epocMmay be simply to assent to we now understand better than we did before. While this version may seem to have a Moorean flavor, Findlay would insist that this
'
which it is not in our power to create or alter' 49 This is undoubtedly the sort of 'natural implication' or 'essen.
'
degree of independence among its parts and of manageable simplicity within them as to serve both as the source of our
,
compulsive experience of which sense experience is the ultimate form. It therefore presupposes as its appropriate complement the natural world in time and space... '50 This world has 'precisely that
,
higher order The phenomenological epocheis itself, of course, a comment' on the natural attitude, suspending its beliefs and commitments in order the better to understand them. If we find the epoche philosophically unsatisfying by itself, only a philoso'
sense. (Here he differs from Husserl, too, who was willing to ional, but non-philoconcede even the phenomenologists an occas sophical, lapse into the natural attitude during their off-hours).
may be said to
fort.
r:
.-
'
m
i
'
.
!
1
..
174
175
This step which Findlay takes beyond the epoche now permits him to treat the intentionality of mind and its objects with a different slant and with greater flexibility than was possible for
Husserl. Though there are large tracts of what we might call ure' phenomenological analysis in Findlay's writings there are also sections in which a sort of mixed attitude is adopted an approach in which we see both things-as-they-are-presented to-consciousness and things-as-they-are in which we 'stand hesitantly in the
,
'
doorway of the intentional cage seeing the world as it presents itself from its vantage point and yet continuing to evaluate that vision from an outside critical standpoint' 52 This alternative of constantly confounding and mixing categories 53 produces a
,
.
'
'
One way of dealing with them, of course, as we have seen, is to try to eliminate the intentional sphere altogether in favor of a realistic metaphysics and an extensional logic. Another way is to
move toward idealism. But a third way is to face these contrad-
'
my brother' since only 'some of the things predicable of the real object can be
out in all possible clarity their contradictory character. This is what must be done by the mixed approach Findlay recommends
and practices, an approach that has all the truth and the life in
'
'
predicated of the intentional object that is 'identified' with it' and so on. And it is not only the intentional objects of mental
,
54
for
references that come in for this 'mixed' treatment but the mind itself, especially in Psyche and Cerebrum. Here Findlay explores
,
the antinomies and contradictions on the one hand and the truth 59 and the life on the other
.
the behavioral
-
the phenomenologi-
We must be acted upon by the world and be reactive to it like any other worldly object but to be consciously alive we must have a world which is there for us, given to us in a vast variety of manners lights and guises, and we must in addition have a
,
in order to be effectively in the world and in order for the world to be effectively there for us.55
sure in the Logical Investigations, that Husserl imposed the proOnce tective brackets of the epoche upon his whole enterprise.
attitude'
"
It is thus possible employing this mixed approach 'by a vast amount of poised tight rope walking as strained and unnatural as the abyss of nonsense which it avoids to talk in a philosophically acceptable manner about intentional inexistence and intentional
, ,
-
they were imposed, Husserl was unwilling to remove them, w left him in the odd position we have tried to describe, seemingly
undecided between an unsatisfying methodological neutrality and
'
hich
n.
f describing the a swing toward idealism. The most positive way o isted in by Husserl is philosophical posture inaugurated and pers that it makes possible what he often called a working philoso'
55
XJi
ft
1
-
me
.
.
J
.
ft;.-.
r
.
3
i.
if-
is,
v.
Is
::v
.
7;
176
NOTES
177
phy, a concrete method of description and analysis which simply turns its back on the old and perhaps unresolvable debates between realism and idealism. But certain problems receive short shrift or are unrecognizably transformed by this approach. For example, the problem of the emergence of man's rational consciousness in a cosmos that antedates him which is a legitimate problem for Findlay once he steps beyond the epoche, would become another phenomenological investigation for Husserl: what is the sense of this problem for the transcendental subject what kind of experience and scientific inference does its formu,
A bbreviations
MT Meinongs's Theory of Objects and Values. 2nd Edition, Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1963.
72.
it
by itself, while it may help clarify them can neither resolve them nor make them disappear Findlay sees this sees that the phenomenological epoche re.
LI
1
York:
quires a 'higher order comment', and this leads him in the di-
as we have seen. Which is not to say that he stops there, since it is precisely this move together with his phenomenological appreciation for the mental, which brings him into the realm of contradiction This calls forth yet a higher order comment, for Findlay while he may savor contradiction does not simply luxuriate in it as do some philosophers but must also pass
,
rection of realism
TC 3
LI 4
DC 15.
DC 24-5.
DC 19. MT 1.
beyond it. By the time he reaches this stage it is clear that he has bid farwell to Husserl and taken up with even more congenial philosophical companions such as Hegel Plato and Plotinus.
,
,
11. VI 36.
Anyone who knows Findlay's work will know that he revels with
12. It seems impossible to read a lot of Findlay and d particularly his use of similes. trying, however feebly, to imitate his style an
his writing.
13. AA 242.
14 VI 42
But what a relief it would be to the dreariness of most philosophical prose if more of us could even remotely approximate the elegance and humor of
15. Meinong's categories of objects, as indicating in the traditional sense, if not in his own terminology, ontological categories.
16. MT 344.
17. MT 343.
18. DC 31. 19. MT 344.
J;
:)::
"
Ik
*
!
_
_.
T
.
. : v w- "*
1
.
J,
178
23. LI 249.
24. MT 348 25. DC 42
27. LI 5.
. .
26. DC 42-3
28. DC 46
29. VI 16
31. VI 57
.
30. AA 190
.
32. VI 51
33. TC passim
34. VI 46
35. VI 24
.
.
36.
37.
usserliana: EdmundHusserl GesammelteWerke (The Hague Martin DClf 9 1950 V01 Paragraphs 27-32> Vo1' IV, paragraph 49.
t
. .
38. LI 10
39. DC 25
40. LI 10
.
41. DC 78 This is also the interpretation found in Findlay's most recent criticism
,
ol Husserl s idealism which came to my attention after writing this paper: Phenomenology and the Meaning of Realism' in Phenomenology and Philosophical Understanding, ed. E Pivcevic Cambridge University Press,
.
Hermeneutic philosophy understood as a general theory of human understanding is associated with the names of Paul Ricoeur and Hans-Georg Gadamer. Ricoeur and Gadamer developed their hermeneutic philosophies in relative independence of one another and their theories first emerged in rather different forms: Gadamer's in 1960 in Wahrheit und Methode, a historically presented conception applied primarily to the practice of the humanistic disciplines; Ricoeur's in 1965 in De I'interpretation, an essay on
, , ,
42. LI 10
45. LI 10
46. AA 237
47. A discussion of this topic in Values and Intentions is the occasion for one of my favonte Fmdlayisms: Togicai possibility like the meditative Celts, " mereIy POetical 0r Phosophical importance, when dr T?7
,
48. Ct AA m 7f
49. HR 79
.
21 I
.
eutical theory also descends from Husserl. But while Husserl exercises some positive influence, he also provides a foil for hermeneutics. In many respects, Husserl's thought, in its overall structure and basic themes seems to represent to both Gadamer and Ricoeur the most elaborately articulated version of the philo,
In the following essay I would like to examine some of the basic ideas of the hermeneutical philosophers in the light of this opposition to HusserPs classical phenomenological position. I think
that some hermeneutical criticisms of Husserlian phenomenology
are justified and some are not. But my purpose is not to adjudicate between two schools of thought; nor is it to produce some hybrid
between the two Rather, I think that an examination of hermen.
.y
r.
*5
eutical ideas from this point of view can bring to light some of their underlying presuppositions which have not yet been seen. In
f
vi
' J. V
'
; rAut
..
180
181
particular, it will be seen that hermeneutics shares with phenomenology, and indeed most modern philosophy an unexamined basic concept that it has not yet acknowledged
,
.
It is primarily in its capacity as heir to the Cartesian tradition that phenomenology comes under the hermeneutical attack
.
tig] as the affair 'itself, the affair complex or state-of-affairs itself'...'2 Self-evidence, says Husserl, is 'an 'experiencing' of something that is, and is thus; it is precisely a mental seeing of
'
'
enology centers on two closely related doctrinal emphases: one is a certain elevated even pretencious conception of the capacity of human knowledge expressed in the notion of philosophy as rigorous science; the other is its focus on subjectivity as the beginning and end point of all knowledge Against this view,
,
,
.
hermeneutics stresses above all the finitude of the human con dition and the resultant finitude of human knowledge, even selfknowledge.
,
With its stress on finitude and its antisubjectivism hermeneutical philosophy participates in the general anti Cartesianism of
-
burdened by a one-sidedness, incompleteness, and uncertainty that makes it a mere presumption, not an actuality. Above all, it is burdened by inclarified presuppositions or prejudices. Only in the sphere of reflective self-awareness are such defects not in in principle to be found. Only here is the ideal of self-evidence
same
forms of life and in Quine's ontological relativity. Everywhere, it seems, it is thought to be important as it was for the early figures of eighteenth-century empiricism to curb the pretensions of hu,
,
principle fulfillable. In this sphere, furthermore, the structure o all other spheres, and indeed the reason for their defectiveness ized. with respect to self-evidence, can be self-evidently recogn Hermeneutic theory oppose each of these two elements in turn. Against Husserl's phenomenological theory of knowledge is ranged a theory of human comprehension derived from Heidegger's
'
man knowledge
little to the tenor of the message whether the source of man s limitations lies in his role as language-user or his embeddedness in a historical tradition In fact, these two notions at bottom come to the same thing Confining ourselves here however, to the hermeneutical cri. .
notion of Verstehen, a term which now takes over the central place occupied by consciousness in Husserl s thought. Understanding is
fundamental
tude is exemplified in his understanding. It is a mistake to suppose that the one-sidedness, incompleteness, and lack of certainty that
is characteristic of our understanding can be overcome. These features, which Husserl correctly saw and identified, are not accidental but quite necessary characteristics of our encounter with the world. Above all, it is a mistake to think that the
tique of phenomenology let us seek out those key elements of Husserl's classical position which, in the eyes of these critics, seem central and vulnerable I have already suggested that there are two such elements First, Husserl presents a theory of the essence of human knowledge or understanding whose centerpiece is the theory of Evidenz which I prefer to translate as 'self-evidence'. The measure and aim of knowledge in its preeminent form
,
our compre-
grounds judgment in the preeminent sense In a case of self-evidence 'the affair [die Sache], the complex (or state) of affairs
,
?
r
V
,
it
ft
Li
J:
St
i.
3C'
:'
.
Ti ;v.-
182
183
draw the proper consequences of what he himself saw The theory of self-evidence is incompatible with this view of human understanding. And against the second element of Husserl's classical con-
tanding is no exception to the conditions of human comprehension. In fact according to Heidegger's theory, all understanding is self-understanding the projection of one's own possibilities.
,
,
to do its job. For an instrument transforms what it works upon, hese and a medium may distort the image of what appears. Once t
doubts have been raised, we wish we could somehow dispense with the instrument or medium, or at least subtract from the final
product is distorting effects. But, Hegel reminds us, the instrument or medium we are talking about is precisely knowledge, and if we dispense with it or subtract from its effects, we are worse off than before: for now the object is unknown, and rather than a direct, undisturbed grasp of it we are left with no grasp at all.
other.
Let us now turn to the theory of the structure of human understanding that lies at the base of this hermeneutical critique
and serves as the source of the notion of finitude One of the first things that the expositions of this theory usually say is that the structure of human understanding is by no means to be construed as a kind of barrier or obstruction which stands between the
.
What is wrong according to Hegel is the original metaphor what calls itself fear through which we conceive of knowledge: 13 of error reveals itself as fear of the truth Something like this theme has been taken up by post-HeidegRicoeur. Prior gerian expositors of hermeneutical theory, such as is to the notion of finitude, which is a negative concept, he says, the 'entirely positive' notion of the ontological conditions of
'
'
'
(In
interpreting
'
,
says
a notion he takes over from Gadamer, who in turn adapted it from Count York von Wartenburg.15 York was speaking of our know
something
interested in and can know about history because we ourselves are historical. This, of course, is the point on which Heidegger draws in his own discussion of history, historicity, and historiography.
that is
entity...'.
be understood - we say that they have meaning [Sinn] But that which is understood taken strictly is not the meaning but the
.
(Zwischenreich)12 standing between me and the object of my understanding: rather the latter is accessible to me only as having
,
he
Here Heidegger is essentially repeating a Hegelian point. One recalls the masterful way in which Hegel, in the first paragraph
.1
t refer As Ricoeur points out, the concept of belonging does no t 17 Rather, it means merely to a relation between subject and objec hat for the that subject and object belong to the same sphere, t
.
'
Hi
i
.
J
.
XI
tei.->-.5
184
185
knower the object to be known belongs in advance, within a horizon of familiarity. It is in virtue of this horizon which
,
ledges in one passage, in the concept of the a priori,18 Kant even comes close to saying about nature what Vico says about history:
that we can know it because we make it. This does not mean, of course, that we create it in the sense of giving it existence, but we do determine, through a priori concepts, what counts as nature, and thus we make sense of it.19 Again, while human finitude plays
and partakes of it, that the object is rendered accessible to him; without this it would be utterly strange would be strictly speaking meaningless. Because it has meaning for him in advance he can
,
This, then, is the positive hermeneutical concept of understanding, of which the negative notion of finitude is only the reverse
side. But here we might ask how do we pass from the observe to
,
a horizon which escapes our ability to know and defines the limits
of our reason.
the reverse? Does the conception of human understanding we have just been sketching really imply, in any sense, the idea of finitude normally associated with it by the hermeneutical philosophers? Linking this conception with Hegel as we just did, causes us to wonder. Indeed if we examine more closely the idea of belonging
, , ,
a few more historical precedents which not only make these ideas seem less innovative than they originally appeared but also raise
,
manner of hermeneutical philosophy. It may be that the object a person, a social event, a text, even a natural event is accessible
-
doubts as to the link between this and the notion of finitude Consider, for example Plato's theory of knowledge. Here it is
.
precisely because man's soul belongs within the same sphere as the
forms and is not merely confined to the temporal world, that he
can come to know them If there is finitude or limitation here to
.
one-sided, incomplete, this is because there is another possible sphere, another horizon, to which the object also belongs while
horizon' suggests perspective, of course, and we could say there is another possible perspective on the object.
we do not. The term
'
man's ability to know true reality it derives not from his belong,
ing to the world of the forms but rather from the extent to which he is not entirely of that world The horizon of familiarity, too,
,
.
Man can
i
tation is possible. Furthermore, in order to make the hermeneut ative interprecal point significant, it must be said that this altern
-
tation is somehow closed to us. The Vorgriff which we bring to the situation rules out an alternative framework which may be
brought to bear on the object by others or under other circumstances. Thus our situation limits our perspective, rules out our
knowledge of history History for Vico is the only thing that we can fully know and the reason is that we have made it ourselves. Thus, unlike nature it belongs fully to the human sphere and its
.
inner workings are accessible to us in a way that nature's are not. In modern philosophy of course, the notion of the horizon of
,
The idea of the finitude of human comprehension, then, f the horizon of rives, not merely from that of belonging, or o
de-
familiarity, but rather from the notion of alternative - and pert haps mutually exclusive - spheres of belonging or horizons. Bu
..
.8
ft .
r SCj
ft
n
.
186
187
must be the same object which is subject to different interpretations or perspectives. It is our grasp of this object that is shown to be limited by the consideration of another possible grasp of the same object. If the alternative perspective in question were totally
unrelated to my own without a common object then it would
,
,
make so sense to say that its possibility is what limits my understanding of this object A common object, then with a possible
.
open to infinitely many interpretations. But it could be said that these infinitely many interpretations are precisely what define the infinite intellect Kant was speaking about. To be sure, the ideal completion of interpretations which would take in the whole object would not be brought under the unity of one intellect, i.e., synthesized in the manner in which we unify the various strands of our own knowledge. But the point is this: the finitist thesis of
variety of different but equally correct perspectives on it required if we are to make the transition in question
.
is
What does this in turn, commit us to? A certain notion of the object. As we said before this object may be another person or his actions a historical or social event or entity a text, possibly
,
,
,
beyond the grasp of the finite intellect, which corresponds in some way to a totality - Inbegriff- of interpretations, and against which any given interpretation is measured in order to be declared finite.
There is some resistance to admitting this among the hermeneu-
even a natural object or event But in any case we are saying that
.
the object is not exhausted by the understanding we have of it It may be accessible to us in virtue of belonging within the horizon
.
to which we ourselves belong But it has an identity and a set of possible determinations which transcend this horizon determinations that may be accessible to others under other circums
.
tances. What these circumstances are of course, and what it is about the object that is known we cannot say. But the object in this sense serves as in Kant's notion of the limiting concept to
,
knowledge of nature, it is senseless to speak of a completed knowledge of history; and precisely for this reason the talk of an object in itself, corresponding to this [historical] inquiry, can
20
curb the pretensions of our own understanding As in Kant's case the notion of object as limiting concept goes
.
hand in hand with a concept of the alternative perspective. In Kant's case of course, the latter is the intellectus archetypus a mind of intellectual intuition that knows the object as it is in itself,
,
,
But Gadamer must see that without such a conception, in order to be consistent, hermeneutical theory would have to give up such
notions as Uncomplete
one-sided
'
'
relative
'
'finite
'
that is, presumably in all its possible determinations including those that are known to us The finite intellect is measured against
,
conceived
sophy shares with HusserPs phenomenology and indeed most of modern philosophy a fundamental conception of human understanding that lies so deep and is so all-determining that we ought
But how different is this really, from the Kantian conception? For the finitist presumably, no single perspective is able to exhaust the object But this suggests two possibilities Either the
,
.
important than the concept of the intervening medium criticized by Hegel, and is in fact shared by Hegel. Sellars has spoken of the myth of the given in empiricism, but this in my view is only
one version of a deeper myth we might call 'the myth of the
'
.
object is exhaustibly determinable by a certain number of perspectives, which taken together, would constitute complete knowledge of it; or alternatively, the object is inexhaustible - i e is
,
,
.
.,
siv
7
'
in
Us.-
,-.:.
188
189
ists, as an unmediated datum or clear and distinct perception; or it may stand at the end of a long process of experience whether
,
individually or historically conceived as in the case of full-blown Hegelian idealism - what Gadamer calls 'total mediation' To
,
.
mention another, perhaps more important division that between the gnostics and the skeptics of modern philosophy the measure may be attainable and actually attained or it may be unattainable. But running through all these struggles and divisions is the shared presupposition which underlies each position and enables it to make each of the assertions it makes The hermeneutical position
,
has no meaning for us, how can it be anything at all for us, and this how can it be something that we turn to and try to understand? Perhaps we can avoid this paradox if we say that nothing ever comes to us uninterpreted in some way. It would be in keeping with Heidegger s analysis, I believe, to say that the object is first
'
we are discussing in the context of these struggles is perhaps the most sophisticated of all The very thing that renders the object
,
,
.
identical between the new and the old, that which the new interpre-
Thus this first etwas - to speak with Kant we might call it an etwas = x - remains as a sort of indispensable placeholder, and
of the position and its articulation upon this it is for the most part
unrecognized or unacknowledged But it does come through. In
.
What are we to say about the myth of the measure, or the myth of the etwas = x? We have suggested that it explicity or implicitly underlies modern philosophy and that for hermeneutical philoso-
Attention is
ith
understand it as something; it is what we try to bring close to us and render comprehensible In this sense it is prior to our under.
standing it is the pregiven focus of our interpretative endeavor. At the same time it is this etwas, somehow identical that can be
,
rendered accessible in
.
interpretation this etwas seems to be without content and perhaps even meaning for us This is the case if we accept the principle that
,
.
a different way perhaps to others at another time To be sure as lying somehow both prior to and beyond our
something is meaningful only as something. This raises a paradox which turns out to be a version of Plato's in the Meno: if this etwas
ft
1
' -
interpretation is possible'. The reason for this is, of course, that ience. this possibility is evinced constantly in our everyday exper Perhaps there is something like a completely naive and straightfor
'
.
>
.-ill
::
: 3if
-
.4
u
-
190
191
ward grasp of an object in our experience such that no question of alternative interpretations arises or indeed of interpretation in
,
any sense, i.e., where the object is simply there for us with a univocal and unquestioned sense. But in most cases the fact that another interpretation is possible is not something we need to be
,
But there is an aspect of the situation we have been describing that is just as important and to which the hermeneutical philosophers seem to pay too little attention. The encounter with another interpretation sets up a tension, a certain problem to be resolved. In a way the matter is simplified if I just reject the other's interpretation and maintain that I am simply right. But if 1 grant a certain validity to the other s interpretations, I am at the same
'
such an object can present itself right from the start as ambiguous
,
.
within the confines of our own experience we encounter them all the more in social interaction The meaning of an event is not
,
.
time acknowledging that my own is 'just' another interpretation, and this is not a recognition with which I can remain comfortable. In some ways this is like the hermeneutical situation that Gadamer speaks of, where the object in its strangeness calls for understanding, or Ricoeur's point of departure with the double meaning or
maneuvers,
or even violence*
plurivocity of the text. But with the actual encounter, not just with the object to be interpreted, but with another interpretation of the object, a special sort of problem is created. A certain critical distance has opened up between the object-for-me, to put it in Hegelian terms, and the object-in-itself. The very act of according
course, a difference between the situation I have just been describing and the thesis of the hermeneutical philosophers. While the other interpretations' we have just been describing are encounter'
even a preliminary validity to the other interpretation initiates a kind of comparison between the object and my interpretation of it. This comparison has the purpose of bringing me back into accord with the object, of restoring the straightfroward givenness
ed within our own experience hermeneutics seems to be speaking of another interpretation which lies somehow beyond my capacities even for encounter I can only encounter the interpretations
,
.
by rejecting my interpretation in favor of the other's, rejecting his and reinstating my own, rejecting both in favor of a third, or
combining the two into a third.
It is during this process that one's prejudices come in for critical scrutiny. Even the hermeneutical philosophers, starting with Heidegger
,
tar as a condition for recognizing our very disagreement. Still, the hermeneutical thesis can legitimately draw upon this experience of disagreement for support Just as there are other interpretations that I actually encounter so there may be still others that I do not and indeed cannot encounter in virtue of my limited historical
.
sitions. In Heidegger we find this expressed as follows: speaking of the 'positive possibility of the most primordial kind of know-
situation
ations will put on the events of the present day are in principle closed to me And the hermeneutical theisis requires not the existence of different interpretations beyond my experience, but
. .
last, and constant task is never to allow our fore-knowing, foresight, and
he scientific theme t
:
..
.
-1
192
193
in particular cases or in particular domains. But even the description of the ideal has its variations in his writings. Early in his
career, he was content simply to state the ideal, to define that
jection, not the extrapolation of goals of the will, not the arrangement of things according to wishes or prejudices or suggestions of those in power; rather it remains something
he stressed not only this ideal endpoint but also the manner in
which it functions in the life of consciousness and how it structures
mensu-
the variations and maneuvers through which the understanding is drawn in its endeavor to reach it. This is so to the extent that, in
the later work, the 'theory of self-evidence becomes the de*
is well
tinguishing legitimate from illegitimate prejudices and even true prejudices through which we understand, from false preju,
'
dices, through which we misunderstand 24 The problem with Gadamer's theory and Heidegger's too is that they tell us precious little about how these distinctions are to be made and how the Anmessung an die Sache is to be achieved
'
.
But let us recall that we are inquiring here into the validity of the hermeneutical thesis that 'another interpretation is possible'.
But even putting this crucial problem aside they also fail to
,
recognize the point of all these maneuvers. What is the point? Surely it is not to escape the 'mediation via interpretation alto'
the point is to reach a conclusion of the process in which there is no longer a gap between the object for me and the object
,
terms
her
thesis is correct, we never come to an end of this process in our her interpretations would experience, i.e., to that place where all ot
In another sense, however, we do encounter the fully determinlly determined object - in ed object - or rather the idea of the fu
of
course,
and the given is ever actually reached, or even that it can be reached. We have described it rather, as a conception or an idea that draws us on in our encounter with the object as a guiding
,
,
ncounter it the very process of understanding itself. But we e precisely as the regulative principle which drives our inquiry on
194
195
its way. The fully determined object is not, strictly speaking, something we encounter in experience, but is rather a structural feature of our experience itself which gives sense and direction to what we do. The legitimation derives, then, not merely from engaging in the process of interpretation, but from reflecting on its structure. And this means that such legitimation is not empirical but eidetic and transcendental in precisly Husserl s sense. It is eidetic because it is the recognition of a structure common to all interpretive processes; and it is transcendental in that what is recognized - the presence of the fully determined object as regulative principle - is a condition of the possibility of any interpretive
'
phenomenological epocM is not the turn says, the turn to meaning. What is genuinely discovered is not the various forms and functions. solitary ego but intentionality in its
ibe
he
there is no reason to suppose that the self-evidence achieved are any more infallible or unassailable than any other sort.
process.
What I have been saying amounts to the claim that something like the Husserlian notion of self-evidence is after all - though perhaps not admittedly - involved in hermeneutical theory. But
in one sense I would claim that Husserl is more sophisticated. For while hermeneutical theory seems tacitly committed in a straightforward way to kind of in-itself lying beyond the grasp of
our interpretations, Husserl sees this in-itself as an ideal and transcendental structure Operating as he does within the epoche,
.
Husserl does not commit himself ontologically on this in-itself beyond all understanding Does this make his theory more idealistic? Or simple less dogmatic? I would like to turn now to the second phase of the hermeneutical critique of phenomenology which I think can be discussed
.
This
of the hermeneutical critique have been critical of the hermeneutical approach in this case I am more in agreement with it. There
,
is some justification for saying that Husserl moved away from this
Cartesian position in his later works as many commentators have
,
tially Kantian motive of finding the transcendental structure which makes experience possible The true accomplishment of the
.
if
ft
. (?
t
.
<
196
NOTES
1
. Hans-Georg Gadamer Wahrheit und Methode 2nd edition J.C.B. Mohr Tubingen, 1965; Paul Ricoeur De 1*interpretation Editions du Seuil
,
,
IL9. The Future Perfect: Temporality and Priority in Husserl Heidegger and Dilthey
,
1965
April 1975.
,
to a symposium on 'Phenomenology and Hermeneutics held at the Western Division Meeting of the American Philosophical Ass ociation in Chicago
'
,
,
.
Paris,
. Edmund Husserl Cartesian Meditations (trans Dorian Cairns) Nijhoff, The Hague 1960, p. 10. Martinus
,
3
4
Ibid,, p. 12 Ibid., p. 10
,
6.
7. 8 9
.
. Martin Heidegger Being and Time (trans John Macquarrie and Edward Robinson) Harper and Row, New York 1962, p. H. 150. (Pages preceded by 'H.' refer to the original German pa gination in the margins)
,
.
we
10. Ibid
11. Ibid
p. H. 151.
term is legitimate in the historical sense even for Dilthey since he was already under the influence of HusserPs Logical Investi-
12. Ibid
13. G
WF
.
Hegel
den Geisteswissenschaften in the years 1905 to 1910 a text which contains some of his most interesting and sustained reflections on
,
the temporal character of experience.2 HusserPs lectures on internal time-consciousness of course, were composed in this same
,
88.
'Phenomenology
and Hermeneutics'
.
15. Wahrheit und Methode p. 247 and note 16. Ibid p. 245. Cf. Being and Time p. H. 153. 17. 'Phenomenology and Hermeneutics' p. 88.
,
.
period.3 And when Heidegger developed his own theory of temporality in Being and Time in the 1920,s, he was very much under
,
21. Being and Time, p H. 153. 22. Wahrheit und Methode p. 247. 23. Ibid p. 261. 24. Ibid p. 282.
.
B 125.
namely not *in itself but 'for us\ The focus is not simply time,
,
we directly encounter and experience it. And it is assumed that any ability we have to conceptualize time will ultimately be based on
this original preconceptual encounter.
,
the same theme and approach it in largely the same way, and though they come to very similar results, these three thinkers diverge on one important point: the order of priority assigned to the dimensions of time My concern here is not the historical
.
f.
::
198
199
introduce the problem by talking in a general way about how to deal with time phenomenologically In the second third and
.
According to this phenomenological interpretation, the two series, A and B, are not simply alternative approaches to time; instead, objective time (B) is grounded in subjective time (A). Not only can we say that the B-series can be thought but never
by one, such that their difference of opinion will become clear. And in the fifth part I shall attempt first to explain and then to
overcome this difference
.
experienced. We can also say that the mathematised B series, as useful as it is as a representation of time, is only possible by subtracting from it what was to be explained, namely its temporal
-
time in a preliminary was by saying that it deals with time not in itself but 'for us' We must note further that this approach brings
.
absolute does not disappear but turns up in another guise. The absolute objective order is replaced by the absolute subject, or rather the absolute temporal position of the subject. Just as, in
is the
In this sense, the three-dimensional, subjective time-scheme seems to lead directley to the notion of an order of priority. One
of the three dimensions of time seems privileged, namely the
in several ways. First, present. This privilege can be expressed nt seems to be the continuing the analogy with space, the prese center or focus around which past and future are oriented. But
all 'points' in time are of equal value, their temporality consists in their relations to other points - relations which they possess absolutely i.e. independently of the 'observer* Such relations are
,
.
series).5 This second scheme can be called objective and objective time can be compared to objective space: time is homogeneous,
,
another.
characterized by using the number-series such that in principle each position is assigned a number: t| t2, etc. In this scheme it is neither necessary nor even possible to say of any point in time that it is past present or future. The points simply succeed one
,
, ,
Being' and hat is being-present' seem equivalent. Epistemological, because w our cognition while present is or at least can be directly given to accessible only through the what is past and what is future are indirect and less reliable channels of memory and expection or
The phenomenological point to be made is that the succession of numbers is not eo ipso a temporal series; in order to be so it must be run through as in the act of counting an act which of course requires a counter In counting the latter is always 'situated* at one point looking forward and backward to the other
,
prediction respectively.
II
then,
ing of the larly phenomenological; indeed it reflects the think k to Augustine and beyond. philosophical tradition extending bac
r
'
201 200
whereas we normally live only in the present. To be conscious at all is to be in past, present and future at once Not that the three
'
'
concepts that go far beyond the traditional approach. The first of these is undoubtedly the phenomenological approach itself, which achieves one of its earliest formulations in these lectures.6 And one of the primary features of this approach is that it supposedly goes beyond both ontology and epistemology in the traditional sense, or rather, transforms both sorts of questions into phenomenological ones. That is, the question of what is or is not, as well as the question of what can be known and how, are absorbed into the question of how something is given in consciousness. Thus the ontological and the epistemological senses of the priority of the
present, sketched above, would not interest Husserl as such.
differ-
s mistake). On the contrary, temporality ence (this was Bergson consists precisely in the fact that they are differentiated. To be in
all three at once
'
is not to be in all of them in the same way. Rather, their differentiation is what constitutes a field which ience something temporal, somemakes it possible for us to exper is, something that thing that is in time or takes time - that
'
happens.
As for the content of this something, here too the three di-
The other principal feature of Husserl's analysis that must be mentioned, of course, is the concept of retention and protention, or the distinction between primary and secondary memory and
tone is what it is for us only in a melody, the presently sounding the context of the elapsed and the still expected tones. The tion, or an event, is temporal object, whether a melody, an ac l phases are given as depenexperienced as a whole whose tempora
dent parts.
with that between long-term and short-term memory or expectation. The distinction is qualitative rather than quantitative. The content of retention and protention belong just as necessarily to the givenness of what is presently experienced - e g the sounding tone - as the spatial background belongs to the givenness of an
.
far the theory goes beyond the suffice, I hope, to show how it accomplishes. While it traditional approach and how much
ill
nt. Though past and future maintains the priority of the prese
'
object seen. Space and time are originally the horizons of experience, and it is as horizons that past and future surround and
set off the present extending in their different ways from the
,
ly given, they still belong inseparably to the field of what is direct ent which is the have only the status of a background for the pres s earliest to the latest of Husserl central or zero-point. From the nunc stans, lebendige Gegenwart meditations on time, the now ich the river of remains the primal source, the fountain from wh
~
determinate, immediate background into the indefinite and indeterminate 'distance' Secondary memory or recollection, is quite different: here something from this wide horizon of the past singles itself out for re-presentation Primary memory belongs to
.
the temporality of the present and belongs to all experience. Secondary recollection is a special kind of experience in which we relive in the present what is not present A crucial aspect of this theory is that in the original experience of time the three dimensions - past present, future - are not
.
in in Being and Time Heidegger's theory of the temporality of Dase s conception than the terminolhas more in common with Husserl
'
simply ranged alongside one another as if one or the other could be lacking. The primary future is not something we gaze into from
,
time to time
if Heidegger avoids some o ogy would lead us to expect. Even sciousology, such as con the basic terms of Husserlian phenomen can say first of all that both ness, experience, and others, one In d but a lived temporality. theories concern not a conceptualize d as a succession of both cases, two-dimensional time, conceive
r
v.
'
.
r -*
202
203
now-points
three-dimensional temporality Heidegger's conception of the redetermination such that the three ekstases are to be seen as inseparable aspects of a whole Given this similarity which is but one manifestation of the
.
ess. Anticipatory resoluteness is authentic existence, and it is here that the future, as finite, manifests its priority. My existence is
lation among the three dimensions of time (he calls them ekstases) also reminds us of Husserl Both speak of a mutual or reciprocal
.
truly my own - and thus authentic - when I acknowledge its finiteness. I do this by living it in the light of a future which finds
its closure in death.
influence of the older upon the younger colleague, it is all the more
surprizing to find Heidegger stating with emphasis that it is not the present but the future which should be considered privileged.9 With this claim Heidegger runs counter not only to his mentor but
also, as we saw to most of the philosophical tradition he mean by it?
,
.
It is clear that Heidegger is opposed not only to a conception of time as a succession of now-points but to any conception which
What can
The priority of the future derives from the projective character of Dasein. This character can be seen as corresponding roughly to Husserl's concept of intentionality Things have meaning, the world has meaning because Dasein projects their being that is,
.
existence. The privilege of the present, which we find in Husser and most of the philosophical tradition, is not simply a collective ical mistake; it is the expression of a pre- and extra-philosoph tendency to deny the finitude of being and of time. If we found
it natural and obvious, as we began this discussion, to accord
happens only insofar as Dasein projects itself, i.e. grasps itself in terms of its possibilities In this sense Dasein is as Heidegger says, always ahead of itself 10 For Dasein according to Heidegger,
.
priority to the present, and were able to support this view with ontological and epistemological arguments, we were doing nothing, Heidegger would say, but giving further expression to this
traditional prejudice.
But this
IV
it is necessary to refer to the distinction between authenticity and inauthenticity For us mortals the future is not an infinitely extended open horizon. It finds its closure in death where future possibility of being and non-being coincid This finitude of our
,
future
burrow to the fondations, the ultimate building blocks of spiritual life. At bottom life is a flux of experiences {Erlebnisse) whose
'
Aufb***** m/
*- -
and Heidegger
The future and our temporality in general are genuinely lived and authentically understood by contrast if we acknowledge their
,
to flee from it
in the fullness of our reality' and from here we regard le past.12 As the future of possibilities and passively the unalterab live
finitude
is not necessarily to achieve what Dilthey calls the t life'.13 Even though the experiences that make up life do no
coherence of
as Heideg-
a coherent whole
tanding
,
ger says, we are capable of fusing past, present and future into
This process is not one of conceptual undershowever; Heidegger describes it as a resolve or resoluten-
rts of a temporal simply succeed one another, but are lived as pa is whole is not thereby whole, the larger sense or significance of th available to us. To achieve such an understanding of life we need f three basic 'categories reflexion (Besinnung) which avails itself o
-: ..
204
205
disappointments; only sober, subsequent reflexion can find meaning in it. In a more modest but similar way, the advantages of
but the
Col-
The 'categories of thought'14 are value purpose and significance or meaning and they function according to the temporal
,
are depressing, if not paradoxical. At the beginning of the Aufbau, and elsewhere, Dilthey had advanced the view that the
individual knows himself in the same way that others know him,
only in memory when we grasp and view together elapsed portions of the course of our lives.
,
namely through his actions, his expressions, the effects of his life on others.16 The temporal interpretation of the categories of understanding seems to take a further and more radical step: The
individual will never be able to understand his own life as well as
another could, because he is always in the midst of it. At most
he can understand his past; present and future are still confused
and undecided.
is not itself in a position to relate them to one other. Purposes are simply values projected into the future and they too have no ordering principle built in 'It is like a chaos of harmonies and dissonances' 15 Dilthey says and only the category of significance
,
.
One would have to await the end of life; only in from the hour of death could one survey the whole and discern there the connection of the parts 17 Even my past, as it appears
'
'
.
One
le
in the first book of the Nicomachean Ethics: Since happiness can ld never call a man happy only be ascribed to a whole life, one cou
until he was dead, and no longer in a position to enjoy it. In
of a life.
With this the priority of the past is clearly indicated. Significance is, as we saw the category of memory or retrospect. Perhaps we should not be surprised to hear this opinion from Dilthey the historian and biographer whose major project is to
,
,
The
secure a rightful place for the human sciences. What he is asserting here is nothing other than the advantage of retrospective historical knowledge Human life consists of plans intentions, purposes; only in retrospect can we know which of these were realized how they related to their concrete circumstances and to the plans and
,
.
purposes of others. Only after the fact do we know the true, rather
than the merely wished for result of actions Only afterwards can the sense of a life be discerned. To assert in this way the priority of the past over the other temporal dimensions is not, of course entirely new. Hegel had
,
.
We claimed at the outset that these three thinkers have a ological one - in deal approach - broadly speaking, a phenomen
similar
-
development
also held that memory is what brings to light the truth of a spiritual
.
hich their ing with temporality. We have also seen the extent to w the discrepancy we have results are similar. We must now turn to discovered in the matter of priority. How are we to explain it? Is ir difference only apparent? one of the three simply right? Is the take this Is there a deeper-lying unity to be found? Can we
'
.
::
a;
... '
>
'
206
207
We could proceed ad hominem and attribute the difference of views to a difference of personalities People can in fact be
.
everyday and surveys the wholeness of life in the light of In Dilthey's case one can clearly distinguish between experience
and life on the one hand and, on the other, the stage of reflection
death.
once achieved
We also know
of tomorrow nor of yesterday And dwelling on the good old days is not the only way of living in the past. Freud has taught us of more significant ways of being emprisoned by it. Not only individuals, but stages in the lives of individuals and indeed whole groups, generations and epochs could be classified in this way Think of Weber's portrait of the protest ant ethic and the spirit
,
.
Heidegger and Dilthey? Here we could distinguish, broadly speaking, between ethical and epistemological interests. Though Heidegger's authenticity is more reflective than prereflective, its goal is not knowledge; it is resoluteness, i.e. the active shaping of life by way of the future. Dilthey, by contrast, is interested in know-
of capitalism
We
do not have to look far to find examples of societies that live only
in the present And collective nostalgia is not unknown Can it be
.
describes immediately experienced, that is, prereflective or unre""v atciy cApenencea, mat is ~*-i * . fleeted temporality whereas Heidegger and Dilthey are interested
n
,
,
,
they have after all, different questions they want answered and in this sense different interests. Perhpas this difference of interest could make understandable the discrepancy that concerns us here Could we not say for example that Husserl in his lectures
,
.
even important to deal with philosophers' views in terms of their biographies and world views. There may still be a way of accounting for the difference of views which deals with the issues themselves The three philosophers may treat of the same theme with a similar approach, but
-
that our three philosophers are simply expressing philosophical or sociological syndromes when they accord priority to one of the dimensions of time? To be sure it might be quite difficult to align these three personalities with these particular preferences And quite apart from that one could question whether it is worthy of a genuine philosophical discussion to try to overcome a difference of views by explaining it psychologically and sociologically. It was Dilthey himself of course, who considered it not only valid but
,
.
Heidegger, authenticity is a matter of one of life. Knowledge is something I can have not only of myself but also of others, perhaps even primarily of others, as we saw.
ly experienced, temporality. He describes only time as immediate to be called everyday, which in Heideggerian language would have
Our attempted solution to the discrepancy would thus be as f follows: Husserl gives us an accurate but limited description o
hile
flective
ion in general). temporality (or indeed, one could add, of reflect What he does not see is that there we are capable of escaping this immersion in the present and shaping our existence as a whole in full awareness of our finitude. Another form of escape from the
ities, especially history, in present is that offered by the human which we understand life - if not our own then that of others retrospectively.
Yet we should not, I think, be satisfied with this attempted it rests on certain subtle compromise, for several reasons. First,
hers. For philosop
,
but important misinterpretations of the three I understand Heidegger, everydayness is noi eo ipso inauthentic, if maunr-~, Heidegger everydayness is not ev to authenticity and
but rather neutral with respect to authenticity and him correctly
..
reflective here
kindly on our
t:
"
: . ..
/(f
3
%
208
209
he would probably not agree that this description applies only to pre-reflexive temporality, much less to the further suggestion that
it depicts only a false superficial, or secondary conception of time. And finally our compromise links Dilthey with the notion of a sharp discontinuity between life as lived and the humanistic
, ,
because it is not past and future and does not function as they do in our experience, not because it is the source, ground, etc. of the other two. Phenomenology, in my view, is a descriptive discipline, not one designed to provide metaphysical grounds - even though
its founder often confused the two functions.
theories; nor must we always expect an author's approval of our interpretation of his thought But there are other reasons for
.
ing to say that from one perspective the future, from another the present, and from a third the past is prior But does this dispose
.
It is to Heidegger's and Dilthey's credit, then, that they try, each in his own way, to liberate us from the dominance of the present. But is it necessary, to do this, to assert the priority of another time dimension in its place? The fact that Heidegger and Dilthey seem I to go off in opposite directions on this point indicates to us, think, that something has gone wrong. If we look more closely at their positions, we see that they are not as far apart as they first
appear.
of the priority question? It seems to me that the discrepancy we have been discussing can teach us more if we look for a deeperlying unity among the three theories in question, which in turn can be accomplished it we seek a deeper unity among the timedimensions themselves But this is possible only if we are able to
.
that is, it runs ahead toward death. We take over (or over
take)
Let us recall how the discussion of priority began. Heidegger may have been the first to raise the issue explicitly but he by no means invented it As we saw, he only reacted against the traditional and unquestioned assumption of the priority of the present. In a certain sense Dilthey following Hegel, presents us with another way of questioning the traditional dominance of the
,
.
to survey Dasein as a whole. Is this not the same as cons life as if it were past, and is this not precisely the standpoint of
? Dilthey would have to retrospective historical understanding admit that in our own case we have the freedom to regard our life hers or in this way. We need not limit ourselves to the lives of ot
idering
present.
It seems to me justified to count Husserl among those who give priority to the present and to attribute this doctrine to the
,
restrict ourselves to our own past in order to find coherence and e of values and pursignificance. The confusion and incoherenc calls the fragmented poses, which corresponds to what Heidegger
time-consciousness
have been overcome by phenomenology. Moreover this view seems to contradict the most important insight of the lectures on
,
.
(zerstreut) character of the everyday, can be fused into a me ion. Heiful whole by means of this quasi-restrospective anticipat he real past degger's Vorlaufen gives us access not, of course, to t
but to a future past or future perfect - that which
which we can
aning-
the retentional-protentional field that is, the insight that consciousness spans the dimensions of time holds them in its grasp. It is not isolated in the present possessing only indirect and w ' me present, unreliable access to past and future. Only ontological and epistem,
I am referring, of course
,
to the concept of
as if past which is in admit that the xuiurc pasi only an aamu mat tne future past is wj - - - '
uld have to wo
hieved througn rcso still open. Any significance or coherence ac be known, as teness is not something that can simply
..
5:
. . .
210
NOTES
211
fixed. It is still to be brought forth and sustained, and to that extent it is vulnerable and fragile. It is a coherence that can at any moment fall to pieces, fragment itself into inauthenticity.
First published 1900-01. Trans. J.N. Findlay, New York, Humanities Fress,
1970.
This is due to the fact that such anticipation is only <7was/-retrospective; which in turn derives from the fact that it is, after all,
See vol. VII of Dilthey's Gesammelte Schriften (ed. B. Groethuysen, 5th ed.,
ed. and trans. H.P. Rickman (Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, which contains selections from the 1976), abbreviated as 'Rickman Aufbau, though the translations are largely my own. In preparing this paper I was not able to consult the new vol XIX of the Gesammelte Schriften,
' ,
Writings
from the present that we make this anticipatory leap. We are not isolated in the present; we have the freedom to surpass it. But this freedom is not absolute. The present remains the inalienable situation' of our temporality. But its role is not one of priority but merely that of the standpoint which gives us access to the field
'
of time.
ins
The anticipatory-retrospective structure of temporality, sketched here, is relevant not only to the context of the question
Churchill The Phenomenology of Internal Time-Consciousness fer to paragraph num(Bloomington, Indiana University Press, 1964). I re
Being and Time trans. J. Macquarrie and E. Robinson, (New York, Harper
and Row, 1962). Again I refer to paragraph numbers.
action. Thus it is appropriate not only to the longer-term temporality of a whole life but also to the more limited contexts of the
means-end relation. Alfred Schutz speaks precisely of the 'future perfect' in his analysis of action: we perform an action consciously
6
7
The genuine lesson to be learned from the phenomenology of temporality has nothing to do with assigning priority to one of its
dimensions but consists in a correct understanding of how those
p. 212. 14. Ibid. p. 215 f. 15. Ibid. p. 216. 16, Ibid. p. 176.
ness of life
*
,
is not the present but the past or the future that are privileged
But in the end
,
.
! Ts
F
.
members of a unifield structure To invoke a notion used by Husserl as an example and by Dilthey as a metaphor, we can say
that it makes no mere sense to claim priority for one of the dimensions of time that it does to claim if for one note in a well-formed melody
.
It.
I
i
.
'
1 r-.-VH' .
Does it make sense to distinguish between world on the one hand and world-view or world-picture on the other? The following reflections are devoted to this question and its relation to the Husserlian concept of the lifeworld. Their purpose is to raise questions rather than provide answers or advance theses. I shall begin by quoting a passage from one of the appendices
to the Crisis:
constantly and in advance as existing, but not valid because of some purpose of invesgation, according to some universal end.
Every end presupposes it; even the universal end of knowing it in scientific truth presupposes it, and in advance; and in the
course of [scientific] work it presupposes it ever anew, as a world existing in its own way [to be sure], but existing nevertheless. The scientific world (nature in the sense of natural science world in the sense of philosophy as universal positive
, ,
world-conceptions interpretations, - pictures from the world of which they are conceptions interpretations and pictures. It is the
,
r.L\
ft
..
.
. .
rf. ...
I
.
-
214
215
as they are from each other, agree on one point that puts them in sharp opposition to Husserl's concept of the lifeworld. This is
the view that the distinction Husserl wants to make between world and world-view or world-picture is not possible. Let us now consider Husserl s distinction and the reasons for denying it. If Husserl were a naive realist the distinction would be clear,
'
features
to which
It must be said that terminologically speaking this is true only for the texts of the Crisis period In the Cartesian Meditations lifeworld' has almost the opposite sense e.g. where Husserl
.
'
if not very interesting: the world is simply reality in itself; it is what it is, independently of our relation to it. On the other side are our
ideas, which can be true or false, or perhaps (as Hegel describes
the sense used in the Crisis such a plural would not be possible. But the substantial difference between world and world-concept
this view) as instrument or medium of cognition, are in principle incapable of adequation to reality. But all this has nothing to do
with Husserl
is present in the earlier writings For example: 'phenomenological explication does nothing but explicate the sense this world has for us all, prior to any philosophizing a sense which philosophy can uncover but never alter \ 5 And the same view can be traced back
. ... ...
s concept of world. The world, which for Husserl is prior to all ideas and views, is a given and pre-given world.
'
'
,
If we take seriously this feature of Husserl's late concept of the lifeworld we can see that like the early essay 'Philosophy as Rigorous Science' the Crisis is directed not only against natural,
,
horizon of possible objects for an intentional conscious life. This is why Husserl writes, in the text we quoted at the beginning, afer
purposive structures that distinguishing between lifeworld and even the lifeworld, which precedes all purpose is a 'structure'
'
,
'
'
'
[Gebilde], but not a 'purposive structure [Zweckgebilde].6 By using the term structure with quotation marks, he means that
'
'
'
seems
even the lifeworld is structured or constituted by subjectivity, practical reason though not by the higher-level constitution of which is broad enough to include logical reason.7 Every conceptu'
'
s through interests of concepts and conceptual frameworks occur and motives that derive from historical traditions and circums-
Gadamer
'
forms and comes from different directions: in part it is influenced by the Husserlian critique of objectivism and even by Husserl's concept of the lifeworld itself - though perhaps in misunderstood form. In part e.g. in the analytic philosophy of science of Kuhn and Feyerabend it arose quite independently of phenomenology. As representatives of conceptual relativism in the broad sense intended here we can also count: the later Wittgenstein H.-G.
,
,
,
tances. This is true of the historically given interest in knowing the world in the sense of scientific truth. But prior to developing already has a world, any conceptual framework consciousness which is then overlaid with an interpretation' through such a
'
accessible to us; nor does it require conceptual mediation to be ly given, it lie beyond our experience. On the contrary, it is direct
ft
if
v
,
.
4
.
'*
"
216
217
purposive structures? But how can there be a world, it might be objected, which is the horizon of human experience and activity
,
but which is not conceptually articulated? In the Crisis Husserl often contrasts the theoretician whether scientist or philosopher
,
diverse, even within a single natural language, that we can hardly even catalogue, much less define these functions. At best we can avail ourselves of metaphors, like that of the game, in order to make the role of language comprehensible. Thus the distinctions between the passivity and activity of the human relation to the world does not suffice to justify Husserl s
9
opes this view himself or takes it over ready-made from science from philosophy from religion or perhaps from all three and
,
,
Husserl would probably answer this naively formulated objection by saying: of course, we all try some with more success than others to make some meaningful whole out of the bewilder,
,
as
'
contains a
the world which precedes all purpose is questionable if we consider the Marxian concept of ideology. Understood as a passively onscious acquired world-view, ideology does not arise from c purposes, but it does serve a purpose, that of maintaining the
existing social order.
is no chaos
rather
,
a passively pre-given world horizon. But this horizon itself incorporates a conceptual view or interpretation of the world which the individual already has before he begins, for whatever personal reasons to develop a particular, conscious world-view The acquisition of concepts does not always occur consciously or purposively. A person already has a world-interpretation just in virtue of
,
.
picture with the pictured object; we recognize it as a picture But this reponse, precisely by distinguishing it from the object.
tual
name
, -
mines what is nameable what can occur. The world can only be
,
in the words of Ideen I* but it is taken as the one and only existing world-picture ? In order to world. Why use the misleading term l
' '
indicate that such a person does not have the one and only rea
world directly given, but one view of it among
recognizes this or not.
insofar as it conforms
others, whether he
to a possible language But there are many languages and groups of languages If all these could be reduced to a single universal, ideal language perhaps it could be said to refer to a world beyond all linguistic differences But such a reduction is not possible we are told Language, with its world-interpreting functions is so
.
t Husserl The conceptual relativist may want to point out tha himself introduced the idea of such a world-picture is his late historical being', and of the work. Husserl speaks of man as a
'
'
sedimented conceptuality
'
X-
--
'
'
<
Mm
.
! "
+
7
.
218
219
What is taken for granted (Selbstverstdndlichkeiteri) which Husserl wants to transform into what is understood (Verstdndlichkei
,
-
teri) is not only the prejudices of the natural attitude but also those
of a historical tradition
'
It is well known that Hegel's notion of the Gestalten of spirit stands behind all later world-view philosophies and conceptual relativisms, even though Hegel himself was the farthest thing from
Terms like 'taken for granted' and sedimented' clearly suggest conceptual frameworks that are not
.
a relativist. For Hegel, as for Husserl, all world-views stand within a single horizon of truth; but for Hegel this horizon is not an
ahistorical structure which underlies these world-views and en-
recognized as such Husserl also says that the results of theoretical activity 'flow into' the concrete lifeworld 10 Is this only the trival
.
observation that the products of technology, as well as the scientists' theories are objects in the lifeworld of non-scientists?
,
Hegel calls spirit coming to itself. Though the idea of this unified, lian unfolding historical process is no longer convincing, the Hege litics notion is still widely accepted that science, religion, art, po and even philosophy are not separate cultural accomplishments,
'
uncomfortable situation'
11
distinguishable from a neutrally experienced world, but are manifestations and expressions of a certain way of experiencing the world. For Hegel there is no experience and no theoretical activity
which exists by itself or is restricted to one domain of objects.
Husserl's concept of the world could be defended in the following way: Even if world-views are not actively produced by the
individual but are passively taken over they are still views o/the
,
independent of and prior to his world-view, the world is still there' as the intentional object so to speak of his view. But such a defense would be unphenomenological and would in fact abandon the Husserlian concept of world It would mean either falling back into the standpoint of naive realism or turning to the Kantian
,
.
This conception, as taken over by Dilthey, influenced not only the Heidegger of Being and Time but also the Husserl of the Crisis.
But Husserl attempted, with the concept of the lifeworld, to rescue
he
f
i
i
i
i
i
i
consciousness
consciousness is at best that of a mundus intelligibilis Husserl, we know sharply attacked the idea of an unknown world in itself;
,
Husserl
and in any case such a world have little to do with a lifeworld defined precisely as being immediately given in intuition. For
,
as for Hegel
,
view of the object is a distinction made within experience 12 For Hegel of course the realm of 'objects referred to' is not a single lifeworld common to all conscious life Rather this realm differs for each 'Gestalt9 or figure of spirit. Thus the distinction between our view of objects' and 'objects referred to' is completely compatible with the idea of a multiplicity of world-views which have no shared presupposed lifeworld
.
ith a change in termirelativizing modern world-view-relativism w calls interpretation of nology? What was called world-view he (metaphybeing (Seinsauslegung) or 'basic metaphysical stance sische Grundstellung),14 and to the modern metaphysical stance Just as belongs among other things the idea of the world-view. there are different world-views, so there are different 'basic meta'
according to the modern concept of objectivity, where the world telas a picture stands over against representing-producing (vors
her
'
contrast these stances with each other, say that of Protagoras with
physical stances
'
.
and
L
.
/V.;
.
-W-
220
221
and both together belong to metaphysics as a whole which is also called philosophy But then philosophy itself is relativized: it is a single Seinsauslegung which extends from Thales to Nietzsche
,
.
and Husserl and which has now 'reached its end\ arrived
'
.
at its
most extreme possibility* 15 Is metaphysics (philosophy) just one interpretation of being among others? The alternative to philosophy for Heidegger is not another philosophy not a new metaphy,
for the spoken word, which embodies the unity of thought and being - is taken by Derrida as the model for all language and all thought. In his sense even Heidegger's attempt to think being belongs to Western metaphysique de la presence, which is portrayed by Derrida, as by Heidegger, as an accomplished and finished 0 cloture?
How does all this relate to the Husserlian concept of the
lifeworld, and to the distinction between world and world-view or
the 'overcoming of metaphysics' We encounter similar views among those French philosophers
who are influenced by structuralism In sharp opposition to the anti-relativism of their sources e.g. in Saussurean linguistic and the structural anthropology of Levi Strauss these philosophers are developing what seems to be a relativism of the most radical
.
of a particular age or even the whole of Western metaphysics, makes a claim whose validity is unrestricted and which is not itself
meant as a relative but as an absolute truth, i.e. something which
this person says is impossible. But it is clear that this refutation which made such a big impression in its day, has hardly curbed
,
'
'
'
us. Foucault insistently denies any identification of his concept of epist&ne with that of world view or Zeitgeist 19 but it is hard to
-
poses a conception of truth that has been surpassed, say by Heidegger or Gadamer, as some claim, but rather because it is too
narrow to cover all the varieties of philosophical expression. The
Heidegger
In contrast to this unrelated multiplicity of isolated systems J. Derrida affirms that such systems form a whole which as for
,
by concepts; he questions the whole idea of a world beyond language to which language refers, something we could encounter face to face The idea of an ultimate signifie of all signifiants of a 'living present' which fulfills all signitive intentions is seen as the prime illusion of the metaphysique de la presence In fact all signs just refer to other signs and the putative encounter with a presence beyond language is deferred in infinitum The traditional and derogatory characterization of writing as sign for a sign - i.e.
.
relativism of Heidegger, of Derrida or of Foucault - and also that of the late Wittgenstein - is not set forth in a series of theses, not justified by arguments that appeal to logical principles, as if it laid claim to an objective, timeless truth. Rather, through aphorisms, metaphors upon metaphors, and - especially in Foucault s work countless examples a position is suggested which is never formally articulated. The only real effect of Husserl s refuta'
,
'
tion was that philosophers of this sort rend to avoid, for good reasons traditional philosophical argumentation. Thus the belief in relativsm has also affected the style of philosophical
,
not at the content of the belief itself but only at its straightfor-
Aris-
totle's remark that 'it is uneducated not to have an eye for when
. -
. -It
222
223
sary'.
22
past culture - for example, those of perceptual objects, of perceived space and experienced time - which make possible limited
communication or historical understanding, are integrated in each
A refutation of relativism similar to HusserFs likewise based on formal arguments has recently been put forward by Donald Davidson. Such a relativism the argument goes could only be maintained if we had a clear instance of a * conceptual scheme' which could not be translated into our own But we can only recognize concepts and conceptual relations as such by observing, in the linguistic and other behavior of those who supposedly use
,
case (i.e. in their culture and in ours) into a whole system which gives to these subordinate concepts their sense. Perhaps our b understanding of such cultures extends only far enough to esta lish that these subordinate concepts are combined for them with other concepts in a way we do not comprehend at all. To this Husserl could perhaps respond that precisely the perceptual world of experienced space, time and objects is a matter not of subordinate concepts belonging to a larger system, but of basic
-
d-view
must
be
built. We can learn to understand a foreign language or an alien conceptual system, he might say, because all its other concepts,
But this argument is likewise incapable of overcoming relativism, and not because it presupposes a literary style that our relativists are unwilling to adopt The argument shows that we could never recognize an alien conceptual scheme, but it does not
.
however complex they are, can ultimately be explained in terms of these basic concepts, which we, the learners, share. But this ii. We cannot say a response would be guilty of a petitio princip priori that we are in principle capable of completely mastering any alien conceptual system. It could be that its concepts are not all explainable in perceptual terms. And in any case, is it not implausible to maintain that a person s space- and time-concepts are no
'
deny the 'very idea' of such a scheme; in fact it presupposes it. Thinkers like Heidegger and Derrida do not advance their position by comparing our conceptual scheme with other actual or possible
schemes. Rather they trace our thinking and our world-view back
,
dependent on his total world-view, that they constitute a neutra ientific aspects territory unaffected by the religious, mythical or sc
of his life?
to certain basic presuppositions or concepts which are made to look arbitrary Thereby they raise the possibility of changing these basic concepts without telling us how they are to be changed Both insist that they are not even capable of proposing alternatives because they themselves are still within the enclosure of Western
.
grounds. What evidence are we actually given for the existence of purportedly different, all-encompassing and mutually exclusive
theories, Foucault on the world-views? Kuhn draws on scientific written documents of economics, linguistics and jurisprudence,
metaphysics
destruction and deconstruct ion which is at best capable of clearing the ground for the conception of alternatives
Further
,
against the less radical relativists. Granted some translation is necessary in order to recognize an alien language or conceptual
,
.
Is it entirely clear that philosophy - all products of high culture. f a whole historical period? such works express the world-view o l elite that Or do they merely express the views of the intellectua
'
and
two circles
system as such; and translation presupposes shared concepts and a common reality correlated with these concepts But what is common may be something quite limited like the overlapping of
,
.
produces them? How do we know language-games really the views of ordinary people, that such of non-theorists, that Aristotle s remarks reveal the 'forms of live hing at all to do with the about being, for example, have anyt
'
/A r,
1
.
..
.1
225
224
NOTES
ry B.C.? Does such testimony really provide sufficient grounds for rejecting our (perhaps naive) view that we share the same world
with the ancient Greeks with members of an alien culture, and
,
Transcendental
claims that the signs of our language refer only to other signs.
Today's philosophers forever occupied with the tradition, live in a world of texts, which refer only to other texts beyond which no further reality seems discernable In a similar situation Husserl said: 'back to the things themselves!' and then: 'back to the
, ,
.
1970) p. 382.
17.
even
He saw that we - especially we philosophers - are blinkered by tradition and sedimented concepts but he believed that all of us
,
-
and not only philosophers - could free ourselves from such blinders. The relativist has a different view: All of use are blinker-
ed, limited by our historical or linguistic or metaphysical situation; it makes no sense to speak of emancipation or responsibility for self {Selbstverantwortung) in Husserl's sense Of course, it is the relativists alone who are capable of this insight even if they are careful enough not to present it as scientific truth Their insight is indeed not available to everyone as a scientific claim would be, but only to those properly educated in the tradition Thus these philosophers are not only occupied with an elite they
.
1983), p. 57. 9 The Crisis, p. 71. 10. Ibid., p. 113. 11. Ibid., p. 130.
.
Philosophic und die Aufgabe des Denkens , 15. M. Heidegger, <Das Ende der 3
n, 1969), p. 6 in Zur Sache des Denkens (Tubinge
Ibid., p. 80.
'
. .
16.
17.
18. M
But the reproach of elitism is unfortunately itself not an argument. It remains to be seen whether a world beyond the text is
.
19. M
20.
21.
22.
logie (Paris, 1967) first part, p 7 Cf. J. Derrida, De la grammato igations, tr. J.N. Fmdlay (New York. Edmund Husserl, Logical Invest Prolegomena to Pure Logic. Humanities Press, 1970) vol. I: Philosophic../ (op. at.), P- w. Heidegger, 'Das Ende der
tion 47, 1974, pp. and Addresses of the American Philosophical Associa
.
Foucault, L'archeologie du
23. D
Da
.
5-20
'
The concept of the lifeworld was of central importance to the revived interest in HusserPs thought during th SO's and 1960's In Europe this revival was influenced jointly by the French existentialists and by the post-war publication of HusserPs collected works. Maurice Merleau-Ponty had referred at several points in
.
were then published in 1954 in voL VI of Husserliana. As existential phenomenology attracted interest in North America in the
1960's HusserPs late work was seen as part of a trend that
,
included Merleau's concept of the monde vecu and Heidegger's emphasis in Being and Time on being-in-the-world.
phy was contrasted in the post-war period with a strong AngloAmerican preoccupation with language. But German and French philosophy has itself taken up language since then, either literally
or as a powerful metaphor for human thought and experience. Hermeneutics sees human reality as a text to be interpreted, and structuralism and post-structuralism analyse everything in terms
of realms of discourse closed in upon themselves. Meanwhile
Anglo-American philosophers have for some time felt the constraints imposed by taking language as the paradigm for thought and in some quarters HusserPs concept of intentionality is being proposed as a mentalistic solution to the problem of
,
linguistic meaning
>:
. . .
"
>
i.
., -si,. .: Ti
f-v-
of
7,'
228
229
In my view something important has been lost in these develophis concept of the lifeworld
some of those who now focus their attention on Husserl are not fully understanding this thought By returning to the concept of
some measure this
the meaning
with a series of conceptual projections, forgetting or denying that language refers beyond itself Those who concentrate narrowly on
.
What has been overlooked can be characterized in a preliminary and very general way as follows: Those who focus on language as discourse tend to dissolve the world into language or equate it
the world in which we find ourselves. The directly felt and sensed
qualities of the world around us were declared mere appearances, while the reality which supposedly underlay them was deemed
f -
rightly complain that the above view overlooks the distinction between sense and reference; but in their interest in the relation
meanings.
,
posited in an uncritically realist way and indeed in a scientifically realist way as if its status as a whole were not at issue in phenomenology. Those who focus on language as discourse at least recognize that language not only permits us to speak of this
,
,
as a whole is co-intended (Husserl's term is mitgemeint) along with particular objects of reference In the absence of an exploration
.
between act, meaning and object meant they forget that the world
i
ourselves. What Husserl called the crisis of European science was not an internal crisis but an external one: the loss of its meaning for life.1 Since the Renaissance, and perhaps since the birth of in what Husserl thought of philosophy in Greece, we have lived as a scientific culture, that is, a culture which places in our free, for our ultimate understandrational, theorizing activity its hopes instead of ing of ourselves and our place in the universe. But
contributed
to our estrangement from our world f which we are all There is a social side to this development o
s universe is not only removed from us but aware. The scientist f us. To those who do comprealso incomprehensible to most o
The conceptual picture we have presented here is not by the way altogether unlike the one which Husserl faced when he wrote the Crisis and to which his notion of the lifeworld was meant to respond. Scientific realism (Husserl calls it 'physicalistic objec,
--
the true nature of ourselves. and the true nature of things, even of the universe, And like high priests, with access to the powers good or ill. The abstractthey can also direct those powers for our hen ness of scientific theory can suddenly become very concrete w J-S Qiirvival.
out concepium
ight to undersr
e concept of the l T " " T611' 18113,1 try to show li hfeworld no less addressed to them. Let us first place Husserl's h " :: ; f zt: rr refore ~act ,o ,be
wor
r-io*
.vui ui me crisis;
-1 +u~Antar\ nnr
...
, o? ?
he scientific view and our the growing discrepancy between t hers d our world, most philosop ordinary sense of ourselves an | But philosophers ought have simply followed the lead of science.
i
\
I
advised to follow them if we seek and if we desire;eic are directed are philosophers. In the face of the u i** criticisms arp Hirected are pnUOSOpucia. ,? the face of ;*; Husserl's
"iv
: --
theor from I
y
j,
5:
V,
St..
230
231
objects. Husserl said that philosophers should be functionaries for mankind 2 and part of what he meant is that the y should mediate
,
not merely to follow but to understand and even evaluate what scientists do especially when it comes to attributing reality to their
,
which remains Anonymous 7 in the sense that for the most part we do not notice it. Husserl builds here on earlier investigations
'
major accomplishments of modern science are reall ized ways of thinkin y very specialg about and conceiving the physical world. In putting the emphasis on the active and constructive character of the scientific view of reality Husserl so far follows the lead of Kant. But Kant still regarded the scientifically constructed world as the best candidate for knowable reality and thus concurred in the ontological devaluation of the everyda What Kant overlooked y or prescicntific world. according to Husserl is the actual context m which scientific thinking takes its point of departure. This com ls ?ot one f fleeUng d j'ec rn's da.a or
, ,
,
-
latest criteria of physical theory Reduced to a mere hand-maiden or cheer-leader for science philosophy has left the articulation of man's concrete sense of his world to the novellist and poet This is how the novelist Milan Kundera views Husserl's notion of the * 3 crisis. And the literary critic Harold Bloom seems to agree that literature has taken over philosophy's function.4 But Husserl believes philosophy can exercise its proper reflective and critical function in relation to science in its own way He reminds us that scientific theory is after all a human activity within a cultural space and that this culturel space itself presupposes an everyday world of perceived things and other people The scientist lives in the same world as the rest of us As laymen we may think that his achievement is to devise instruments like the microscope so that he can see this world better than we do But his real achievements are techniques not of seeing but of thought: the
.
between the scientists and the rest of us. But for many philoso-
into what he calls 'passive synthesis He also proposes the title transcendental aesthetic almost as a reproach to Kant for so
'
.
'
'
But far more important than this subjective analysis of perhad always been a 'direct ception is its objective side. Husserl he realist in his treatment of perception, and in the Crisis too
stresses that here we have direct contact with a real world. Only
ientific
subjectively relative and changeworld is the perceived world able.8 In their own domain the objects of perception are stable,
space around our bodies. Above all they are real, and are directly given
real
'
in the (intuited) as such. By contrast, what is posited as l theory is what Husserl calls a context of a sophisticated physica in principle logical constrution'. The entities so constructed are
'
'
is itself a psychological variant of a physical mere appearance iences are caused. But the theory, in this case about how our exper
' '
one else, lives in the full proponent of this theory, like every
lity of the world about him. The certainty of the directly given rea
'
the scientific concept of the real and growing discrepancy between and by the faillure of philosophy our prescientific sense of reality, Having introduced the to come to terms with that discrepancy.
concept of the lifeworld as a way
&
<*- - i: . .M Viae
ns.
'
ption has a nature of its own which confused and chaotic, is in fact mh u, :? c is in fact coherentl tentional way y structured in an inIt is indeed a sense-world and its appearance to the perceiver is correlated structurally with the human body which not only passively receives impressions but activel
,
,
.
concept of the lifeworld as a way of reading me t significance Z TZZZi d'ii human* * X as a Pn T cultural broader
much
sciences but any andphilosophy itself arise within SZ a certain *"> itself arise endeavor including ana
,
'
as such.10 This universal problem can be problem for philosophy of the relation between thought and characterized generally as that
J
Ti
)
v
..
/ 'a
*
:fi.
m\
. .
ti
v.. mi
232
233
intuition
implied reference is again to Kant is now grasped as the problem of the life-world and its role in our experience.
-
real world that present themselves to us in turn, and yet the world
IS noi llSCll it taigc-M mt; tiling v/i vtv* v**
It may be thought that the concept of the lifeworld really represents nothing new in Husserl's thought, even though the term
assumes new significance in this late work. And indeed we have
hich all w
seen that Husserl's realistic view of perception, and even the ideas
things stand out and without which they could not appear to us. As horizon, the lifeworld is unique and unitary, it is not singular as opposed to plural, for the plural makes no sense when applied
to it'.14 Furthermore, full-blooded as it is, the
'
reality of particu'
of passive synthesis and of bodily subjectivity, which are at the heart of his presentation of the lifeworld in the Crisis had been developed before But as Husserl's exposition unfolds it begins to take on features that distinguish it in more than just emphasis from what has gone before
,
.
f
-
ceptions. But such revisions change only the details and in no way
as such.15 Our comittment ontic certainty of the world
tual experience, to its reality is always linked to our ongoing percep
objects.
bene Lebenswelt and the lifeworld is almost always referred to in this way sometimes as immer schon vorgegeben - always already pregiven It is likewise frequently said to be 'presupposed' and 'taken for granted'
,
One such feature is the prominence of the notion of Vorgegebenheit or pregivenness The section's title refers to the vorgege.
'
keeping with the focus on scientific realism with which the section begins Husserl obviously means 'prior to science' and that in the
,
eption we important role. There too Husserl stresses that in perc or that but through them have are not merely confronted with this
'
'
not always in the world a civilization that lived habitually with long established scientific interests The life-world was always there before science then, just as it continues its manner of being
.
perception before they develop sophisticated theories about it or the 'reality' which lies behind it and causes its ap Even after the development of such theories pearances, etc. " 'wv,fv*ii kji Mien meones the real life of any . tne real lite ot any individual is still played out in the perceptual world There is also historical sense to this 'before': 'as history teaches us there was this 'before': history us,' there was nnt alu/QY/c +1t .
.
Just as objects stand out from a direct experience of the world. tual acts in which they their background, so the particular percep lying 'attitude or 'standpoint are given repose upon an under natural attitude. This is 'not (Einstellung) which Husserl calls the but a fundamental belief in or committment to a particular act
'
'
'
It is our conviction that in and through eac n ia . u ta A\rt*nt pYnerience not and all of our particular perceptions we have direct experience not
.
only oi particular miugs but of the: ~a****a their J?" Liy of particular things um vv world as . . , . i f1c*wnere. elsewhere,18 tniS conthis conBut, as I have tried to show in detail is echpsed by another deception, after its brief appearance, hich also developed in Ideas and w scription of the world, which is rl
But a stronger sense of pregivenness be Husserl discusses the ' gins to emerges as 13 most general structures of the lifeworld
'
.
tion to theoretical is so preoccupied with the move from percep of experience as if their sole thought that he treats the objects
ot H into a
scientific
als belonging to
conscious activity, but it is also presu In perception we pposed in perception itself. are aware of particular things and events and we take them to be real But this means merely that we count them
,
.
ifies this latter as the world. The real objects and then ident
rv
:'V
'
-;
'
.
' "
i
. . .
.y-::
234
235
a concept that can never be fulfilled This contrasts sharply with the description of the world of the natural attitude in the Ideas
.
.
such perfect evidence is never forthcoming in our experience and remains infinitely distant The world in this sense is the object of
.
concept and the experience of others on the basis of a full-fledged perceptual world given beforehand. Husserl speaks of the 'sphere of ownness with its 'transcendent objects'23 as if these made up
'
The difference is between the direct experience of the world which we actually have at every moment and the idea of an experience which in principle we can never have. Instead of being given in experience the world is an object of thought It is to the former conception that Husserl returns in the Crisis It is not merely that he places emphasis on modes of experience which are prior to scientific and other forms of theoretical interest Husserl had always acknowledged that such forms exist But he had treated them as in some way deficient and provisional for a consciousness whose primary aim is to surpass them toward a full theoretical
,
,
text is ambiguous to say the least. For example, Husserl says that he the ownness sphere stands in a relation of Fundierung to t intersubjective world, which is to say that I cannot have the latter
without the former, but I can have the former without the latter.25
abstraction.
comprehension
character of the perceived world and the pervasive and deep-lying character of our committment to it; he is also convinced that in a certain sense we never leave this committment behind however sophisticated our thought about reality may become Furthermore, he recognizes than an adequate description of consciousness in all its forms must not give exaggerated importance to one form
,
.
-
pregiven
that of the Cartesian Meditations. The lifeworld is dealt with d described as being preexplicity as an intersubjective world an in any and all particular supposed, with precisely this sense, de the problem, to be sure, experience. This is then found to inclu
of how I as an individual experience the others and 'constitute
s
'
others.
the sense of their existence in my own consciousnes . But the sense of the whole section leaves no doubt that the full concreteness of
in the Cartesian Meditations Yet when Husserl finally gets around to a published discussion of intersubjectivity he introduces it only after the subject of perception and its world have been introduced and seems at times to suggest that we acquire or develop the
.
A second feature which distinguishes the account of the perceived world in the Crisis from earlier accounts is that this world is repeatedly described as public or intersubjective: it is 'pre-given Misting for all in common' 20 as 1 'the' world common to us f11' What is straightforwardly perceptual is communalized\ There is considerable ambiguity on this point in Husserl s earlier writings about perception. His direct realism would seem to suggest that the object I perceive is given as the same object you perceive. But this presupposes the availability to me of the
,
is pregiven in relation to
'
be seen as related A third prominent feature of the lifeworld can iven character and to the second. In addition to stressing its preg ibutes certain its common or intersubjective status, Husserl attr lifeworld as well. We already cultural objects and properties to the know that the concreteness of the lifeworld extends farther than since it also includes the mere things given in bodily perception, ipped with their own exother persons. But persons come equ hts too. Husserl is from the 1 periences, and presumably their thoug ion between science and the start concerned with the relat
i
of us, whatever they may think experience the world as do the rest n to include in the lifeworld about it in their theory. But he goes o the sciences as cultural facts in this not only the scientists but also
'
lifeworld, and has made the point that scientists too live in and
VV'.iia
,
.
'
V
.
..
236
237
'
world with their theories'.26 He is obviously impressing on us the difference between conceiving the world through the scientists'
...
This is Husserl's new version of the natural standpoint of consciousness, of the world which is the inalienable correlate of
'
reality which is integrated with the reality of concrete things around us Naturally, the first things we think of when we hear of 'human formations' are artifacts, which are quite concrete and
.
theoretical concepts and encountering those concepts themselves as ideas put forward by persons in the everyday world and passed along to us in the classroom in books or by hearsay. We encounter them as 'human formations, essentially related to
,
that standpoint, and of the nature of the relation between the two.
And the development of this new version has certain consequences
its various theoretical and ogy is to understand consciousness in hend the sense of the practical activities, and if it is to compre lated in all its possible objects to which consciousness stands re
logy
ii
rtf 1o~i.
TT
I
i
bearers of experiences and thoughts; and it also contains the products of their activity and even the content or sense of their
.
strength and pervasiveness of our committment to its reality, whatever theoretical view we may take up about 'reality as defined by some theory; wider because the world to which we are thus committed is so much richer than the previous discussions of perception would allow It includes as we have seen not just things but also persons; and persons not just as minds but as
*
,
.
In these three ways then, the lifeworld of the Crisis is both deeper and wilder than the perceptual world of earlier writings: deeper because of its pregiven character that is, because of the
,
similar status within our world. Scientific theories are of course not the only cultural products that have this status; there are also other and sometimes conflicting 'views' of the world we encounter as well such as religion and philosophy There are other products which have the status of ideas, such as stories and poems without being 'theories' or 'views Husserl doubtless puts so much stress on scientific and other theories because he wants to make clear the distinction between subscribing to such theories and living m a world in which they count among its constituents
J
_
J 1
<
turn to that now. It can be seen first of all as an antidote to some of the excesses of continental philosophy as it has developed since Husserl's time. As indicated before, I am thinking of the predomi-
'
nance of a certain conception language as the exclusive key to and its relation to the world. understanding human existence
28 is very different indeed Gadamer's concept of Sprachlichkeit h from Foucault's notion of the episteme29 but they have this muc ivity are conceived in common, that human existence and act f and understanding of language. almost exclusively as the use o nceived largely on Indeed, this use and understanding is in turn co but of writing and reading the model not of speaking and hearing altogether or viewed metatexts. Perception is either neglected
of the concretely an Against this view, Husserl reminds us reality of the world around us. sensuously given, indeed pregiven in this, drawing on and Merleau-Ponty, of course, followed him
'
s notion of the living body as the anonymous enhancing Husserl lanwonders if the overemphasis on subject of perception. One
hi*.
Si.
238
239
tho m&iun especially oif me 'hktoricist'
. ii
~
philosophers and literary critics who spend their time reading and
.
sort
Philosophy as Rigorous
count
conceptual relativisms by
tualizing reality are s i ll encounter in our everyday world, the very same world that we a
int that for all the differences experience. Husserl insists at one po he lifeworld has that may exist between cultures and world-views, t
share.30
against such
intersubjectivity we have already discussed. Different persons a t as different peoples live amongst different ideas and views, jus
as enmeshed through language in radically different conceptual schemes whether discontinuous and self contained or slowly de,
-
different worlds or universes of discourse Reality is fragmented or splintered into these different domains and the idea of a unity among them is no longer thought to make sense I am convinced that Husserl's concept of the lifeworld was
.
f
L
the irony that the scientifically 'real' has retreated farther and farther from our actual experience of the world This makes a view like HusserPs which emphasizes the constructed and idealized character of the scientifically real all the easier to accept. And
.
are not as far apart as they may seem We have already remarked
the point earlier that Husserl is being risen in the philosophy to help solve certain problems which have a
ing. One advantage seen in to Frege's theory of linguistic mean
is seen as providing a supplement of language. In particular, he
n makes it possible for Husserl outside language itself. This in tur to extend the notion of meaning to perception, where it is not
superstition, and magic becomesJus a m*ta of WOU'd be " ages or concept Ii " equivalent to worlds> iust 80 many reaHUeT
,
sdence religion
' e
,
changing character of scientific theory recommends the view that modern science is merely one among many equally valid conceptions of the world, and we are left while a tolerant and open-ended pluralism of world-views The difference between
,
.
necessarily linked with linguistic expression. broader conception of In moving from linguistic meaning to a of course, following the path meaning these philosophers are, he First Logical InHusserl himself took, beginning with t are not moving far enough with vestigation. But in a sense they
,
S even in that t the focus on t noema, which even in tha, ZTZ the to get stuck there. But
-
brief
33
?B fit>
: >:
r
m
I
1
:
.
1 >
'
v,
..
'
MX
.
_.
:.. .
._
1*
240
241
dropped the idea; nor did he by any means solve all the problems surrounding it. But as he moved beyond the Ideas his main
f o
purpose was to integrate the noema (and the noesis) into a larger
context. Objects with their meanings belong to regions of being,
according to Husserl
,
and leaving all the others intact. This is the sort of reflection
'
'
ich wh
'
to distinguish these regions and relate them to the sciences. Acts of consciousness are related not only to their objects but also to each other in a temporal flow; and Husserl also devoted himself to the study of the dynamics of consciousness in its active and passive forms. In a sense the Crisis and in particular some aspects of the theory of the lifeworld can be seen as the culmination of this search for the ultimate or full context of the noesis-noema
,
occurs in the natural attitude when we ask what did she mean? or 'what did I actually see just then? But this 'only creates for each instance a new mode of validity on the natural ground of the world'.37 That is, it leaves intact and unreflected the overall realistic committment of the natural attitude. Husserl insisted that
mmitt-
ion is purely ment on his part to idealism. Rather, its motivat phenomenological. We need to include the whole world in the
relation.
Its relevance for those who focus on the noema is this: because they take their point of departure from linguistic meaning, they may view perceptual meaning on the model of linguistic meaning even //they hold that non linguistic meaning is somehow prior 33 This is especially true of those who hold that perception has a
-
ld as So far I have spoken of Husserl's concept of the lifewor f his day and ours. a response to certain philosophical problems o
itself
the world which belongs precisely to the meaning of any perceptual object H. Dreyfus speaks of 'Husserl's insistance on the
.
either did not see or left inadequately treated These are questions
.
But the lifeworld raises certain questions in its turn which Husser
tent of individual intentional states' 35 but offers no textual evidence for this purported insistance It is not Husserl but those who
,
.
"
to reconcile it with Husserl's overall conception of phenomenology. I shall conclude this essay with a brief sketch of the most important of these questions as I see them.
how
describe the phenomenological reduction for example, as Husserl's answer to 'how to become acquainted with noemata and noematic Sinne\36 as if these were individual items, to be discovered one by one In fact, from the analysis of the natural standpoint and its world in the Ideas to the treatment of the lifeworld in the Crisis Husserl always insisted on treating perceptual meaning - and indeed any other sort of meaning - in
,
.
more recently focus all their attention on the noema to the exclusion of all else who make this mistake Smith and Maclntyre
,
.
this can be seen as an expansion of the notion already included in the Ideas of the natural 'standpoint or 'attitude This basic act proper nor is it the stance of consciousness is neither an
'
ld, the notion The first concerns the pregivenness of the lifewor ted by every particular of its being presupposed and taken for gran We made the point that act, whether of perception or of thought.
'
.
'
'
it somehow untemporal multiplicity of acts and experiences derlies them all. As we have seen, in the Crisis Husserl stresses is literally embodied in the more than before that this stance functioning of sense-perception, in corporeal and 'anonymous or capacity for engagement in its the body as an 'I move 39 These surroundings as they are geared to our surroundings. lity in our exbodily capacities, constitute the deepest-lying rea
:
'
'
,
v,.
- .1
242
243
perience. Here is lodged our most fundamental prior committment to the reality of the world as the horizon for whatever we
do or think
.
Merleau-Ponty's revision of their predecessor's phenomenologythat Husserl here undercuts and finally renders inoperable his phenomenological program. For what he has done is to make the
intentionality of consciousness depend
.
upon
certain
not as a
-
non-intentional capacities and practices 40 To be sure, Husserl in the Ideas tried to express the natural standpoint in a 'thesis', and in the Crisis he speaks of beliefs that have become 'sedimented and can be reactivated and analysed intentionally. But these would make up at most a complex of particular beliefs, and even if these
'
of objects but as a meaning-structure, and the bodily what understands and grasps this meaning. To be sure,
'
were somehow summarized in an overall 'thesis' of the natural attitude this would again be the particular expression of a belief.
lifeworld is not, I fear, so easily answered as the first. It concerns the fact that Husserl includes in the lifeworld, as we saw, not only
1
belief that can be expressed? The argument here is that to treat it as such is to falsify precisely what Husserl was the first to
discover.
perceived things and persons but also cultural properties and even ionideas. Husserl is undoubtedly right that we tacitly and unquest
ingly presuppose these too in our active mental life, that they too ies form the background for the development of scientific theor
\
and the like. But this makes it harder for him to claim that the
the natural standpoint could be 'bracketed' and the phenomenological reduction initiated.41 It has been argued that 'only what is posited as an object can be bracketed 42 But the lifeworld by Husserl's own account is not an object but the prior condition for anything's being posited as an object Our commit'
...
ll, a
'
it.44 For some of the ideas that populate our world are not
rely me
interpretations of reality as of science, religion and philosophy, a whole. Such ideas can become sedimented in such a way that
'
of the life-world Husserl seems not only to have tacitly questioned the pervasiveness and s We but also to have deprived himself of the UlCcUii for investigatmeans 1UI 111 V tankv>l mo t Vim* -i ,v m . . . . ing it phenomenologically. This is often taken to be the meaning of Merleau-Ponty's famous dictum that 'the most important
, v* titattovu
'
our whole 'sense of reality. Husserl seems they affect our 'view
'
,
ults of theoretical to recognize this when he says that the res flow into' the very subsoil out of which they accomplishments
grow xi/ rM
complete reduction'
'
i.
One way to counter this objection is to ask its proponents to tell us more about the nature of these capacities and practices that are presupposed by intentional acts If they are not-intentional, what sorts of relation do they involve? Are they simply objective causal relations? It can be counter-argued that while Husserl's
.
way of experiencing. theory. The theory has become part of our ay affect the Theory in this sedimented and appropriated form m content, of the life-world. very structure, and not merely the damentally from one If this is so, the life-world may differ fun
h to another, depending on the cultural group or historical epoc hold. tations that have taken nature of the sedimented interpre d-structure is pregiven And while it remains true that some worl
the background for any new or taken for granted and serves as
A
u
:} :
f !
ft
244
NOTES
245
theoretical accomplishment it will not always be the same structure that is thus taken for granted. For example Husserl repeated,
But do
such distinctions exist for those who think of every being and
aspect of the world as ensouled or those whose world is organized
Sciences and Transcendental 1 Edmund Husserl, The Crisis of European Nortwestern Un.vers.ty Press, Phenomenology, trans. D. Carr (Evanston:
1970) p. 5.
in terms of the elaborate totemic systems the anthropologists have called to our attention? Could the thing-person distinction be the sedimentation of a system of thought we have inherited in the
modern, western world in part precisely thanks to the advent of
,
1 MifanPKundera, 'The Novel and Europe' New York Review of Books vol. 1 n0 12 (July 19, 1984) p. 15. Harold A Map of Misread (New York: 1975) p. 39 Quot Mirror of Nature (Princeton. Prince4
.
objective science?
Richard Rorty in Philosophy and the ton University Press, 1979), p. 168.
The Crisis, p. 106. Ibid., p. 108.
Ibid., Ibid., Ibid., Ibid., Ibid., Ibid., Ibid., Ibid., p. p. p. p. p. p. p. p. 11. 125. 127. 132. 134. 123. 142. 143.
These considerations make it hard to consider Husserl's concept of the lifeworld as Husserl considered it a response to conceptual and historical relativism Indeed many see Husserl as having
, ,
.
contributed
spread acceptance of such views It is certain that the would not have approved of them But it is also true that he does not provide
(Evanston: Northwes-
20. The Crisis, p. 121. 21. ibid., p. 122. 22. ibid., p. 163.
6 it
d Method (New yo an
pp. 345 ff. k Random House, 1970) 29. Michel Foucault, The Order of Things (New to
r
p XXII.
.
c?vmv>
H ed H
Dreyfus (Camb-
i'i
CP
'
.
V 'J
.
/J
3t
ft:
246
ridge, Mass: the MIT Press, 1982) especially the reprinted articles by D.
Follesdal; and Husserl and Intentionality by Ronald Mclntyre and David Woodruff Smith (Boston: Reidel, 1982). 32. A similar strategy is followed by John Searle in his Intentionality (Camb-
34. The propositional view is held by Searle (op. cit. pp. 40 ff). The 'singular meaning view is advanced by L Miller in his Husserl, Perception and Temporal Awareness (Cambridge, Mass: The MIT Press, 1984) p. 55.
*
36. 'Husserl's Identification of Meaning and Noema' in Dreyfus (op. cit.) p. 91.
37. The Crisis, p. 106.
38, E.g. Smith and Mclntyre in Husserl and Intentionality (op. cit) p. XV.
39. The Crisis, p. 106. 40. Dreyfus (op. cit.) introduction p. 23.
,
42. See Ernst Tugendhat Der Wahrheitsbegriff bei Husserl und Heidegger
(2nd.ed. Berlin: de Gruyter, 1970) pp. 263 f. 43. Maurice Merleau-Ponty Phenomenoly of Perception, trans. C. Smith (New
,
3
'
>
5i :
1
l
" "
:4
is.
1
V
if
iv
'
\-!
s, i i:
.
Husserl's 1905 lectures The Phenomenology of Internal TimeConsciousneeS 1 are one of the most brilliant examples of phenomenological analysis and he deals with just that topic. It is true that Husserl is concerned there with our consciousness of our
,
y
individual pasts in memory and that the historical past is usually thought of as that past which lies beyond our individual ex,
perience, the past of others. Nevertheless, I think our best clue to a phenomenological clarification of historical experience is to be
found in those lectures a better one, actually, than what Husserl says explicitly about history in his later works and a better one,
-
in my opinion than what most phenomenologists have said about it. But what Husserl offers us is no more than a clue - or a series
,
of clues - and in order to appreciate them we have to attend to certain aspects of what he says and be prepared to extend and revise this theory in important ways. One of those, of course, must
reading, I admit - which will bring out those features of the theory most useful for our topic; then I shall
and non-scholarly
i
a phenomenological
"
rZ
i
ii.
I
'
if
250
251
I
husserl's theory
There is no doubt, however, that this is the key to the distinction. Retention is the consciousness of the past as the horizon
The first thing that must be noted about Husserl's theory is that it is not an account of time itself but of how we experience time. And how we experience time is to be distinguished from how we may try to represent or conceptualize time So far phenomenology's approach to time parallels its approach to space. And just
.
thing that takes place This being so the core of Husserl's theory is an account not
.
in space - things that take up or inhabit space, so we experience time by experiencing things in time that is, things that take time things that happen events. The central core of Husserl's theory is its account of our experience of something happening some,
object in space except against a spatial background. Likewise, I cannot experience an event except against a temporal background. To experience an event is to be conscious of something
taking place, that is, its taking the place of something else. What is replaced or displaced recedes into the background but
is not lost from view; I am still conscious of it but in a different
way.
The whole configuration, impressional and retentional consciousness, foreground and background consciousness, make up ben, to live what is to experience an event in the sense of Erle
involves consciousness of the past. So much had already been seen by Brentano and other predecessors. But they thought the simple distinction between consciousness of the past called memory, and consciousness of the present was enough to account for our experience of an event. Husserl's great and most original contribution is to have recognized two distinct forms of consciousness of the past, which he calls retention and recol,
through it. To recollect the event, by contrast, is to relive memory an event that I am not living through. I reproduce it in memory, according to Husserl, including all its original temporal
aspects
d
,
in
i.e., the original configuration of foreground an background. Thus, to recollect an event is to be conscious of a
recollected now and a recollected horizon of
tion. reten
hen, t
lection
these that figures in our consciousness of the present while the latter is what we usually think of when we speak of memory or
,
recollection
d not recollect, as ness whose focal object is a past event. We nee in order to be conscious of the present, in the sense far as I can see
It is easy to misunderstand this distinction to take it for something like the cognitive psychologists' distinction between short-term and long-term memory. Even Husserl seems to have though of it this way in some of his earliest reflections on time
,
-
that we must have retention; whether a full-fledged conscious subject must have recollections as well as retention is a question which as far as I know, Husserl does not take up.
,
ad not been worked out by Husserl and was not fully at his disnosal
-
memory2 - and aspects of his terminology in the 1905 lectures contribute to this misunderstanding as when he speaks of retention as consciousness of the 'just past* 3 The 1905 lectures are hobbled by the fact that the one notion which is in my opinion
,
.
Whether I am conscious of some event in retentional or re tive consciousness is not a question of how far removed it is from
the present; it is
-term
distinction.
collec-
the background
the past
.
it figures for me in rather a question of whether h or whether I of the present I am living throug
oment to the This point can be clarified by returning for a m desktop is the immediate comparison with spatial perception. My
I-
is
252
253
background for the paper on which I write these words; the walls
and bookcases of my study are further away but they are likewise part of the background. Every perceived object must indeed have its immediate background but that has a further background etc.
,
,
Having laid out the core of the theory, we proceed now to some extensions and revisions. We have relied up to now rather heavily,
In time, whatever happens does so against the background of the just past'; but that has its own just past, etc., etc. As Husserl says
'
,
perhaps even more than Husserl himself, upon the comparison between time and space-experience. But one must always remember Bergson's warning against thinking of time in terms of space; and indeed in many respects this comparison is misleading.
Husserl himself was misled, I believe, into conceiving of re-
tention as constituting a field comparable to the visual field. One aspect of this comparison is helpful: as we shift our visual focus from one thing to another particular things can shift from a position of more or less vivid copresence in the background
or indeed the back of my own head or of the paper on which I'm writing. Likewise I can recollect and vividly relive something that
,
toward the vague margins and finally pass entirely out of view
without ever crossing any distinct boundary.5 So the retained, into metaphorically speaking, recedes from view until it passes forgetfulness no longer figures in the background. But we tend
,
'
size
'
Husserl
horizon or
background* for present experience Whether the future 'in itself is or is not completely undetermined and whether or not it turns
,
out other than I expect it to I am conscious of it But again one must distinguish between explicitly attending to the future ,
.
that's the only way it could be measured - and the ide it could question of whether a given object was inside or outs be determined by measuring its objective distance from the center
indeed
,
even though it has no sharp edges. Though this size might differ from one person to the next, and be severely contracted in some case of visual impairment, it could be measured in objective terms
thinking about it imagining it, worrying about it - on the one hand, and the immediate horizon consciousness of the future, which Husserl calls pretention on the other. As with recollection, we need not be attending to the future in order to be conscious,
,
-
of focus
but we always have some protention of it, however vague. The time, like experienced space is a complex structure; one can no
,
of the visual field f the focal object varies considerably depending on the nature o whether it is near or far large or small, etc. In any case I am
verify it empirically that the objective
, ,
size
'
more experience the present in isolation from its past and future than one can see an object apart from its spatial surroundings.
am
field varies considerably and expands and contracts depending o the nature of the temporal focus. Engrossed in a piece of music,
its first note to that moment, which forms the vivid backgrou
,
terms
ent.
yip
-.v:
king. spea
7
Li,.
#
1
254
255
objects 'contract' as a function of their 'distance' from the present.6 What he has in mind is perhaps a row of telephone poles
,
acquires the status of a gap, an interruption in the flow of our talk. But once we return to the theater and the performance continues, it is our conversation which now acquires that status. The horizon of retention, then, not only spans quite different objective lengths but also assumes varying phenomenal features,
But of course
they seem nothing of the sort; what I see is a row of equally tall telephone poles equally far apart; and the laws of perspective are just rules to follow for creating the illusion of this appearance on a flat plane. What Husserl could have meant by applying this
notion to time is hard to imagine; surely he didn't mean that the
first few notes of a Sousa march seem in retention closer together
in time than the more recent and the present ones In fact, what I retain is the unfolding of a steady rhythm not a march which began molto vivace and has gradually slowed down to a stately
.
space indefinitely extending in all directions. And it must be emphasized that this space is experienced, not just conceived or
maestoso.
we are speaking of what is not sensibly presented; but Husserl has taught that much is experienced that is not presented. Just as the objects I see have their hidden sides, so the
thought. True
,
What's more
ly especial
explicit consciousness; they figure in the overall space I inhabit as lf the extended horizon of that part of space which presents itse
directly to my senses
.
When we shift our focus now to time, events similarly exhibit temporal gaps as we experience them I think. I arrive at the
theater
,
with will help us understand the temporal horizon, it is not merely This
retention as short-term memory
the visual field but with the horizon of space as a whole. he horizon ot reinforces our critique of the tendency to consider t l
.
important matter We take our seats for the performance of Hamlet. At intermission we continue our discussion then return to the theater for the rest of the performance. Now when we
,
landmarks that loom behind and around our visual field can be
quite distant
,
house whicn extending, for example, beyond the surrounds me to the streets of the city in which I live and encomtines; wnerepassing those points which figure in my ordinary rou ot tigure in as objects close by even objects known to us, may n
retention into which it fits is part of the conversation that preceded the play We 'take up' the conversation as we say, where we left off not explicitly recalling its details but just continuing
.
but it
..
'
.
it
V'
254
255
6 What he has in mind is perhaps a row of telephone poles, which, according to laws of perspective supposedly seem not only
ent.
,
smaller but closer together the farther away they are. But of course they seem nothing of the sort; what I see is a row of equally tall
telephone poles equally far apart; and the laws of perspective are
space, Husserl himself, in some familiar passages in the Ideas, distinguishes, in effect, between visual field and horizon of space.
important matter We take our seats for the performance of Hamlet. At intermission we continue our discussion then return to the theater for the rest of the performance Now when we resume our conversation at intermission the genuine horizon of
.
temporal gaps as we experience them I think. I arrive at the theater engaged with my companion in a heated discussion of an
, ,
,
eyes, these black spaces are recognized as intricately carved sets of columns themselves now separed by gaps of empty space When we shift our focus now to time events similarly exhibit
,
*
illuminated by sunlight But I view it through a row of arches so that the spectacle is divided into a series of framed segments separated by black spaces By shifting my focus and shading my
.
The example of a row of telephone poles calls to mind another instructive comparison which needs to be introduced by way of extending and revising Husserl's account. Consider an example of the well-known Gestalt shift phenomenon in perception of space Entering the cloister of a medieval monastery I gain a view of the lovely garden in the center its fountain and floral arrangements
-
space indefinitely extending in all directions. And it must emphasized that this space is experienced, not just conceived or thought. True we are speaking of what is not sensibly presented; but Husserl has taught that much is experienced that is not presented. Just as the objects I see have their hidden sides, so the
,
What's more
without at all being the objects o explicit consciousness; they figure in the overall space I inhabit as itself
in all their determinateness
,
loom behind the walls of my study as provenance and potential loom' in this way destinations for my own movements. And they f
'
ially espec
the visual field but with the horizon of space as a whole. This
comparison, then which directly to my t merely with will help us understand the temporal horizon, it is no
ses. If there is an apt .
the horizon of reinforces our critique of the tendency to consider retention as short-term memory. For those determinate spatial
landmarks that loom behind and around our visual field can
be
he house which Quite distant, extending, for example, beyond t surrounds me to the streets of the city in which I live and encomroutines; where passing those points which figure in my ordinary
,
-
ceded the play We 'take up' the conversation as we say, where we left off not explicitly recalling its details but just continuing
.
but it
not figure in as objects close by even objects known to us, may I would argue thai any way in our perception of space. Likewise,
'
,
metaphorically
A:
Si-:::
{
v.
..
254
255
Comparing the visual to the temporal field in another respect Husserl commits a double error, to my mind. He speaks of a
,
temporal perspective, comparable to spatial perspective whereby objects 'contract' as a function of their 'distance' from the present.6 What he has in mind is perhaps a row of telephone poles which according to laws of perspective, supposedly seem not only
, ,
acquires the status of a gap, an interruption in the flow of our talk. But once we return to the theater and the performance continues, it is our conversation which now acquires that status. The horizon of retention, then, not only spans quite different objective lengths but also assumes varying phenomenal features, depending on the event which is the focus of my conscious
attention.
smaller but closer together the farther away they are But of course they seem nothing of the sort; what I see is a row of equally tall telephone poles equally far apart; and the laws of perspective are
.
just rules to follow for creating the illusion of this appearance on a flat plane. What Husserl could have meant by applying this notion to time is hard to imagine; surely he didn't mean that the first few notes of a Sousa march seem in retention closer together
There is another aspect of the comparison with the visual field that needs to be treated with care. In describing the experience of space, Husserl himself, in some familiar passages in the Ideas,
distinguishes, in effect between visual field and horizon of space.
,
in time than the more recent and the present ones In fact, what I retain is the unfolding of a steady rhythm not a march which began molto vivace and has gradually slowed down to a stately
.
An object visually perceived in space is indeed surrounded by a visual field. But that field is itself experienced as a segment of space indefinitely extending in all directions. And it must be
maestoso.
emphasized that this space is experienced, not just conceived or thought. True we are speaking of what is not sensibly presented; but Husserl has taught that much is experienced that is not presented. Just as the objects I see have their hidden sides, so the
,
of
extending and revising Husserl s account. Consider an example of the well-known Gestalt shift phenomenon in perception of space. Entering the cloister of a medieval monastery I gain a view of the lovely garden in the center its fountain and floral arrangements illuminated by sunlight. But I view it through a row of arches, so that the spectacle is divided into a series of framed segments
,
What's more
loom behind the walls of my study as provenance and potential destinations for my own movements. And they 'loom in this way,
in all their determinateness
,
separated by black
eyes
,
explicit consciousness; they figure in the overall space I inhabit as lf the extended horizon of that part of space which presents itse
directly to my senses If there is an apt comparison, then, w ly with will help us understand the temporal horizon, it is not mere the visual field but with the horizon of space as a whole. This horizon of reinforces our critique of the tendency to consider the
.
these black spaces are recognized as intricately carved sets of columns themselves now separed by gaps of empty space. When we shift our focus now to time events similarly exhibit
,
,
temporal gaps as
,
we experience them
important m
Hamlet At intermission we continue our discussion then return to the theater for the rest of the performance. Now when we
,
y companion in a heated
discussion of an
landmarks that loom behind and around our visual field can be house which quite distant, extending, for example, beyond the
surrounds me to the streets of the city in which I live and encomtines; wherepassing those points which figure in my ordinary rou even objects known to us, may not figure in as objects close by
resume our conversation at intermission, the genuine horizon of retention into which it fits is part of the conversation that pre-
left lnterveniexplicitly recalling its details but just continuing off, not d but it ihe
ng first part of the play is not obliterate
,
If we wish to reflect philosophically on history one of the things we need to do is consider the nature of our awareness of the past
,
.
Husserl's 1905 lectures The Phenomenology of Internal TimeConsciousnees 1 are one of the most brilliant examples of phenomenological analysis and he deals with just that topic. It is true that Husserl is concerned there with our consciousness of our
,
,
individual pasts in memory and that the historical past is usually thought of as that past which lies beyond our individual ex,
perience, the past of others Nevertheless, I think our best clue to a phenomenological clarification of historical experience is to be found in those lectures a better one, actually, than what Husserl
.
-
says explicitly about history in his later works and a better one,
,
in my opinion than what most phenomenologists have said about it. But what Husserl offers us is no more than a clue - or a series
,
of clues - and in order to appreciate them we have to attend to certain aspects of what he says and be prepared to extend and
revise this theory in
.
be concerned with getting beyond our individual pasts to the past of others But that is only the last step.
reading, I admit - which will bring out those features of the theory most useful for our topic; then I shall
and non-scholarly
Proceed to the criticisms extensions, and revisions I think necessary; and I shall conclude with some suggestions as to how a revised time-consciousness theory can contribute to a phenomenological
,
clarification
i
of history as a phenomenon.
250
251
HUSSERL'S THEORY
There is no doubt, however, that this is the key to the distinction. Retention is the consciousness of the past as the horizon
The first thing that must be noted about Husserl's theory is that it is not an account of time itself but of how we experience time. And how we experience time is to be distinguished from how we
may try to represent or conceptualize time So far phenomenol.
And just as we have no experience of space except by experiencing things in space - things that take up or inhabit space, so we experience
ogy
'
or background against which the present stands out. The parallel to the experience of spatial objects is helpful. I cannot see an object in space except against a spatial background. Likewise, I cannot experience an event except against a temporal back-
time by experiencing things in time that is, things that take time, things that happen events. The central core of Husserl's theory is its account of our experience of something happening, some, ,
ground. To experience an event is to be conscious of something taking place, that is, its taking the place of something else. What is replaced or displaced recedes into the background but
is not lost from view; I am still conscious of it but in a different
way.
simple distinction between consciousness of the past called memory, and consciousness of the present was enough to account for our experience of an event. Husserl's great and most original contribution is to have recognized two distinct forms of consciousness of the past, which he calls retention and recollection or primary and secondar y memory. It is the former of these that figures in our consciousness of the present while the latter is what we usually think of when we speak of memory or
,
,
ness of the present But of course consciousness of the present involves consciousness of the past. So much had already been seen by Brentano and other predecessors. But they thought the
,
live in through it. To recollect the event, by contrast, is to re h I reproduce it in memory an event that I am not living throug
.
The whole configuration, impressional and retentional consciousness, foreground and background consciousness, make up f Erleben, to live what is to experience an event in the sense o
memory
f foreground and aspects, i.e., the original configuration o fa background. Thus, to recollect an event is to be conscious o recollected now and a recollected horizon of retention.
Retention can be looked at as a horizon-consciousness, iousness of the that belongs necessarily to the makeup of our consc
then,
recollection
whatever; whereas recollection is a particular mode of consciousWe need not recollect, as ness whose focal object is a past event. in order to be conscious of the present, in the sense far as I can see
retention is a question subject must have recollections as well as
which
conscious
It is easy to misunderstand this distinction to take it for something like the cognitive psychologists' distinction between short-term and long-term memory. Even Husserl seems to have though of it this way in some of his earliest reflections on time
,
-
Jl T consciousness of the 'just past'.3 The 1905 lectures are hobbled by the fact that the one notion which is in my opinion *lthe fact that the one tion which is in my opinion the key to the conce
.
l or recollecWhether I am conscious of some event in retentiona tive consciousness is not a question of how far removed it is trom it figures for me in the present; it is ratllCl a question of whether mc present 11 IS rather ci quvonv**
,
*u
disposal
had not been worked out by Husserl and was not fully at his
.
the background of the present I am living through or whether i am attending to it in its own right by reliving it as a segment the past ru . , -aA This point can u clanfied hv returning for a moment todiate the be by ret"r;,"g
.
ii<vh
fVitVi#r l nr whether 1
desktop
'
Si
252
253
background for the paper on which I write these words; the walls and bookcases of my study are further away, but they are likewise
part of the background. Every perceived object must indeed have its immediate background but that has a further background etc.
,
,
Having laid out the core of the theory, we proceed now to some
extensions and revisions. We have relied up to now rather heavily,
In time whatever happens does so against the background of the just past'; but that has its own just past etc., etc. As Husserl says
, '
writing. Likewise I can recollect and vividly relive something that occured just an instant ago; whereas something that happened
,
Retentional consciousness differs from recollection somewhat as my marginal awareness of my bookshelves differs from my imagining the Canadian Parliament Buildings a half-mile from my study. But it is not a question of distance; I can turn to the window so that the Parliament Buildings enter the margin of my vision while I conjure up an image of the bookshelves behind my back
,
perhaps even more than Husserl himself, upon the comparison between time and space-experience. But one must always remember Bergson's warning against thinking of time in terms of space; and indeed in many respects this comparison is misleading.
Husserl himself was misled, I believe, into conceiving of re-
tention as constituting a field comparable to the visual field. One aspect of this comparison is helpful: as we shift our visual focus from one thing to another particular things can shift from a d position of more or less vivid copresence in the backgroun
toward the vague margins and finally pass entirely out of view
So the retained,
of my
Though he does not devote to it the analysis it deserves Husserl recognizes that the future constitutes a similar horizon or background' for present experience. Whether the future 'in itself is or is not completely undetermined and whether or not it turns out other than I expect it to I am conscious of it But again one
'
to think of the visual field as if it had a more or less fixed ight differ even though it has no sharp edges. Though this size m
'
metaphorically speaking recedes from view until it passes into forgetfulness no longer figures in the background. But we tend
size
'
that's the only way it could be measured - and the ide it could question of whether a given object was inside or outs be determined by measuring its objective distance from the focus, center
indeed
,
and the immediate horizon-consciousness of the future which Husserl calls pretention, on the other As with recollection, we need not be attending to the future in order to be conscious but we always have some protention of it however vague. The
,
.
hand
of focus
eyes,
and margin.
size
'
more experience the present in isolation from its past and future tHon /MtA * *
terms,
ent.
What I am doing seeing, feeling now is part of a temporal pattern that makes it what it is for me gives it its meaning. In Husserl's
,
ding on field varies considerably and expands and contracts depen e of music, the nature of the temporal focus. Engrossed in a piec at any moment it is the entire piece, trom to use Husserl's example
,
large or small, etc. In any case I am as we might call it, of the temporal
d me, so to speaK of what I am hearing; the music is all aroun ithout a trace b what happened before it began has sunk w
kground bac
king.
7r-
'
254
255
a flat plane What Husserl could have meant by applying this notion to time is hard to imagine; surely he didn't mean that the first few notes of a Sousa march seem in retention closer to
.
according to laws of perspective, supposedly seem not only smaller but closer together the farther away they are But of course they seem nothing of the sort; what I see is a row of equally tall telephone poles equally far apart; and the laws of perspective are
,
.
Comparing the visual to the temporal field in another respect Husserl commits a double error to my mind He speaks of a temporal perspective comparable to spatial perspective whereby objects 'contract' as a function of their 'distance' from the
,
,
.
pres,
objective lengths but also assumes varying phenomenal features, depending on the event which is the focus of my conscious
attention.
space, Husserl himself, in some familiar passages in the Ideas, distinguishes, in effect, between visual field and horizon of space.
nt and the present ones In fact, what I retain is the unfolding of a steady rhythm not a march which
.
these black spaces are recognized as intricately carved sets of columns themselves now separed by gaps of em
, ,
lovely garden in the center y I gain a view of the its fountain and floral arrangements illuminated by sunli ght. But I view it through a row of arches so
,
The example of a row of telephone poles calls to mind another instructive comparison which needs to be introduced by way of extending and revising Husserl's account. Consider an example of the well-known Gestalt-shift phenomenon in Entering the cloister of perception of space. a medieval monaster
emphasized that this space is experienced, not just conceived or thought. True we are speaking of what is not sensibly presented; but Husserl has taught that much is experienced that is not presented. Just as the objects I see have their hidden sides, so the
,
What's more
loom behind the walls of my study as provenance and potentia loom' in this way, destinations for my own movements. And they f
'
ially
my
without at all being the objects o explicit consciousness; they figure in the overall space I inhabit as ts itself the extended horizon of that part of space which presen If there is an apt comparison, then, which directly to my senses t merely with will help us understand the temporal horizon, it is no
in all their determinateness
,
.
to the theater for th then return e rest of the performance. Now when we resume our conversation at intermission the genuine horizon of retention into which it fits is part of the conversation that preceded the play We Hake up' the conversation as we say, where we left off not explicitly recalling its details but just contin it uing
,
,
.
engaged with my companion in a heated discussion of an important matter. We take our seats for the performance of Hamlet
.
d the house whicn quite distant, extending, for example, beyon h I live and encomsurrounds me to the streets of the city in whic routines; where passing those points which figure in my ordinary even objects known to us, may not t.gure . as objects close by I would argue that any way in our perception of space. Likewise,
,
landmarks that loom behind and around our visual field can be
the visual field but with the horizon of space as a whole. This der the horizon ot reinforces our critique of the tendency to consi l rminate spatia retention as short-term memory. For those dete
but it
'
metaphoncally
h still form tne speaking now quite distant from the present, whic
.. .
256
257
no difficulty in conceiving of the present as its background. But we should go even further. What should be retained from the
A final criticism of the comparison between spatial and temporal experience is much more far-reaching It concerns the very notion of focus and horizon or foreground and background We maintained that this is the key to our understanding of Husserl's notion of retention and so it is. But like Husserl we have located
.
comparison with spatial perception is not so much the focusbackground scheme itself, as the idea that the various elements in the scheme make up a Gestalt, a whole which is prior to these elements, and determines their sense as they determine each other reciprocally. The foreground-background analogy helps us to get beyond the naive linear model of time and the simple perception-
plus-memory notion of time-experience. But a more sophisticated use of the analogy would recognize that future and present as wel as past, can be considered the background against which the other
experience
it is to live through events; and many of the events we live through are our own actions I would suggests that if there is a focus or a foreground for consciousness in performing actions it lies in the
.
There is a further reason for reconsidering the foregrundbackground scheme and this goes for experienced space as well
,
Humean term 'impression' suggests another source of his view Something like the distinction between vivacit be at work in his theory. As we know y and weakness may the Husserlian view that I am questioning becomes even more important in his later years. The Quellpunkt or bubbling fountain metaphor for the present, in the 1905 lectures becomes the lebendige Gegenwart of the C
.
is prior to potentiality in the order of being may have led him to suppose that same priority for consciousness Husserl's use of the
.
background image is to be consequence that the present figures in the background of our temporal experience as does the past But I don't think we should find this odd. I believe Husserl may have been misled not only by the comparison with space but by some ontological and epistemological prejudices as well He correctly saw that time-experience must unite a consciousness of what is with that of what is not. A remnant of the view that actuality
, ,
.
a sun-drenched beach in the Caribbean, and my the ;s**e a pasi well-known 'far-away look' what happens to
thi
actually inhabiting?wholebest way into the backgrouna jZ The recedes to s real space as a
,
disappears; I
but just
TZL
it. Butsee anything in particular, nothing presents in a certain sense I do not perc ve it don even
viewSomething similar happens, it seems to me, w
,
,
me when we indulge in
.
recollection
inhabit present time I continue to live. throug it figures as the focus of my interest, preseni
di
' ent experience A past time
manuscripts later on
protentional future is in some respects more vived more central, in our living through ongoing events than the present and I find
,
after all
&
the
doing all this now i.e., in the real now, ana is continuous with its own pretentions anu can be the foreground then, and present
,
,
background. so
258
'
259
much to demonstrate just how confused the foregroundbackground analogy can become useful as it may be
,
.
'
that sunny Carribean beach I am not only conscious of the bleak northern reality against which it so tantalizingly stands out; I am also vaguely aware perhaps with some melancholy of the vast distances I would have to cross in order to reach it Note well: if I were daydreaming of Shanggri-La or revelling in the deli Plato's forms or Godel's numbers ghts of no such relation would exist. But here I am imagining a location in real space What I am calling to mind lies within the ultimate horizon of my present space. Looked at the other way around, the imagined horizons of the imagined object extend to join the real horizon of the real present. In time similarly when I recollect something
,
of retention out there in the dark as it were bringing it back into the light. But if we think of the horizon of retention as extending indefinitely with its vague and sharp contours its landmarks and obscure recesses then we are more inclined to think of recollection as a process in which I pick out something within this horizon something from the vast background of my present experience, and focus my attention upon it. To make this point the analogy with space can be useful one more time When I exercise my imagination and daydream about
,
past, or rather, our understanding of the nature of our awareness of the historical past?
This topic is often approached, especially in the context of the critical or analytic philosophy of history, in the following way: We assume the existence of a full-fledged historian, equipped with all the aims, interests and skills of his profession, but of course
,
firmly rooted in the present. We note further that within the scope of his present experience are some documents and ruins, and then
we ask: How
,
have two distinct modes of being aware of the historical past, and that they differ somewhat as retention differs from recollection.
d,
which is
tinguishes it from my imagining some event in a past which is not my own an event I never lived through To genuinely recollect something I have to have experienced it in the first place. But this
,
.
is equally an element in the retentional horizon of my present experience Or, again to reverse it the past event I recollect has within its future horizon the very present act in which I recollect It. Husserl spoke of this in section 25 of the 1905 lectures. This is, of course what makes it a case of recollection and dis,
,
Past that is comparable to Husserl's notion of reten he distance again we must avoid giving too much importance to t
tion
cal
Once
happened before one's birth or a long time ago. Historical even t just human are going on today By historical events we mean no events that as opposed to animal or physical events, but those may
.
of individual politicians be earthquakes n scientists riots or elections or price increases - and so o . fcxc u s lives, but also events that ed would be events that affect nobody
or diseases, actions
,
or
ft
"
..
260
261
are quite significant for an individual or even a small have no effect beyond that group,
but
Given this
I want to claim that we all have such a context at our disposal, though its exicnt and ucians umcr uunsiucrauiy num one jjcisuh tnougn us extent anu details differ considerably from unc person
individual ex
it is to be noted that I can participate in an historical event - in the sense of contributing to it without realizing that I am doing so
,
-
As for participation
on the radio I can be an eyewitness or a participant or finally I can be one who singlehandedly carries out a historical action
.
event of the performance to the interpersonal event a deux of the conversation. Likewise, we have ability to shift from these varying
experience historical
our question here concerns experience: Husserl asked how it is that we experience events and we are asking in particular how we
,
this contribute to inflation without seeing my action as anything but an individual choice. I can also be an e historical event without re yewitness to an cognizing it as one such as a secret meeting of the emissaries of two countries at war. But in these cases I would not be experiencing the historical event as such. And
,
social and social and personal contexts to mat of the larger-scale social events that oi me larger-scaie that make up historical reality. The various events we experience make up historical reality. The various that J
are not simply in sequence, then, but take place on different levels,
each with its own temporality.
If we grant this much, we can discern something like a retentionh al consciousness of the historical past. It may be thought that suc awareness is extremely short-term and would consequently not encompass what we usually think of as the historical past. But here again I think we should take the spatial metaphor of background*
seriously in the sense that the immediate horizon has its own
,
events.
whole
Let us now apply to such experience some of the things we said about the temporality of unfolding events important speech by If I am hearing an a political leader or participating in a demonstration or casting my vote in an election, each of these has its own internal or 'short-term' temporality in which each phase is experienced in the context of the unfolding event or action as a
.
and so on indefinitely. The social and polit world in which we live and act, and in which things happen, is part
further horizons
,
ical
awareness of this extended background is built into our exit is riddeled perience, however vague its contours, however much
with obscurities gaps, empty spaces.
,
to a perceived
that have happened to me leading up to it, but rather its own proper temporal context. The election is the conclusion of an
its background, which is not just a sequence of the variousagainst perienced things
Still
d
-
horizon and an horizon-consciousness we are speaking of here. linked to the other otner words however extensive it is, it is inseparably however extensive it is,K1SrL7he context the context Present, and its status for us is precisely that0 beingdently of its that of present What we are claiming is that independently ot its
,
indefinite extention of this historical background for our awaren it is precisely a ess, at the same time we must remember that In
,
. .
vi;hether
not L CLZtowTT311 hiSt0riCal b* t0againstri* historical baCk8round' is exPe the * nst to beTbr h,Ch " Pr0perly belon8s- Or to put it another way, disposal th hT?context whichhiSt0ricaI it to have at one's sposal the histoncal 08 is gives it
r,enCe
anv
temp
constitutes an interrupted
in the discipline of history or in other ways, the the discipline of history or in other .
"
s sense.
t be honzonaiiy showed that to experience the present we mus the h.stonca aware of the past I want to say that to experience ncal pas Present we must be horizonally aware of the h.sto ar.son be raised to the comp But here a serious objection may ess but u we are proposing Retention is a horizon-consciousn
,
.
3*
ft
V-
3W
3:
1
i
or
I.
262
263
distinguished
.
merely think or know or believe on the one hand and that which is directly given on the other? It is true we are running together things that can be thus
, ,
hand. Are we not running together here two things that must be phenomenologically distinguished namely that which is as Husserl would say only 'emptily intended' i.e., that which we may
,
,
directly experienced as present. The examples we used of historical events - the speech the demonstration, the act of voting - are perhaps events that we may live through directly experience. But what we called the proper temporal context of these events what leads up to them may not have been directly experienced at all Such a background or context may consist of an amalgam of things heard about read about, i.e. acquired second- and third
, ,
,
the past; nor is it a matter of all those things I may know about the past - the dates and stories I remember from my history classes and may be able to recite if asked. Rather, it is knowledge of
" ' ' T
-
'
the sort that Husserl called sedimentation. His well-known me son mat nussen caiieu smunenuuiun. ..v..-".. geological metaphor suggests that which has sunk below the Husserl surface but continues to support what is on the surface. " availed himself of this metaphor in his later work precisely in order
especially at the level of social reality In his time-consciousness lectures Husserl made things easy for himself by restricting his examples to sounds or notes in r l -:- xi 3 melodv anH i a melody and considering them as pure hyletic data. But he realized that the flux of consciousness he was describing consists of complex intentional experiences with objects horizons, and contexts at many different levels As we pointed out earlier it was Husserl himself who taught us by contrast to the simplistic sense-data theories of his predecessors that perception is much
,
perception, but which recedes into a position comparable to a spatial horizon. It is that which figures in my awareness of the
present, frames or sets it off without my having to think about
it explicitly
.
he present, its consciousness theory: its status as background for t l 'distance', character of extending indefinitely into the tempora its comprising gaps interruptions, vague areas, and sharp
,
contours or landmarks
broader
ed.
a vote. Or rather these are not different things: I experience the one as the other and I do this by virtue of including in the horizon
,
,
the prime minister giving an economic speech; one thing to see a lot of people running, another to witness or participate in a demonstration; one thing to pull a lever in a booth, another to cast
,
recognize a complex interaction of the meant. It is one thing to hear a person talking
or to change its salient features, historical ing on the focus of the present To give two examples of
,
.
depend-
t: Demonspas
latively
ly to a context opposition to it; civil-rights struggles belong proper that encompasses the whole history of racial oppression including to oc slavery abolition, and the Civil War. A further feature s but active noted: to the extent that we are not passive observer s for us me Participants in the historical scene, its proper focus i
,
"
s:
efore one's birth etc. Once we acknowledge that hearsay a.i;*. . nowledge that hearssiv acquired opWonV ZTh ack
, ,
It is because experience at the social level i that the horizon of th s such an amalgam e historical past can extend so far indeed into the distant past b
,
a temporal 7 Past, present, and future - are experienced as ln which each determines the nature of the others.
'
its various
uesw
nsw
-
rn
ical p obvious truth obvious truth that we live the historical past m part. histor ast I** before we ever turn our
otin
-
the past. We have seen how the horizon of the historical pas
:{
7f
>:
:
265
264
be compounded of bits and pieces of hearsay, things learned in school, etc. It is also more directly encountered in the streets and buildings of our cities which comprise a social context for the most
part older than we are. When we do turn our attention to the past,
broader than either just consciousness of It indicates a preoccupation with the the past or historical inquiry. h almost, that has run parallel with the growt past, a fixation on it
of knowledge and is
-
as in historical inquiry, we are not venturing out into an unknown domain to reconstruct something of which we are totally ignorant, on the basis of a few scraps of evidence; rather, we are picking
made possible by it even as it spurs it on. In from veneration of the old, antiquarianism, preocall its forms ion of the authentic, historical nostalgia cupation with restorat
luation of the present - in all these t with its concomitant deva
here
which is no longer continuous with t we have almost lost, one which gives the present its sense. present as the background
political event; or it may be something hidden in the recesses amongst the familiar landmarks something that puzzles us precisely because it is a gap in the terrain In these respects, our explicit attention to the historical past is like what Husserl called recollection It is to relive or reproduce events I am not now living through Of course, unlike recollection proper, the events in question may not have been lived through
,
.
. .
her things, help us to Perhaps the present analysis can, among ot It seems we are living in an age in understand these phenomena.
and needs to be restored by voluntary action.
seems not to take care of itself which the continuity with the past
by me. But as belonging to the real past they are nonetheless continuous with the time I am living through and they belonged
,
It may be pointed out that the purpose of historical inquiry is not merely to call to mind and bring into clear focus things we
had only a vague awareness of; it is often designed to revise or even fully overturn our naive views of the past Of course this is
.
true; and historical inquiry after it has carried out this task, can
,
actually change even our background awareness of the past once the knowledge it brings us has become sedimented But to see all history as revisionist history merely confirms my point that such inquiry always begins with a conception of the past, and not in a vacuum. Also while historical inquiry may set out to overturn our view of particular parts of the past, it nevertheless situates those parts within a larger historical context it does not question. Thus the retention-like horizon of the historical past encompasses and surrounds what we know or think we know explicitly about
,
.
the past
In this way we can gain a new conception of our relationship to the historical past a relation that exists as a horizon-conscious,
iW
fe-
:.
' ill
m
r
.
266
NOTES
"
'
.
6- Ibid
405) but also 'subjectivity' (404) consciousness and umty of consciousness' (200) 'faculties' (Vermogen), character, viction' (Gesinnung) (201) memory (205), and even so*
,
(199
14 of Husserliana dating from the 1920s,4 we find that. Hussen kes this expression very seriously indeed There we find mm attributing to certain fo rms of community not only P onau y
,
.
cation of the use of such a phrase We might thus suppose that Husserl is merely indulging in a fa on deparler buf if we consult the manuscripts on intersubjectivity, in particular those of volume
.
Personalities of a higher order' makes its appearance in other works (e g The Crisis)* they likewise lack any detailed justifi.
characteristics to certain kinds of social groups as well as to individuals He does not follow up here on the precise manner in
.
When he reaches section 56 of the Fifth Cartesian Meditation Husserl claims he has completed the clarification of the 'first and lowest level' of intersubjectivity or of what he calls the communalization of monads, and can now proceed to 'higher levels' that he says present 'relatively minor difficulties' 1 Discussing various forms of communalization Husserl mentions 'the pre-eminent types that have the character of 'personalities of a higher order'' In using this phrase Husserl is in effect attributing personal
,
,
'
'
'
'
'
often use some of th eHusserl to characterize way to insistathat h terms goes out of his certain u ordinary speech but talk is not inauthentic Ckeine meigentliche Rede [404] no me logy ('keine blosse Analog [201]) He the term Gemeingeist by the nineteenth century humanisis
,
'
.
IS
268
269
ward one
as misguided he says, as same psychologists to make individual mnsrmncni an epiphesame psychologists to make individual consciousness
,
debunk such terminology as mystical or fictitious (404) But the attempt to reduce Gemeingeist to a collection of individuals is just
.
~
4~U,,~U
1-
.A.
--
v**x
, iM
to lv/
s world, and inquiring after the manner in which social UI11L5 lllilKC LUCH appeal ailVt m Liiat wunw. units make their appearance in that world. What sort of entity is avu. v* the family the university, the Society for Phenomenology and
'
,
the analog
attem
n..:-.- -i t*i-m u.. tnc wux1,: ..a.o, Existential Philosophy, the working class, or the t United ctoAc States, icmmi ruuosupuy, ?1W
- ---j-' ~
w j
i*f<va.a4w o
xyx
U?
ItUV
nomenon of matter (404) I find it remarkable that Husserl seems explicitly to embrace in
.
and h0W do these Phenomena fit into spatial and bodily surroundmy perceptual and conceptual world? How do they figure in my
ings, how are they encountered, how are they given? In such a context of investigation one could then ask the crucial question: Do I experience, encounter, interact with such social entities, large
became increasingly a source of inspiration for Husserl in his later years, especially when dealing with social topics, was suspicious of the notion of a superpersonal subjectivity, in spite of his closeness to German Idealism 6
.
Alfred Schutz, for example rejects it in no uncertain drawing on Max Weber for support 5 Even Dilthey who
.
or small, in ways which are importantly similar to the manner which I experience, encounter and interact with individual persons?
in
Such an approach seems to present rich possibilities, but it is burdened with a difficulty that has already been hinted at. It tends to place the social unit over against me, as an object for my
he scientific and subjectivity, and thus suggests, for one thing, t
Indeed
about the notion Husserl has a guarded respect for the German
.
Idealists
the subjectivity of the investigator Perhaps these considerations have something to do with the fact that the concrete analyses that Husserl does devote to this topic in volume 14 which are in any
.
nomenological analysis would seem to prescribe that any treatment of transindividual subjectivity would make it subordinate to
whatsoever should be analyzed in terms of its relation to the conscious life of an individual subject The very notion of phe.
ling with it, being person suggests other possibilities as well: strugg
is still irreducibly other and 'over against' me, and in this analogy
individual is being left out, namely, the fact that the indiv
ial unit for the an important aspect of the nature of the soc
idual
can be a member of it. Although there are many different ways nse, that I can see, of encountering another person, there is no se
erson.
in which one can be a participating member of another p to the Yet the notion of participation seems a better avenue
han its givenness as an t
often deals in such a conception and that it has also been used philosophically. But can it be understood phenomenologically? The approach that immediately suggests itself and this is largely Husserl's approach - is to proceed as usual in the first person singular adopting the phenomenological standpoint to,
-
In the following I do not intend to present Husserl's analysis or to criticize it though I shall draw on it occasionally I shall rather attempt on my own to test the degree to which one can make
,
.
putative subjectivity of the social unit it, then, not as one which object. Let us try to consider the social un h I am a member. Thus, stands over against me but as one of whic
which I participate would seem reference? A larger subjectivity in e theless, I think som to be neither cogito nor cogitatum. Never
phenomenological analysis? up against and reveal the limits of ua cogitatum, Where does it fit into the scheme ego cogitatum q phenomenological frame of which was Husserl's formula for the
1
270
271
1
This first level which Husserl has tried to account for in the Fifth Meditation is what Schutz later called the face-to-face
,
,
progress can be made in this direction starting with what Husserl calls the 'first and lowest level' of intersubjectivity
,
.
I
8
bird m flight.9 It is odd that owuui* should ..~ hit on this have uuu in lu m. n uu tuai. Schutz marvelous example and yet failed to grasp the richness of its implications His striking and much-quoted phrase 'we grow older
.
emerged from Husserl's analysis is that this one-to-one encounter essentially involves a third element the common surrounding world. The other is in my world, but as a consciousness he or she is also for the world and the world is for him or her as well as
suggests the clock, ticking away while our two streams of ex-
perience run along parallel to each other. Of course Schutz meant, in using the word 'together', to indicate the mutual awareness of
this passing time because it is also true, but irrelevant, that I am
,
I
!
I
*
I
t
v
.
my own
a common desk top but rather as a single environment consciously given to both of us - and one which by the way, also includes both of us among its constituents Simplifying we could say that the encounter with another person is first of all this: the encounter w,th .n r with another perspective on the world a perspective which is not
,
,
.
cular place in the world in which we sianu and race eacn other. wc stand anu face each otner But again we share this common place not as two pencils share
-
common - meaning of course, not common characteristics or a common essence but something particular in common: this parti,
-
is crucial to this example is not that, along with the bird's flight, growing we are aware of objective time passing (which is what
'
growing older along with everyone else in the universe. But what
,
I
\
>
.Y.nwi
what Husserl calls internal time-consciousness are share that the common object ex hypothesi, is an event, something unfolds in time. In order that there be a common object for us,
s, must bear within itself the retention of other
past pnases oi me event auu f
_
That is,
the me
Now
future
of
the event s
.
: h
.
them; midThevu With mine in virtue ofif I don even >mmon object and the LI hT interlo ing of perspectives into a single syst T? 00 0Ur COmmon environment Further*
.
memory I have not only a single object but also a single subject that is, the plurality of experiences are all m intersubjectivity this is n y own; whereas in ot the L;it5C in the tace-to-face encounter case In tne face-to-face encounter thOUfm I am ni Z ~C -.1- _ lllc though T Jim SJWSW-r* l t have
,
. *
this plurality instead of being spread out in time Another and more i is simultaneous. mportant difference, of course is that in
, ,
intersubjectivity we also have a plurality of experiences of one and the same 'object' - at least the common environment - but
,
,
a plurality of experiences of one and the same object The object is both a unity and a plurality of ways of showing itself. In
.
I am aware ot an
ons
some of which are not my own, a single sucn and protentions te. system in which my own experiences participa m of pe specIt is the common object, along with the single syste tives and time consciousness it implies, which is the key, in my
view
,
I think
'
fact, which Schutz fails to note, that it is the common obje* r event or even simply the - whether object in the narrow sense o common environment - which gives rise to a single system is
o
that me otner was mou-unemww tn Schutz part. More importZ l .. ant uiai the other was thou-oriented
'
because he defines
tl0
e other as it is to
wi
h we both participate H is this interlocking experiences in whic ost of our uses of the term single system that best corresponds to m single system that best correspunu h the term frequently appl.. we. it is this system, in fact, to whic itr nnires a third thing, tne hing, J
it.
A:
r.
. .
&1V
:
. .
.
272
273
common object
this system's own object the thing we see the bird's flight we observe, the surrounding world which is our surroundings, not
just mine. The we-relationship then, is mediated by the common object. Schutz' description suggests a staring match or perhaps
,
is the primordial or most authentic form of encounter with other persons, as opposed to other, possibly derivative forms, it seems certain that it is the key to the foundation of we-relationships that form a distinct class. The intersubjective unity of a common project is both more fragile and more concrete than that of a
lovers gazing deep into each other's eyes. But in a staring match the other disappears as other and lovers who do not get on to other things besides gazing will not have much of an affair. Because every face-to-face encounter involves the common
,
common perception. The observers of the bird in flight or the spectators at a football game or at the theater are fused by their common object, but they take the object to exist independently of themselves. For the participants in a common project, like a
surroundings
every such encounter would seem to involve the establishment of a we-relationship this sense that I am participating in a subjectivity larger than my own We seem to have established the subjectivity of the social unit at too low a level Yet Husserl called even this
.
barn raising, their common object or objective is literally created by their commitment and their activity, first mental and communicative and then physical. For spectators and observers, their
famous example of what the traffic accident does to the collection of people at a sidewalk cafe If the object is an unfolding event like the bird's flight it is spread out over time and the we-relation.
even while remaining at the same level A face-to-face encounter may be fleeting its only object the totality of objects that is the common environment, including the participants themselves. But a common focus that is, a particular object within that
,
.
ization
call differing degrees of focus in intersubjective experience; and these may be seen to correspond to different degrees of communal,
level Vergemeimchaftung - communalization or the establishment of a community We have already discerned what we might
.
we-relationship seems called forth and sustained in being by the independent object. For the participants in a common endeavor, the object is called forth and sustained in being by their werelationship Thus, the latter form of relationship is not at the
.
as we might say, and is in this sense not subject to an outside reality. But at the same time, it receives no support for its existence from outside and is dependent on its own internal
mercy of its object
,
and intentionality to groups by means of the we-re differs in at least one important respect from certain classical
conceptions
.
lationship
r
..
M-
goals that are inknown to and even at variance with the purposes
,
Si
>
.
-7t
:
realization
J
'
passively given, but is actively constituted as lying in a future to be realized Constituted along with it are the means to its
.
The we-relationship is cemented even further if the common focus is not a perceived object or event but a common objective to be attained Here the common object is not constituted as
.
>
.= ::'.-.-j-v-iSk;
v
.
mally and for the most part', not as entities present at hand or standing over against me, but as it were obliquely, through the common project in which we are engaged 11 Whether or not this
.
means-end relation steps that are often tasks that can be divided up among the participants in the project It was Heidegger, of course who stressed the fact that others are encountered proxi,
.
ally m It might be noted further that the common object, especi the sense of the common objective, seems the key not only to tfte ded as its opposite, we-relationship but also to what might be regar
conflict between persons
food
,
.
sued by contrast participants are quite conscious of the ends pur ls serially the group; but it is still the group, and not the individua or collectively that pursues these ends.
,
Even when the conflict derives mehow no conflict unless the differing objectives so
same elements
**
,
>:1
Ft:
a::
y
IP
t
-
s?.
:.
such as means. Here, ri '} the objecti is a common object or objective is not to say that
I*
.
.
I
.
"
r1
-
mi:
#5?
r-
..
r
.
ft
274
275
is to be realized in common One party's possession and consumption of the food supply is meant precisely to exclude the
.
changing view of the servant, who first sees his own contribution to the common action as 'inessential', then comes to regard
other's attainment of the same objective What is interesting about these two alternatives conflict and cooperation is that in either case we could say with Hegel that each consciousness seeks the death of the other 12 in the first case by eliminating him as a threat to the attainment of my objective in the second case by
.
instructive force, just as it has dialectical force in Hegel. It is well known that for Hegel, in the community of mutual recognition,
the master-servant relation is not simply done away with. It is aufgehoben, and that means both surpassed and retained. It is
retained in the sense that the two functions, master and servant,
are still present; but it is surpassed in that they are not vested in particular individuals or classes. Rather, each is for himself and
for the others both master and servant. We can still distinguish
reading Hegel's work though he was surely aware of its presence there. In any case Husserl like Hegel sees this relation as significant in the formation of community or 'personality of a higher order'. What interests Husserl about it is that the master supplies the will and the servant provides the execution of the action 14 but
,
between will (or formulation) and execution, but the individual participates in both. The genuine subject of the activity is the spirit of the community which Hegel calls 'the I that is a We, the We
,
that is an I'
19
because the action is the unity of will and execution, the action cannot be said to belong to either of them exclusively but is strictly speaking the action of the rudimentary community they form Again we see the common third element in this case the action,
.
subjective and conscious being but is even more genuinely and really so than the individual consciousness. But let us proceed
more cautiously
.
each individual sees his own activity as a functioning part. It should be remembered that for Hegel too, this all-important human relation is mediated by a third element that is, nature, whose mastery is the common business of the two
,
as the key to the intersubjective relationship; and again we see that the action is a single system of subjective accomplishment in which
participants.
k HusierUansTt- to wltaTble
,
that part of the sense of the encounter for the individual, for me, that I participate in a single system of perspectival views that is interlocked and unified in a way that is similar to the cooraectives within my nation of temporally spread-out views and persp corresponds to i own experience. The unity derives from or or envionment common object, whether merely as common common focus within that environment. The objectis at on wity and a multiplicity of ways of presenting itself. This is n '
"L
i nough he does note that the master-servant relation is commonly based on power and threat 16 Husserl does not bring out he explosive features of the relation the internal contradictions that Hegel depicts so brilliantly These have their source in the
,
.
aspects consists not so much of PersPef"' ain us mai are functioning parts 01 a J** fio?s ,ha, are functioning pans of a single * c0tamon object
.
276
277
dependent on the inter subjective unity In Husserl's language here the common object is not passively but actively, constituted
.
truly created
ness, a single one, which lasts just as long as its object is precisely a common object. I think that in a certain sense we can attribute not only consciousness but even self-consciousness to certain forms of commu-
We have hardly mentioned communication and language so far; but it is at this point at the level of the common project that it
,
commonly becomes decisive 20 This is a vast topic needless to say, and we cannot go into it extensively But what strikes me here is
.
nity. What is self-consciousness, phenomenologically speaking? Again, it is not the static conception of a self observing itself. It
isomorphic with what we have been discussing so far. Our common language if we have one, lies spread out around us like our common environment and like it forms a vast system of interlock,
occurs rather when the unity of the temporal phases of experience is not only lived through but is made thematic. When I experience reflectively or act deliberately, it means that I am not so much
,
our
into steps and stages means and ends. In the case of the project,
thing distinguishable from both our words and our thoughts - the common meaning and though it the common referent When I speak to someone I say something - about something And I
.
such attention is often necessary to its formulation, and often becomes necessary in the course of its execution, whether to remind myself of what I am doing or to revise my plan as I go
participate, while it has a simultaneous unity-in-multiplicity has a protentive and retentive unity-in-multiplicity as well, again provided by the single object The multiplicity of conscious experiences had by the individual parties to a common experience is no more a mere multiplicity than the object is a mere multiplicity of private and particular aDDearances it ic a cvct*Tw i nc
,
.
concerned with The unity of inter subjective experience has the same feature The single system of interlocking views in which I
.
.
taught us that the unity of consciousness at the individual level is not an abstract or timeless ego that stands above or behind the multiplicity of experiential phases. It is nothing but the internal temporal unity achieved when each phase resumes its own past and projects its own future the phases being linked to the temporal
,
Have we arrived at any phenomenological justification for attributing subjectivity or indeed consciousness to any sort of social unit? I think the key to intersubjectivity as to subjectivity itself, is temporality Husserl and other phenomenologists have
,
communicate with him to the extent that he understands what I am saying about what. Again it is the third element the common theme distinct from but shared by the two speakers, which tneme speakers which but shared by,
,
perhaps in response to changed circumstances. This sort of reflection whether prospectively, retrospectively, or both, draws together the disparate and fleeting elements and phases of my experience or activity and impose s on them - or discovers or rediscovers in them or reimposes on them - a sense, a direction, xw. v,. reimposes
along
,
"
"
i*
*-
myself that accounts for what I'm doing a story that I may tell to others or merely to myself.
such reflection consists in constructing as it were a story abou Now I want to maintain that something similar takes place a
,
ctivc level too. It may be that only individuals ten the intersubje
stories
n
elements he draws together into a temporally articulated whole ar ne the elements of his own experience only but those also too other participants in the common project or course of expene . experience described the action proposed or articma , then not my action my experience, but ours. Now to the e
,
but they don't always tell them about themselves or us the first person singular. Often the storyteller speaks to, and o disparaie behalf of the group to which he belongs; and the
,
v ;
. .
is going on, we have, it seems to me, not merely a single exp objective not only a single system of coordmated sea but also a single reflection or self-consciousness expres
,
j\
278
279
ft
single story subscribed to by alL In this way the we can be seen not only as conscious not only as active, but also self-conscious,
NOTES
Edmund Husserl, Cartesian Meditations, trans. D. Cairns (The Hague: M. Nijhoff, 1960), pp. 128 f. Ibid. p. 132.
journalists and historians. In constitutes inter subjective self-con sciousness however, only to extent that it is taken up and believed
,
ing in communal life we arrive at the historical character of social existence and the origin of historical inquiry. But this would be
,
by the other members of the group If we pursue far enough the role of storytelling and storybeliev.
The Crisis of European Sciences and Transcendental Phenomenology, trans. D Carr (Evanston: Nortwestern University Press, 1970) p. 188 Husserliana vol. 14, Zur Phanomenologie der Intersubjektmtat: Zwetter
.
it is possible despite appearances to the contrary to make phenomenological sense of the idea of personalities of a higher order.
, ,
and Wilhelm Dilthey Der Aufbau der geschichtlichenPress, in den GetsKsF. Lehnert (Evanston: Northwestern University Welt 1967), 199. See
wissenschaften
,
The importance of the common world in this analysis reveals the bmto ad
ultimately the inapproprlateness
,
in my view, of the J ' monadology which Husserl invokes in the Fifth Meditate and e ewhere. Cf. Cartesian Meditations pp. 115-116, 126ff.; Crisis, p. 185; mdHusser
,
liana
11. See Being and Time, trans. J. Macquarne and E. Robinson (New York: Rotnnson v Harper and Row 1962), pp. 153 ff.
,
d claren.
14 p. 169.
,
16. Ibid
-
Husserliana, vol. 14 p. 193. I9- Phenomenology of Spirit, p. HO. mmon projects Though not om of course a necessary condition: there can be c
,
-
f
" " .
If
185
p::.
-
1*
round
For those whose first priority is ontological homogeneity such notions are like a lurid family scandal that has to be hushed up
away. Reaction among this group has ranged from a disdainful refusal to admit the problem - intentionality is declared without argument to be appearance, not reality (e.g.
or explained
Quine)1 - to elaborate arguments designed to reduce the inDennett).2 The latter resemble nothing more than the gymnastics of theologians attempting to explain the
. .
Another approach (e.g. Searle s) is to admit mtentionality to the real world but to try to naturalize it, declaring (but again without much argument) simply a property or Unction of the brain and nervous system, just as digestion is a function of the stomach and intestines.3 There is much skepticism about whether this will work
convinced in advance
'
.
i::.-
282
283
one might suppose that intentionality would be embraced by those with an equally a priori committment to
,
matrialist ontology
views than
intended object which has interested analytic philosophers, because of the logical peculiarities of statements describing the relation between the mind and those objects: How to treat the fact that the existence of a mental state 'requires' an object, yet does not entail the existence of the object, or entails it only under a
certain description?
In any case I would argue that intentionality is most welcomed by those whose first allegiance is not to ontological purity of any sort but who have a taste for the variety and even the irrepressible untidiness of things For them intentionality is a tool for getting at and describing some of this variety These are the true phenomenologists and even the true descendents of Husserl I would
.
Husserl by contrast finally decided that the ontological status of the objects of consciousness interested him not at all - except de as intended by or in the intentional state in question - and he ma
argue
introduced by Brentano as a way of distinguishing the mental from the physical Husserl likewise largely restrictied its use to the mental or to consciousness Merleau-Ponty boldly used it to characterize the body attacking not the ghost but the machine of Ryle's cartoon Cartesianism The result is a brilliant tour de force of description whatever its faults It fits neither idealism nor
.
programmatic texts. For these philosophers the point is not to make intentionality disappear but to use it for all it's worth wherever it will work as a way of illuminating things Consider the work of Merleau Ponty. Intentionality had been
,
this ontological indifference into a methodological principle, the epoche. What did interest him was the various ways an object tual could be intended: its givenness through a variety of percep appearances over time, its identity as an object now of perception, now of imagination, now of memory, the stipulation of its region' and its predicational possibilities through the 'noema', etc. - all those things that go to make up the complicated notion
'
Thus we could say that the analytic approach tries to fit intent
d
.
iohe
materialism
about perception that we couldn't otherwise see Like Merleau-Ponty I want to take the concept of intentionality from its original home and try to apply it elsewhere I want to see if we can consider it a characteristic not of minds or of bodies or
.
.
Each is interested thus real world only as it is mentally intende in both the mind and the real world, but they approach their relation with different methods and different priorities. While these differences concern intentions and their objects, similar differences attend the treatment of the relation between
'
even of persons
tal and a physical thought to be compatible with both a men long-range hope and expecapproach to the human subject. The ils will be worked out tation for many, of course, is that the deta brain will be the by a more advanced brain-physiology, so that the
mental states and their subject. Analytic philosophers, on the persons using a neutral term whole, have ascribed them to
'
,
excited interest in different quarters for different reasons Intentional mental states are those which are essentially directed at an object or content It is primarily the ontological status of the
. .
treated. Regarded as a property of consciousness or of mental states - e g. thinking believing, desiring intending, etc. - it has
.
intentional states. Husserlian pheultimate bearer or owner of k of the I or ego, a much more nomenologists have tended to spea
in the phenomenology intentions belonging to one subject - but aga is works than in the ists have been more interested in how th the subject. Again their focus is on ultimate ontological status of e bear in themselves the sens the intentional states and how they hat of their object. Especially in of their subject as well as t
J
.
4i
284
285
treatments of the temporal flow of experiences, the problem of the unity of consciousness has been treated as essentially just
analogues of ourselves. Thus the argument from analogy which may not work as a proof for the existence of other minds is used
' ,
'
'
'
so that in Husserl at
,
constantly in the ascription of mental content to others. This is at least one way of understanding the method of Verstehen. The
mental states of other individuals are as real as our own. As for
Husserl somehow lies beyond all individuality and if the ego is considered as a methodological principle, there is a certain sense
,
thing: it is to the I as an individual subject or person rather than to any sort of plurality that intentionality properly belongs This is as true of Merleau's body-subject as it is of Searle's brain-subject. It may be argued that the so-called 'transcendental* ego of
,
.
the group, it exists as a real (collective) object, but what sense does
it make to consider it a collective subject?
ascribing mental properties is tied not only to the individual but also to a first-person method or point of view still ultimately
descended from Descates. Intentional and other mental states may
in which this is true The fact remains that it is still called an ego, which at the very least is an analogue of the individual subject - an individual I we might say, considered in a very special
.
way.
Consider now the fact that in ordinary speech we often ascribe to groups some of the same kinds of 'mental* properties that we ascribe to individuals Social entities of various sorts - families cultural groups (the black community) political units (the American public) - have experiences act, take decisions express themselves, find themselves in moods and feel anger and animosity What are we to make of this? Most theorists today are inclined to dismiss notions of a 'group mind' or 'collective consciousness*. Even those who argue for holism over individualism in the methodology of the social sciences tend to dismiss it One reason is that the notion somehow suggests demagoguery and mob manipu.
be considered both public and corrigible - that is, another person may know as well as I do what my states of mind are and may them. even in some cases know better, since I can be wrong about Nevertheless I have a direct access to them others do not have and in most cases I do serve as the final arbiter of what they are. This
ty from its link to the individual and applying it to the socia bject remains paradigm for ascribing intentional states to some su Other
intentionalil. The
struction
ii
lation
PrOPertieS HkC thoughts and f nZ Z* indiJLals ouS ve and con er the members of society ** ourselves and consid as
o
T " qUeSti0n- BUt prob Zl LZt cal and X M T" * * COinbination of 0nto10 0f COlleCti0nS indW r ! TSl the holists argue' that the l
' '
ascriptions as short-cuts for describing the thoughts and feelings l""UJ51U5 *u,u lcc*a l of the individuals that mC the individuals that of make up the ' groups in question. But UP
""~""
rrrandhelp c economi
*
" . tentional or as involving intentional components. Oneperc u fl/ and the other is action. Consider now U* bus of **> these to these subject. reflectivelyhave con dee some to (or So far we recognize them in which
dca
do to that we -ake *od sense of this notion. I propose to by beginning withththe last-mentioned methodological opcisocial and ere to undercut the idea that taUc f a Proceed subject is iust a short-cut for talking about individuals.
f e.
has built up against the notion ot a soc.m or collective su nas built up against the notion of a social
Nevertheless
in)
286
287
myself, and cases in which I ascribe them to others, whether an individual or a group But there is a third case which offers a compromise and a more promising avenue of approach: the case in which I ascribe the experience or action neither to an I a thou, a they or an it but to a we In this case I participate in the
.
It does not include all uses of the 'we' and requires more than a common object perceived by a plurality of subjects - even simulta-
neously, as we have seen. Our class is that of common or shared experiences, those of experiencing something together. But this
experience or action
ours, not my action but our action If we take such cases as our
focus we shall have the advantage that we have not left the first-person point of view behind but merely exchanged its singular for its plural form
,
.
is clearly a large and important class, and our analysis of it can be put this way: each participant experiences the object and is aware of the others in such a way that he cannot possibly attri-
bute the experience to himself alone. After all, it has manifold phases and perspectives, and some of these are not directly avail-
What is in fact going on when we participate in actions and experiences in such a way that we attribute them to a wel There
are, of course
,
that 'we saw* the Eiffel tower but this implies hardly more than
,
'
con-
a common object
experience
or at the same time but unaware of each other's presence Little is lost if we substitute for the 'we saw' a simple conjunction: I saw the tower and you saw it But if we see it together something essential to the experience is lost when that substitution is made since in this case each of us saw the tower and was aware that the other was seeling it too This sense of seeing something together as expressed in the use of 'we by both parties in describing the
.
stituting' the object may appear somewhat abstract in the case o viewing a simple stable object. But consider the experience of a complex event like a game of football before a crowd of spectators
or a trafic accident on a busy street. Especially in the latter cas
rushing to help
e,
the strong sense of reciprocal awareness is manifested in the h other, reactions of the spectators: turning to look, addressing eac nt
etc. The intersubjective constitution of the eve t telling may become manifest only later when these witnesses star ves on about what they saw and revealing their different perspectt
,
'
is
to a common subject as it is referred outward to a common object That is the sense it has for both parties
'
It
experience 'going on* of this one tower which can properly be attached to only sort of subject: the plural subject we.
What is contained in this sense? A la Husserl we can say that there is no perceptual object without its 'manners of givenness If I wander about I see the same tower from different points of view. When we see the tower together different points of view are simultaneous as well as spread out over time. They can be simultaneous because there are two individuals But for each of us the sense of the experience contains these two points of view at once. I may not see the tower through your eyes but its being seen through your eyes as well as my own is part of the experience as /have it - or rather as I participate in it For manifestly it is not
.
sive
better ror
But if we do the shopping, or il we p y going and your going tennis or if we build a cottage, the equivalence will not hold, u an action is constituted in phases, in this case s p a perception
, ,
go 1
J te* r**
M
it
ion can still
nted
be attributed to us
.
.
always be broken down into the perceptions <>r ac n individuals involved, and that their plurality ca
'
288
289
individual
III
includes the others in his individual understanding of what is going on. This may be true but it would involve a third-person external description of the scene Our procedure however, to repeat, is to
,
.
These considerations permit us to move to another aspect of our topic. Up to now we have spoken of the we as subject of particular experiences or actions, and have tried to clarify what that means.
There are several parallels between the structure of common action and the structure of common experience. Corresponding
But to be a genuine or full-fledged subject, the we must, like the I, persist throughout a multiplicity of experiences and actions spread out over time Only in this sense does the group as such
.
action. In both cases there is reference back to a common subject a we. Between the two poles is the complex 'constitution': here
,
cases common experience can bring a we-subject into being, and a series of common experiences can sustain it in being. But only
if it already has a stable existence such as one brought forth by a series of common experiences can a group undertake common
,
,
coordinated perspectives there coordinated tasks which are distributed laterally or synchronically among the members of the
,
one case and the practical intention (which of course, corresponds to our usual or non philosophical sense of 'intention') in
,
-
but in consulting our own sense of participation. As described above participating in an experience means that I understand or hile
,
of its existence
.
subject (or agent) in each case especially where we are speaking of a plural subject: in cases like the traffic accident the we is brought together by or formed around the object or event perceived; while in the case of common action since the object has yet to be produced the we-subject must exist independently of it not independently of its conception perhaps, or of the common
, , ,
,
of fit' .4 We can express this difference by saying that in perception the experience is called forth by and tailored to the object which exists independently of it; while in the case of action the object (or objective) is literally brought forth or produced by the action itself. This difference carries over in an interesting way to the
,
Between the two sorts of intentions, perceptual and practical there is of course the difference in what Searle calls the 'direction
,
same object and the same subject - in fact it is the same experie
-
attributing the experience not to myself but to a collection the o persons of which I am part. Their experience and mine have
nce
just as I include them in the 'we'. Since even a particular exhis same we as tre participate are grasped as having t The sense of common experience has to e genuine subject long enough and be diverse enough to establish an enduring gv of persons who mutually acknowledge their membership m thing common
in which I
.
perience is temporal we already have a temporal unity diversity What needs to happen further is that other experiences
>
Geist in the Phenom ln8 to note that Hegel introduces the term nology by calling it 'an I that is we, a we that is I 5 This occurs
-
cogt
-
ln fact in
the
master-servant dialectic,
290
291
nity of mutually recognizing members emerges out of the struggle of conflict and domination One way of reading this is that the drama of mutual destruction and eslavement itself becomes the common experience in which both sides finally recognize that they share. Individuals who treat each other as objects ti be dominated
.
self-preservation. Thus the prospect of its death is just as important as its birth to the community, just as it is for the individual. Like the individual, the community exists as a coherent unity by
are transformed into co-subjects who can say we. Since the
developing conflict has essentially been fought over the possession, habitation and exploitation of their natural surrounding world, one imagines the transformation of this territorial conflict
into an organized economic community with divided labor. Common experience makes possible the establishment of a we-subject
capable of common action Common action and the
.
composing and recomposing its own biography, projecting its future before it even as it interprets and reinterprets its past. Each of these is understood in light of the other, and the present in light of both. Just as the individual comes up with not only changing
but also conflicting simultaneous stories about himself or herself, so too with the community. In the latter case it is different individuals of course, who put forward these stories, each
,
community capable of it
.
have of
course to be communicatively constituted 'We' has to be said in certain ways and understood in the same ways on all sides Thus the division of labor which is characteristic of common action carries over to the very discourse of the community: some individ.
nity is entirely free of conflicting versions of what constitutes its life-story its origins, tasks and prospects. But some communities
,
and rhythms of life Leaders, spokesmen and women the formulators and deliverers of the common rhetoric are story-tellers or
.
ral sequences or phases of experience and action are tied together as beginning-middle-end configurations that make up the episodes
,
,
uals speak to and for the others articulating what the group is about, not in their own name as individuals, but on behalf of all. This discourse is invariably a narrative discourse in which tempo,
persuasion, negotiation, revision. Like the individual the community is not a fixed substantial entity but a project of til
self-unification and self-constitution which never really ends un
.
its death
IV
alive the story of that origin is part of what keeps them together.
Further any community faces the runner
,
-a* -
real, their story must be not only told and heard but also accepted or subscribed to and then acted out by the others who are included in the plural subject Narrative structure is characteristic not only of the temporal unity of experiences and actions, but also of the subject or agent which lives in and through those experiences and actions This is to say that certain groups we call communities are subjects for themselves of a kind of life story, just as the individual is They trace themselves to an origin, either real or mythical and keeping
.
.
-
It is in this sense, then, that certain kinds of social groups - the tion ones we usually call communities can be considered inten
-
Ejects analogues in some ways to individual subjects, ins means first of all simply that intentional properties - Dene ,
,
Perceptions
knows that this is done; I have tried to show how thtf is done a have argued that in certain crucial cases such attribution reducible to or short-hand for similar ascriptions to nun members I am thus arguing if you will, for theM*c\"h
.
ryone
attributions: I am claiming that a certain kind of taut, m all frequently engage, is justified.
any community faces the possibility of destruction from possibility of destruction from
?10 neight
0
J*"*
0"PS
of this
an s0cial
292
293
. fJ
i fiig,
then singular. It is substantiated not by considering groups as objects but by consulting our own sense of participation in them.
From here, of course, it can be and is carried over to other
r i ~r :4. u~ 1 :? *~ ~*Uar
. .
erties are not the only kinds properly attributed to them. Such groups are distributed in space and many of their properties
,
blacks or as workers and not just as isolated individuals that they experience certain things Given such communities it is obvious that intentional prop,
an intentional subject is to say that, whatever else it might be, it exists primarily though its intentional properties, - its experiences
and actions - which give it the character of being of. It is characterized essentially or defined by its intentional orientation
to a world: to things instruments, events, persons and, of course,
,
economic or
demographic characteristics may be described in strictly causal rather than intentional terms But then this mixture of intentional
other communities
forms beliefs and feels emotions upon them it acts. But to use
non-intentional
strictly 'mental* attributes of both individuals and groups e.g. certain generalized moods and feelings, are commonly considered
,
.
the third-person 'it* in such descriptions is highly artificial and misleading Better to say: for any such community of which I am a member it is we who experience, believe, feel and act, it is m
.
phenomena are not intentional Since Merleau-Ponty we can say further that some physical properties and relations i.e. those of the lived body are intentional It is just such considerations which permit us to say that, for all the qualifications and cautions that must be made the community is primarily or essentially an intentional subject MerleauPonty concluded this about the body I believe when he extended intentionality to it Admittedly, he was speaking from the first
.
tentionality is not as Brentano thought a way of dividing the mental from the physical since some of these clearly 'mental*
,
hat
we exist and maintain our existence as a community. in turn, is itself an intentional world The community's world the
that is
,
but a make up not a collection of objects and objective relations ty le from the conunum implex of meaning which is not detachab mtentionality which constitutes it. This, at any rate, is all tna mterests us about these objects, insofar as we are conduct n
community's intentions, and these are more have. As a worldm ever objective or causal properties they may
important
J at-
coordination and motility - which orient it within the surrounding world and render the furniture of that world perceptually present.
i
formost of something: of the world That is it exists primarily though those attributes chiefly its sentience and its over-all
.
consult his experience of his own body His claim was that from this perspective whatever else it may be the body is first and
,
concern us
That his is also true of the common subject is a p eady made sufficiently clear. This feature of my
oint\\ P
J
i
294
295
mind' are often presented as or understood by others as straightforward ontological claims: such a being simply exists; furthermore it pursues its own aims exploiting the individual members of the group for purposes unknown to them and usually opposed to the ones they themselves pursue. Such at any rate is
,
,
should allay some of the fears and suspicions many associate with
from certain experiences we have and actions we engage in; and I am trying to show how it thus emerges, how it functions and the role it plays in our experience, action and discourse. We do exist
and participate in such communities - indeed they are very important parts of our lives. We do say we to each other and we mean
which echoes
.
More
altogether.
conceptions individuals are either unwitting dupes or they are swept up in an unruly mob which obliterates their individuality
.
of individual existence in what he calls the group-in-fusion for which the storming of the Bastille serves as the paradigm 6 In these
,
.
It may be objected that I have gone to such lengths to avoid reifying the communal subject that I have left it with no reality at all. It seems now to exist only as a projection in the minds of
individuals who turn out to be, after all, the real entities presup,
on the plurality as on the subjectivity and agency of the communi ty, and the latter is not opposed to the individuals who make it up but exists precisely by virtue of their acknowledgement of each other and their consciousness of the We
.
but to the genuine insights expressed for example, as we said earlier in the Phenomenology. There Hegel insists as much
,
history
the one advanced here By abandoning and subverting individual subjectivity they take us from the I not to a we but simply to a putative large-scale I. Our view corresponds not to the caricature of Hegel derived largely from the lectures on the philosophy of
.
rejected as the paradigm for social existence and as the only alternative to 'seriality* But these views are very different from
.
These conceptions deserve the suspicion they arouse The first is arrived at by post hoc ergo propter hoc reasoning and the second while doubtless corresponding to something real is to be
,
,
that series; and it will be recalled that I said exactly the same thing of the I itself Like the we, the I exists as the unity of a multiplicity
.
advance but constituted in and throught that multiplicity. And if ly the narrative that constitutes the individual self is at least part
d by social in origin; if my possible ways of existing are delineate available and feasiwhat we as a community render conceivable,
ble
,
that is, if the self is indeed partially a 'social construction and neither is more real than the other.
dent
object - singular or plural - may seem a pa j notion of reality is tailored to the hard physical world. Ana i be difficult for them to fit such ephemera into their seam
And what kind of reality is this? The reality of thethose wno ention le thing to
.
account
based on the experience of the individuals that com constitute them pose and With the ontological flexibility that I think is or at least should be characteristic of a genuinely phenomenolo
.
not a straightforward ontological claim about the real existence of collective or plural subjects but rather a reflexive account
,
By following the first person (plural) approach by stressing certain uses of the we and by describing the narrative construction of the community I hope to make it clear that I am presenting
-
ontology
>
re
38 anything we know.
gical
296
NOTES
The Locus classicus is Quine's Word and Object (Cambridge, Mass. The M I T Press, 1960), p. 221. Daniel Dennett, Content and Consciousness (New York: Humanities Press,
. . .
1969).
3
4
.
Intentionality (Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 1983) p. IX. Ibid., p, 7. G.W.F. Hegel, Phenomenology of Spirit, trans. A.V. Miller (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1977) p. 110. J.P. Sartre, Critique de la raison dialectique (Paris: Gallimard, 1960) pp.
392 f f.
Acknowledgments
and Index
Acknowledgments
The papers in this volume were previously published in the books andkind hers concer I would like to express my thanks to the editors and publis
permission to reprint them here.
'
vj
'
, "'
rnu
'
'
The Fifth Meditation and Husserl's Cartesianism appeared m nological Research vol. 34, no. 1, 1973, PP- 14-35. cnuthwestem Journal of the Husserl's Crisis and the Problem of History appeared in
Philosophy vol. 5, no. 3, 1974, pp. 127-148. *' History Phenomenology and Reflection' was P"* ed. Don Inde and Richard M. Zaner, the Hague. Ma
, ,
'
Dialogues in Phenomenology'
Nijhoff> 1975, pp.
_
'
156-175.
'
'
Findlay
'
University of New York Press, 1985, pp. d Herme Interpretation and Self-Evidence: Husserl an
Husserliana, vol. 9, ed. A.T.
1978, pp.
MarO"
Westphai, Albany:
SUte
Tyfflieniecka, Bosto .
'
'
y World. World-View, Lifeworld: Husserl andI the c Lebenswelt Husserl und de the title Welt. Welt in der pHilosophie pubUshed in German under Vertreter des Begriffsrelativismus in Le e''.0 Klostermann Verlag. 1979. pp.
.
Phenomenology:
Rece?t interprete Husserl ans Some Recen * nna Textbook, ed. Wilhan. A
rs
'
, N. Mohanty.
V>
'3
300
Index
ed. W. McBride and C Schrag, Albany: State University of New York Press 1983, pp.
,
263-272.
'
Cogitamus Ergo Sumus: The Intentionality of the First-Person Plural* appeared in The
Monist
,
it may be appropriate to acknowledge some long-term debts In my work on Husserl I have learned
,
.
Since the essays in this volume represent the work of some fifteen years
.
from many philosophers and met many fine people Five of these, whom I have been priveleged to know as teachers, senior colleagues mentors and friends, unite philosophical
,
and human qualities in superlative fashion They are: Herbert Spiegelberg, J.N. Findlay,
.
Christianity 9
Paul Ricoeur
and even philosophically they are as far apart as their diverse places of origin - Germany South Africa France, India, Russia. What brings them together is more than their conviction that interpreting Husserl is a worthwhile part of their philosophical endeavors In doing so their abiding concern is never Scholarship' but what Husserl called die Sachen selbst, to which they are utterly devoted without guile or vanity Their importance and depth as philosophers and teachers is complemented by a rare generosity of spirit of which
,
.
Analytic philosophy 2,
26, 227
Anglo-American philosophy
Anglo-Hegelians 159
Anthropology 14 Anxiety 202-203
117-136, 283
2-3
,
267-27*
Constitution
n distinctio 3-4. .
133
M3
w.
,30,
Cornman, James
Critical Theory
Appearance-reality
15
13
Appearances 4, 7
79
Dasein 202-2
03
lo*
D,S? Zt
s
220f 4 Ren4
Di
ihi,
203-210, 219,
t
DismantUng
Bracketing 99
Dreyfus, Huber
125, 24U
Ego, empirical
vs.
non-empirical
137-156
British
m Empiricis
2*
Cairns, Dorion
Cartesiamsm 182
.
M
z-J'
Eidos 141-143.
Einstein, Albert
.
146
19
99-200
Tway L Cartesian u
y
o " r
phenomenology 4
Empiricism 86
Epistemology 1
71
.fA -Ht
302
Epoche 3, 8, 10, 15, 35-36, 59, 75, 82, 157-158, 195, 233
Essences, intuition of 141
303
Inauthenticity 10, 202-203 , 209-210 Intentionality 9, 15-16, 34-36, 40, 117-136, 147, 281-295; vs.
Natural attitude
sciences of
Neo-Marxism Noema
Ryle, Gilbert
281-282
phenomenological attitude
8; thesis of
13
153-154;
7
Ethnomethodology 11 Existentialism 3, 10-11, 13, 72, 227 Feyerabend, Paul 26, 214 Findlay, J.N. 157-178
Finitude
237
Sartre, Jean-Paul
17, 90
Scheler Max 1, 25
Nietzsche, Friedrich
Saussure, Ferdinand de
60-64,
36, 239-240
Nominalism
142
180, 202-203
Intersubjectivity
Nostalgia, historical
264
Foucault, Michel
Frankfurt School
Objective world
Kant, Immanuel 5-6, 10, 28, 30, 35,
48, 57, 80
Scholastic philosophers 118 Schutz, Alfred 2, 210, 268, 270-271 Searle, John 16, 20, 281, 284, 288 Sedimentation 77, 80, 107, 111-112,
218, 243, 263 Self-evidence 179-196
Frege, Gottlob 119, 166, 239 Freud, Sigmund 179 Gadamer, Hans-Georg 15, 25-26, 39-40, 179, 183, 187, 188, 191-192, 215, 221, 223, 237 Galilei, Galileo Geiger, Moritz 17, 72, 85 102,
,
72, 86, 89, 137-157, 160, 168, 173, 185-186, 189, 195, 214, 218, 230, 232
Kantianism 138
Sellars, Wilfred
Sensations
118, 187
29-30
Kuhn, Thomas
Kundera, Milan
Pfander, Alexander
Plato
Landgrebe, Ludwig 2, 103, 108 Language 16, 216, 227, 276
Plotinus
Sociology
14, 16-17, 227
11
25
Positivism
26
Genetic phenomenology
German Idealism Godel, Kurt 258
2, 91
76-78
Leibniz, G.W.
155 220
Post-structuralism
Prejudice 181
26, 268
Levi-Strauss, Claude
Groups
269-270, 284-295
Protagoras
220
Protention
Gurwitch, Aron
Psychologism
14
Habermans, Jiirgen 16 18-20 Hegel, G.W.F. 6, 9-10 18, 35-36, 62, 90, 157, 159, 176 182-184, 187-188, 192, 204, 215, 218-219 273-275, 289,
,
Quine, W.V.O.
Rationalism
Maclntyre, Ronald
240
12, 86
McTaggart, John
Marras, Ausonio
198
117
Rationality
17-18
294
Heidegger, Martin
1-3 10, 17, 25-26, 32-34, 37, 39-41, 92, 100 111, 179, 182-183, 185, 188-189 192, 197-198, 201-203, 206-210 215, 217, 219,
, , , , ,
Marx, Karl
Marxism 14
Realism 281-282; empirical 10; and idealism 3, 157-158; naive 215, 218;
vs. nominalism 142; in
Mathematization
ontology
Recollection
Reductionism
161; scientific
55, 250-265
13
Mediation
188
22&-229; transcendental
Unconscious
14
Meinong, Alexius
161-163, 170
Referential opacity
Reflection 159
119
Historicism
Merleau-Ponty, Maurice 1-2, 8, 11, 13, 16, 18, 25-26 32-34, 37, 41, 89, 92, 112, 139, 227, 237, 242-243, 282, 284,
,
Relativism
skeptical
Renaissance
25-44; conceptual
239
73, 229
12,
292
Horizon
10 14
,
Michelson, Albert A.
,
19
Hume, David
26 86, 256
25
Retention 38, 76, 200-201, 250-265 Ricoeur Paul 2, 13, 16, 179, 183, 191,
,
Monad
195
3 282, 241;
,
Moore, G.E.
161, 173
Rorty, Richard
Russel Bertrand
,
27-28
161
subjective
51
168; transcendental
10
Narrative structure
290-295
. P1
Ideology
217; critique of 92
Naturalism
214
'
<=
! ' : {<-.
,
.
"
'
'
i i